JP7215550B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2014-045989 A

Here, in a game machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to make game contents suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of making game contents suitable.

In order to solve the above problem, the invention according to claim 1 provides a situation setting means for setting a predetermined situation,
Advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player when the predetermined situation exists;
game-number-corresponding termination means for terminating the predetermined situation when the number of games executed in the predetermined situation reaches the upper limit number of games;
with
In the predetermined situation,
a first stay mode in which the predetermined situation ends when the advantageous gaming state ends in the predetermined situation;
a second stay mode in which the predetermined situation can continue even after the advantageous gaming state ends in the predetermined situation;
is set and
The advantageous transition means are
a first release transition means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state based on the number of games executed in the predetermined situation and the specific game state reaching a first release game number ;
If the predetermined situation is maintained in the case where the advantageous game state ends in the second stay mode and the transition to the specific game state is performed, if the predetermined situation is the specific game state a second release transition means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the number of games played has reached the second release game number;
with
The upper limit number of games is a number of games greater than the total number of games of the first unlocked game number, the second unlocked game number, and the minimum continuous game number of the advantageous gaming state,
A plurality of the number of first release games exist,
All of the first release game numbers are smaller than the upper limit game number .

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the game content suitable.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern and a combination line that can be visually recognized through the display window; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; (a) It is a front view of a common display area, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on a combined display part. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit; FIG. 1 is an electrical configuration diagram of a slot machine; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the start waiting process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing bet handling processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting process at the time of start executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a lottery process for a winning combination executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal mode lottery table when three cards are bet; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal mode lottery table when two cards are bet; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the reel stop order and the winning mode established when the normal mode lottery table is selected; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for the first RT mode when three cards are bet; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the first RT mode is selected; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for the second RT mode when three cards are bet; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the order of stopping reels and the winning mode established when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining index values with different winning probabilities between set values "1" to "6"; 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a corresponding process at the end of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game state and the game section that exist in the slot machine. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first section and the second section, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state in the second section. (a) An explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB combination and the second CB combination, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the first CB state and the second CB state. It is a flowchart which shows the process for CB performed by main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the game state shifts to the CB state and how the shift to the CB state is restricted. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of notification related to winning states of the first CB and second CB hands. (a) to (j) are time charts showing how various notifications are executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet. It is a flowchart which shows the internal information control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing at the time of the supply start performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for non-internal medium information performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st CB inside information processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 2nd CB internal middle alerting|reporting performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area of a main RAM; (a) It is a flowchart which shows the all clear processing performed by the main side MPU, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the partial clear processing which is performed by the main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how partial clear processing and full clear processing are executed in the main MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state in the direct hit lottery process, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the selection probability of each of the A to C modes in the lottery process for the stay mode. (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the respective selection probabilities of immediate lighting and lighting standby in the lighting lottery process for the section display section. It is an explanatory view for explaining a stay mode. It is a flowchart which shows the setting processing of stay mode performed by main side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing the timing at which the section display section is switched from the off state to the on state in the second section. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd control processing of the game area performed by main side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ending handling processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ending production|presentation control processing performed by production|presentation side MPU. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing advantageous lottery processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state in the direct hit lottery process, and (b) an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning in the pseudo-bonus state in the transition lottery process. . It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by main side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the stop order notification control process performed by main side MPU. (a) It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state in which it is notified that the first stop is the left reel when the winning is made with the index value IV=5, and (b) with the index value IV=5. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which it is notified that the first stop is the right reel when winning is won; (a) is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process at the start of a game executed by the main MPU, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning an ART state transition lottery process in the ART state transition lottery process. is. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing advantageous end processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for pseudo bonuses performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts showing how the pseudo-bonus state progresses. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the end effect in the image display device, and is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution content of the resurrection effect in the image display device. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the ART state; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the number of games is apportioned in the ART state; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing ART processing at the start of a game, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing ART state processing executed by the main MPU; It is a flowchart which shows the loop lottery process performed by main side MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the loop lottery process is executed. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing next-set add-on processing executed by the main MPU; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for starting the current set, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation control processing for ART performed by production|presentation side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how various effects progress in the first unit execution time. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of symbols for establishing the first CB prize and the combination of symbols for establishing the second CB prize in the second embodiment; It is a time chart showing the flow of the game when winning . It is a flowchart which shows the switching control process of the internal information performed by MPU on the production|presentation side in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing termination preparation state processing executed by the main MPU in the fourth embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU in the fifth embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the loop lottery process performed by main side MPU. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing for starting the current set, which is executed by the main MPU; FIG.

<First Embodiment>
A first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of game machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. A plurality of wooden panels are fixed to the housing 11 so that the housing 11 is formed into a box-like shape that is open forward as a whole.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 as shown in FIGS. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 so as to be able to open and close the internal space of the housing 11 with a shaft portion 12a provided on the left side of the front door 12 as a rotation axis. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the rear side thereof.

A game panel 20 is provided near the upper center portion of the front door 12 as shown in FIG. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M and 21R are made of a transparent or translucent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be viewed through the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 11a, and the reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, which are each formed in a cylindrical shape. Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that its center axis coincides with the rotation axis of the reel 32L, 32M, 32R. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R one-to-one. there is Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are projected through the respective display windows 21L, 21M, 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 20 as shown in FIG. When the start lever 41 is operated while game media such as medals and virtual medals are bet, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating all at once.

On the right side of the start lever 41, stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The respective stop buttons 42, 43, 44 are arranged directly below the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped, respectively. Each of the stop buttons 42, 43, 44 is in a state in which it can be stopped after a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 32L started rotating.

The reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating based on the operation of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44. One game (game cycle) is performed until the execution of various processes such as the granting of and the management of the game state is completed.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals as an investment value is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R. As shown in FIG. 2, the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to the hopper device 53 by the selector 52 provided on the back of the front door 12 when reception is permitted, and are guided to the hopper device 53 when reception is prohibited. The medals are led to a medal receiving tray 59 from a medal discharge port 58 provided in the front lower portion of the front door 12 (see FIG. 1). The hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 through the medal discharge port 58 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of game media is established on the main line ML, which will be described later. have. Below the medal slot 45, as shown in FIG. 1, a return button 46 is provided to be pushed when the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are stuck in the selector 52. As shown in FIG.

On the lower left side of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum amount of credited virtual medals that can be betted at once, and a button for inserting two virtual medals at once. A second credit input button 48 is provided. In this slot machine 10, there are situations where the number of game media (medals or virtual medals) that can be betted (that is, bet setting) at one time is "3" and "2".

The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and three or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of decreasing the number of virtual medals by three. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "2", and one or more virtual tokens are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "3" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one. The first credit insertion button 47 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. When the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and two or more virtual tokens are stored, the first credit insertion button 47 is operated. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one.

If the number of stored virtual medals is less than the difference between the current bet number and the bettable number, and the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, the bet number will be the number of virtual medals. The number of virtual medals is increased, and the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "3", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be made at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "0", and two or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by two. The second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of bets that can be betted at one time is "2", the current number of bets is "1", and one or more virtual medals are stored. In this case, the number of bets becomes "2" instead of the number of virtual medals being reduced by one.

When the second credit insertion button 48 is operated in a situation where the number of stored virtual medals is one and the current bet number is "0", the bet number will be "1". At the same time, the number of virtual medals becomes zero.

The first credit insertion button 47 has a wider pressing surface than the second credit insertion button 48 when the player operates the button. Thereby, the operability of the first credit insertion button 47 is enhanced.

A settlement button 51 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41 . The slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals, and the virtual medals are stored and stored. When the checkout button 51 is operated under these conditions, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal discharge port 58 as real medals.

A power supply device 54 is provided inside the housing 11 to the left of the hopper device 53 as shown in FIGS. The power supply device 54 includes a power switch 55 operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a set value of the slot machine 10 from "1" to "6". , a setting key insertion hole 57 into which a setting key owned by the manager of the game hall is inserted and operated is provided.

Next, the symbols attached to each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 4 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, middle reel 32M and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a line on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In addition, numbers "0" to "20" are assigned to the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and these numbers are visible from the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R of the main controller 70, which will be described later. It is a number for recognizing the symbol in a state of being in a bad state, and is not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “bell” symbol (eg, 20th on the left reel 32L), a “replay” symbol (eg, 19th on the left reel 32L), a “watermelon” symbol (eg, 18th on the left reel 32L), and “ Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), "White 7" symbol (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of various symbols are different for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIG. 5 is a front view of the display windows 21L, 21M and 21R. Each of the display window portions 21L, 21M, 21R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, 32R are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set so as to connect positions where symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line connecting the middle symbols of the left reel 32L, the middle symbols of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols of the right reel 32R. The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started with a specified number of game media bet, and when a prize corresponding to the winning combination is established on the main line ML, the profit of giving the game media, Either the benefit of replay or the transition of the game state is provided.

That is, in the present slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line on which winning can be established. The main line ML is set as a straight line. Therefore, a subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. A subline SL3 connecting a connected subline SL2, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a lower pattern of the right reel 32R, a lower pattern of the left reel 32L, a middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R. Winning is not established even if a winning combination is established on a straight line such as a sub-line SL4 connecting the upper symbols of .

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 6, the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning will be described. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the combination of winning symbols and the privilege given when winning.

Small wins for which game media are awarded include a first bell win, a second bell win, a first watermelon win, a second watermelon win, and a cherry win. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, Received the 1st bell prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second bell wins. becomes. When either the first bell prize or the second bell prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “11”.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "watermelon" symbol on the main line ML, the first watermelon wins. becomes. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second watermelon wins. becomes. When either the first watermelon prize or the second watermelon prize is won, the number of game media to be given becomes “5”. When the stopped symbol of the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" symbol, the cherry prize is won regardless of whether the stopped symbol of the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is. In the case of winning a cherry prize, the number of game media to be given becomes “2”.

Winnings that give the benefit of replaying the next game without betting game media include normal replay winnings, first chance replay winnings, second chance replay winnings, first replay winnings, first replay winnings, and second chance replay winnings. There are 2RT replay wins, first fall replay wins, and second fall replay wins. Specifically, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, On the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, or the main line ML In the above case, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the normal replay wins.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the first chance replay. Win a prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second chance replay. Win a prize.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is a "bell" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first RT replay wins. becomes. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "watermelon" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the second RT replay wins. becomes.

When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "cherry" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "replay" symbol on the main line ML, the first fall replay. Win a prize. When the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "replay" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "bell" symbol on the main line ML, the second drop replay. Win a prize.

If any of the above replay wins are made, a replay privilege is given that allows the player to play the next game without betting the game medium. Specifically, if any of the replay wins in the game in which "3" game media are betted, the betting of the game media is not required, and the next game is started with the "3" game media being betted. A game can be started. In addition, if any of the replay wins in the game in which the game medium "2" is betted, the play of the next game is started with the game medium "2" betted, while the game medium is not required to be wagered. It becomes possible to

Among the above various replay prizes, the first RT replay prize, the second RT replay prize, the first fall replay prize, and the second fall replay prize not only trigger the provision of the replay prize privilege, but also trigger the transition to the lottery mode. In the slot machine 10, a plurality of types of lottery modes are set so that the type of winning combination to be selected and the winning probability of each combination differ in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). Occurs when the replay winning that triggers the transition to the lottery mode is established. Details of each lottery mode and conditions for transition to each lottery mode will be described later in detail.

A first CB prize and a second CB prize are available as state transition prizes in which only game state transitions are performed. Specifically, on the main line ML, the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "red 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "red 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol. In that case, it will be the 1st CB prize. On the main line ML, when the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is the "WHITE 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is the "WHITE 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol, the second CB. Win a prize. When the first CB prize is established, the game state shifts to the first CB state, and when the second CB prize is established, the game state shifts to the second CB state.

The 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state are game states in which when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning of a minor combination is stopped on the main line ML, medals are paid out as winning regardless of whether there is a winning combination. For example, even if the win flag corresponding to the first bell win is not set to "1", if the combination of symbols corresponding to the first bell win stops on the main line ML, the game medium will be sent to the player. Granted. On the other hand, the replay winning prize is established on the condition that the corresponding combination is won in the lottery.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, reel control different from that in the non-CB state is performed. In the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can slide up to four symbols after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated. In other words, in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to be stopped within a specified time (190 msec) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. On the other hand, in the first CB state and the second CB state, the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are controlled as described above, that is, the same reel control as in the normal game, but the left reel 32L is not controlled. As for the left reel 32L, reel control is performed such that the left reel 32L is slid only up to one symbol after the left stop button 42 is operated. That is, in the first CB state and the second CB state, the left reel 32L is reel-controlled to stop within a specified time (75 msec) shorter than the specified time after the left stop button 42 is operated.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the reel control that slips only up to one symbol is not limited to the left reel 32L, and the reel corresponding to the stop button that was operated first has a maximum of one symbol. Control may be performed such that the reel is slipped only up to the predetermined reel, or reel control may be performed such that only a predetermined reel is slipped by a maximum of one symbol. Further, the stop button operated in a certain order is controlled such that the reel corresponding to the stop button operated second or the stop button operated last is controlled to slide only up to one symbol. Reel control may be performed such that the reel corresponding to the .

In the 1st CB state and the 2nd CB state, if the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning prize is won, the replay winning prize is given priority, and if the replay winning prize is not possible, the first bell winning can be established. Also, the first bell winning can be established even when the winning combination corresponding to the replay winning has not been won.

Both the first CB state and the second CB state are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state and the second CB state, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. It is a game state in which the Details of these first CB state and second CB state will be described later.

Next, a device for executing various notifications and various effects will be described.

Above the front door 12, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61, a speaker 62, and an image display device 63 are provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, light emission of the upper lamp 61 is controlled in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and light emission is controlled in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Further, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light emission effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair of left and right speakers, and when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the sound output is controlled so that a sound or voice corresponding to the abnormality is output, and a sound or voice corresponding to the winning result is output. Sound output is controlled so that Further, the speaker 62 is controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device having a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT. It may be another display device having a display surface, or it may be a dot matrix display. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, display control is performed so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. Further, the image display device 63 is controlled to display on the display surface images corresponding to the winning result of the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game. That is, the image display device 63 executes a display effect.

On the game panel 20 of the front door 12, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of stored virtual medals, and a credit display section 65 for displaying the number of virtual medals to be awarded when a small winning combination is won. When the number of game media is displayed and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, the display corresponding to the notified contents is performed, and furthermore, the management result of the game history is reported. and a section display section 67 for displaying a display corresponding to the fact that the game section is the second section. The credit display section 65 is composed of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a monochromatic LED such as green.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a common display area 68 provided with a combined display section 66 and a section display section 67. FIG. In the common display area 68, as shown in FIG. 7(a), two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are arranged side by side in a dual-use display section 66, and one light-emitting section , and the interval display portion 67 are aggregated.

If any of the small wins (1st bell win, 2nd bell win, 1st watermelon win, 2nd watermelon win or cherry win) corresponding to the provision of game media is established, the minor win win will be established. At the end of the played game, the number of given game media corresponding to the small win is displayed on the combined display section 66. - 特許庁Specifically, when either the first bell win or the second bell win is established in the non-CB state, "1" is displayed on each of the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b. It is notified that the game media of "11" have been awarded. Further, when either the first watermelon winning prize or the second watermelon winning prize is established in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. By doing so, it is notified that "5" game media have been provided. In addition, when a cherry prize is won in the non-CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden, and '2' is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, whereby the game medium of '2' is displayed. is given.

In the first CB state and the second CB state, the number of game media awarded for winning a small winning combination is "1", as will be described later in detail. Therefore, when a small winning combination is established in the first CB state or the second CB state, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. It is notified that the game media of "1" have been awarded.

On the other hand, even if a winning such as a replay winning or a CB winning that does not give a game medium is established, the display corresponding to the winning is not displayed on the dual-purpose display section 66. The 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of given game media on the dual-use display unit 66 is ended when the game media are betted to start the next game after the game in which the display was performed, and each 7-segment display is displayed at this bet timing. The devices 66a and 66b are in a non-display state.

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is reported on the image display device 63, information corresponding to the reported stop order is displayed on the combined display section 66. FIG. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the dual-use display section 66. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 7B, in the slot machine 10, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order indicated by the image display device 63. The first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop is the middle reel. 32M and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop. is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is The stop order is the left reel 32L, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, and the first stop is the right reel 32R and the third stop. The stop order where the second stop is the middle reel 32M and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the stop order where the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are optional, and the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest are There is a stop order that is arbitrary and a stop order where the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary.

The notification of the stop order in the image display device 63 is performed in the case of winning the winning combination including the first bell winning data in the winning combination lottery process in the non-CB state, the winning of the winning combination including the first RT replay winning data, and the second RT replay. It can be executed when winning a role including the winning data, when winning a role including the first drop replay winning data, or when winning a role including the second drop replay winning data. Specifically, when a winning combination including the winning data of the first bell is won, the first bell is won when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-described stopping orders. holds. Then, when the first bell win is established, the game medium "11" is provided to the player as already explained.

When a winning combination including the 1st replay winning data is won, the 1st replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time out of the respective stopping orders. Then, when the 1RT replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 1RT mode in which it is easier to win a role including any of the replay winning data than in the normal mode (that is, it is easier to establish any of the replay prizes). . In addition, when a winning combination including the 2nd RT replay winning data is won, the 2nd RT replay winning is established when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination of this time out of the respective stopping orders. . Then, when the 2nd replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the 2nd RT mode where it is easier to win a role containing any replay winning data than in the 1st RT mode (that is, it is easier for any replay prize to be established). do.

When a winning combination including the first falling replay winning data is won, the winning of the first falling replay is avoided when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. be. When the first fall replay winning prize is established, the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but this shift to the normal mode can be avoided by avoiding establishment of the first fall replay winning prize. . In addition, when a winning combination including the second falling replay winning data is won, the second falling replay winning prize is awarded when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above stop orders. Avoided. To avoid the transition to the first RT mode by avoiding establishment of the second fall replay prize although the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode when the second fall replay prize is established. can be done.

When any one of the stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the dual-use display unit 66 is maintained in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b is maintained. , a display corresponding to the stop order of the notification targets is performed. The contents of this display are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order on the combined display unit 66 are set in one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of display contents on the dual-purpose display unit 66 are set so as to correspond to part or all of the notification contents of the stop order on the image display device 63. good too.

The display contents of the stop order on the dual-purpose display section 66 are different from the display contents to be displayed when the dual-purpose display section 66 displays a display corresponding to the provision of game media. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-use display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media provided or to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

FIGS. 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the content of notification of the order of stopping on the image display device 63 and the content of display of the order of stopping on the dual-use display section 66. FIG.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed, and image display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in each of the unit display images G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to the left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to the middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to the right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows how the stop order is notified when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The left unit display image G1 displays an image "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, and the middle unit display image G2 displays an image "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M. , an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R is displayed on the right unit display image G3.

While the image display device 63 displays an image notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, the combined display unit 66 displays the reels as shown in FIG. 8(b). An "L" is displayed corresponding to the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R. That is, in the image display device 63, the unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R corresponding to the unit display images G1 to G3 are displayed in the stopping order. While the corresponding image display is performed, the combined display section 66 performs display irrelevant to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the display contents on the image display device 63 even if the display corresponding to the notification contents of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed on the combined display section 66 .

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than the display range of the image display device 63 . Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display device 63 . In addition, the dual-purpose display section 66 is located on the side opposite to the image display device 63 with the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that make the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R visible. As a result, the combined display section 66 is arranged at a position spaced apart from the image display device 63 , and this also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display section 66 .

When the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display device 63 are displayed. This display is started after the winning lottery process is performed and before the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is validated. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started earlier than the display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display device 63. However, these displays may start at the same time or substantially at the same time, and the display start order may be reversed. The display corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the image display device 63 is a stop command for all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed. is terminated when

The shared display section 66 is arranged on the central side of the common display area 68 , while the section display section 67 is arranged on the corner side of the common display area 68 . The section display section 67 is a display section for notifying that the game section is the second section of the first section and the second section. The second section refers to reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of a winning advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different according to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. By notifying the stop order, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game (the expected value of the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media awarded in one game") increases. It is a section in which one or more advantageous game states (preparation state, pseudo-bonus state, and ART state) can be started and in which the advantageous game state can be continued. On the other hand, the first section is a section in which the advantageous gaming state does not start and the advantageous gaming state does not continue.

The interval display unit 67 is displayed when winning a combination with different winnings to be established according to the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R or a combination with different winnings depending on the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. The order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the player to win a prize advantageous to the player is reported to the player, and in the case of an advantageous game state in which the expected value of acquisition of the game medium is 1 or more, the lighting state is set. Become. In this case, the preparation state, the pseudo-bonus state and the ART state correspond to the advantageous gaming state, while the second section which is not in the preparation state, the pseudo-bonus state and the ART state does not correspond to the advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when transitioning from the first section to the second section, the section display section 67 may or may not switch from the off state to the on state. When the section display unit 67 is kept in the off state when the transition to the second section is started, the section display unit 67 is turned off when any one of the preparation state, the pseudo-bonus state, and the ART state is started in the second section. state is changed to a lighting state.

After entering the lighting state, the section display unit 67 maintains the lighting state until the end of the second section, and is turned off when the second section ends and shifts to the first section. Therefore, even if the pseudo-bonus state or the ART state ends and the game returns to the normal game state, the second interval may be maintained. is maintained in the lighting state, and when the second section ends, the section display section 67 is turned off.

As described above, once the section display section 67 is turned on in the second section, the lighting state is maintained until the second section ends. The display unit 66 is turned on when a game medium is given, and turned off when the next game starts, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the image display device 63. When the game is over, it is turned on and turned off at the end of the game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the interval display portion 67 is arranged in the common display area 68 so as not to be too conspicuous to the player, only the interval display portion 67 is lit up in the common display area 68 in the situation of the second interval. It is possible to positively create the state of the state, and it is possible to facilitate confirmation of the section display section 67 for the manager of the game hall.

Instead of maintaining the lighting state of the section display section 67 during the second section, the section display section 67 may blink at a predetermined cycle during the second section. Further, as the combined display section 66 and the section display section 67, other displays such as a liquid crystal display device may be used.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 70 is provided above the reel unit 31 . The main controller 70 is attached to a back plate 11 b that forms the rear portion of the housing 11 . The main controller 70 is constructed by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81 . An MPU 72 is mounted on the element mounting surface, which is one board surface of the main control board 71 . The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81 . Although the board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, it may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 accommodated in the board box 81 can be visually observed from the outside of the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 in the board box 81 so that the facing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 faces the front of the slot machine 10 . Therefore, by opening the front door 12 to the front of the slot machine 10 with respect to the housing 11 to expose the internal space of the housing 11, it becomes possible to see the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and It is possible to see the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82 .

The substrate box 81 is formed by assembling a plurality of case bodies back and forth, and these plurality of case bodies are provided with an adhesive to prevent the case bodies from separating and to leave traces when the case bodies are separated. A coupling portion 83 is provided. A plurality of coupling portions 83 are arranged side by side on one side of the substantially rectangular parallelepiped board box 81 . As a result, in a state in which separation of the case body is prevented by using some of the joints 83, even if the case body is separated by destroying the part of the joints 83, another joint may be used after that. By connecting 83, separation of the case body can be prevented again. In addition, when the case body is separated, the connecting part 83 is destroyed and a trace remains, so that it is possible to grasp whether or not the case body is being separated illegally by visually checking the connecting part 83. Become. A sealing seal 84 is attached to a side of the substrate box 81 other than the side on which the coupling portions 83 are arranged so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the sealing seal 84 is peeled off, the adhesive layer remains on the case body. As a result, when the sealing seal 84 is peeled off during the separation of the case body, it is possible to leave a trace thereof.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an effect control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70, as shown in FIG. The effect control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 on the front door 12 . The effect control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61 , the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70 . In addition, the production control device 90, like the main control device 70, has a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

The MPU 72 is mounted on the main control board 71 of the main controller 70 as already described. The MPU 72 includes a ROM 73 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 72, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73. A RAM 74, a first random number circuit 75 for sequentially updating the first random number within a predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and a second random number based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit. A second random number circuit 76 that sequentially updates within a predetermined numerical range and a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency are provided. In addition, the MPU 72 also incorporates an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and the RAM 74 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 72, and they may be individually integrated into chips.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 72 includes the reel unit 31, a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, and 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44, and a medal insertion sensor. Inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted through slot 45, credit insertion detection sensors 47a and 48a for individually detecting operation of credit insertion buttons 47 and 48, and settlement detection sensor 51a for detecting operation of settlement button 51. , a payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, a reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, a setting key detection sensor that detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57, and the like. are connected, and signals from these sensors are input to the MPU 72 .

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive section 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display section 66, the section display section 67, the effect control device 90, and the like. In each game, the MPU 72 controls the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R of the reel unit 31. FIG. The selector 52 guides the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 to the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is permitted, and to the inserted medal detection sensor 45a if reception is prohibited. It has a function of ejecting to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected. The selector drive unit 52a has a function of switching the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state. and a position for prohibiting reception. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between the reception permission state and the reception prohibition state by switching the output state and the stop state of the driving signal to the selector driving section 52a.

Further, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53 when a small winning combination is established and medals are to be paid out. Further, the MPU 72 controls display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed when game media are awarded. Further, the MPU 72 controls the display of the section display unit 67 so that the second section is notified when the notification start trigger occurs in the second section. Further, the MPU 72 controls the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the game management result is displayed. Further, the MPU 72 transmits a command to the effect control device 90 at each timing of each game, and also transmits a command to the effect control device 90 for notifying the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the image display device 63. In this case, display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed so that the display corresponding to the content to be notified is performed. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90 , while the direct display control of the combined display section 66 is performed by the MPU 72 . That is, for the image display device 63, which is subject to relatively complicated display control, direct display control is performed by the effect control device 90, and the combined display unit 66, which is subject to relatively simple display control. Direct display control is executed in the MPU 72 for . As a result, it is possible to perform both a display that emphasizes the improvement of attention to the presentation and a display that emphasizes reliability while reducing the processing load of the MPU 72 .

An input side of the MPU 72 is connected to a power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 (not shown). The power supply device 54 is equipped with a power supply unit that supplies driving power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit. It monitors the voltage being applied, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage is below the reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing upon receiving the power failure signal, and after the power is restored, it is possible to return to the processing state before the power failure. Further, the power supply device 54 is provided with a power-off power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power-off power when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 in a situation where backup power can be supplied to the power supply unit during a power failure (for example, for one or two days). be done.

The performance control device 90 includes a performance control board 91 for controlling execution of various notifications and various performances. An MPU 92 is mounted on the effect control board 91 . The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 92, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 93. A RAM 94 is built in, and a clock circuit for outputting a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generation circuit, and the like are also built in.

It should be noted that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and they may be individually integrated into chips. In addition, the RAM 94 is not supplied with backup power from the power supply section of the power supply unit 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power supply is interrupted, but the RAM 94 is supplied with backup power. good too.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. The input side of the MPU 92 is connected to the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 as already described, and receives various commands from the MPU 72 . An upper lamp 61 , a speaker 62 and an image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92 . Based on commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63, thereby performing various notifications and various effects. let it happen.

In addition to the MPU 92, the effect control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM, a video RAM, and the like, although not shown. The VDP is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the image display device 63 . The VDP intervenes in the reading and writing of data in the video RAM, reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing, and causes the image display device 63 to display the image data. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the image display device 63 . This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63 . When the MPU 92 determines the execution contents of the effect based on the command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 stores a drawing list indicating the contents of the image corresponding to each update timing in the VDP according to the determined execution contents of the effect. Output. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and uses the read image data to create display data in the video RAM. Then, the VDP outputs an image signal corresponding to the generated display data to the image display device 63, thereby causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following description, for convenience of explanation, the MPU 72, ROM 73 and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 will be referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73 and main RAM 74 respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93 and RAM 94 of the effect control device 90 will be referred to as the effect side. They are referred to as an MPU 92, an effect-side ROM 93, and an effect-side RAM 94.

Next, processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the main process, first, an initialization process is executed (step S101). In the initialization processing, interrupts by the timer interrupt processing are permitted, and various initial settings are made for the registers and I/O devices in the main MPU 72 . After that, it is determined whether or not the power is turned on while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on (step S102). If the power has been turned on while the ON operation was performed using the setting key (step S102: YES), if the reset button 56 was not pressed when the power was turned on (step S103: NO), After executing the partial clear process (step S104), the set value update process is executed (step S106). On the other hand, if the reset button 56 is pressed when the power is turned on (step S103: YES), after executing all clear processing (step S105), set value update processing is executed (step S106). In the partial clear processing (step S104) and the full clear processing (step S105), a partial area or the entire area of the main RAM 74 is initialized. The contents of these partial clear processing (step S104) and all clear processing (step S105) will be described later.

In the set value update process, the current set value is read under the condition that the set key is inserted and turned on, and the current set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . When the set value update process is executed, since either the partial clear process (step S104) or the all clear process (step S105) has been executed before that, a credit is displayed at the start of the set value update process. A display corresponding to the fact that the set value is "1" is displayed in the portion 65. FIG. In the set value update process, the set value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated set value is displayed on the credit display section 65 . If the reset button 56 is operated while the set value is "6", the set value is updated to "1". When the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated, the set value selected at that time becomes the set value set in the current set value update processing, and the set value update processing ends. do. In this case, the display of the set value on the credit display section 65 is terminated. After that, the process shifts to normal processing (step S107). Normal processing will be described later in detail.

If the ON operation of the setting key has not been performed in the main process (step S102: NO), the power recovery process after step S108 is executed. The power restoration process is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power shutdown. In the power restoration process, it is determined whether or not the setting values of the slot machine 10 are normal by checking the main RAM 74 (step S108). Specifically, when the set value is any one of "1" to "6", it is determined to be normal, and when it is "0" or "7" or more, it is determined to be abnormal. If the set value is normal, it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S109). A power failure flag is provided in the main side RAM 74, and when the predetermined power failure processing is normally executed when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is stopped, the power failure flag is set to "1". will be set. If the power failure flag is set to "1", it is checked whether the RAM determination value is normal (step S110). Specifically, the checksum value of the main RAM 74 is checked to confirm whether the value is normal.

If affirmative determination is made in all of steps S108 to S110, it means that the power failure process at the time of the previous power failure was normally executed. In this case, by writing the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 74 to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 and returning the data saved in the main RAM 74 to the register of the main MPU 72, the register of the main MPU 72 The state is restored to the state before the power was cut off (step S111). Also, the power failure flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S112). Thereafter, after transmitting a power recovery command for recognizing execution of the power recovery process to the effect side MPU 92 (step S113), the address before the power shutdown is restored (step S114).

Information indicating whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data described later is stored in the main RAM 74 is set in the return command. That is, in step S113, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the first CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the first CB winning data is stored. is sent to the production side MPU 92. In step S113, it is determined whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored. to the effect side MPU 92. Further, in step S113, when it is specified that both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored in the main RAM 74, both the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are not stored. A return command in a state in which information indicating that is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 .

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in any of steps S108 to S110, operation prohibition processing is executed. In the operation prohibition process, execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S115), and all the output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0", thereby all actuators connected to the output ports are cleared. is turned off (step S116), and error notification processing is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S117). And it becomes an infinite loop. The operation prohibition process is canceled by executing a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

Next, timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the timer interrupt process is activated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register saving process (step S201), the values of all the registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process described later are saved in the main RAM 74. FIG. In step S202, it is checked whether or not the power failure flag is set to "1", and if the power failure flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 to execute power failure processing.

The power failure flag is set when a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the power supply 54 is input to the main MPU 72 . In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 . After that, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the main RAM 74 is normal is calculated and stored in the main RAM 74, and subsequent access to the RAM is prohibited. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

If the power failure flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes after step S204 are performed. In step S204, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S205, the main MPU 72 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S206, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors provided for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In step S207, sensor monitoring processing is performed to read the states of various sensors connected to the input port and to monitor whether the read results are normal. Here, the slot machine 10 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting tampering with the hopper device 53 . As already explained, the hopper device 53 has a function of paying out the medals stored in the storage tank to the medal receiving tray 59 when a prize corresponding to the awarding of game media is established on the main line ML. The hopper device 53 is provided with a payout device for paying out the medals stored in the storage tank toward the medal discharge port 58, and a payout detection sensor for detecting the medals paid out from the payout device. . When it becomes necessary to pay out game media, the payout device is drive-controlled to pay out medals, and the payout detection sensor detects the paid-out medals. When the number of medals detected by the payout detection sensor reaches the number of game media to be paid out, the payout of medals from the payout device is stopped. In this case, an illegal jig is inserted from the front of the slot machine 10 through the medal discharge port 58, and the payout detection sensor cannot detect medals by the illegal jig. A fraudulent act to pay out more medals than medals is assumed. In the slot machine 10, if the payout detection sensor does not detect medals for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) even though the payout device is driven and controlled to pay out medals, the payout device is driven as a payout abnormality. Although the control will be stopped, if the fraudulent act as described above is performed, a large number of medals will be paid out during the predetermined period. In addition, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification is executed, but the abnormality notification is canceled by performing an abnormality canceling operation on the key cylinder 14 after the medals are replenished.

The slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting an object moving toward the payout detection sensor from the medal discharge port 58 in order to prevent fraudulent activity as described above. A plurality of the object detection sensors are provided along the route from the medal discharge port 58 to the payout detection sensor. In the sensor monitoring process of step S207, when each object detection sensor becomes a detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side → the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side within the abnormality detection period (for example, 5 seconds). However, if each object detection sensor becomes a detection state in the order of the object detection sensor on the medal discharge port 58 side → the object detection sensor on the payout detection sensor side within the abnormality detection period, an intrusion abnormality will occur. I judge. When it is determined that there is an intrusion abnormality, the intrusion abnormality flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", and an intrusion abnormality command corresponding to the intrusion abnormality is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. - 特許庁As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the intrusion abnormality notification is executed. The intrusion abnormality notification is temporarily stopped by stopping the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10, but if the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" after the supply of operating power is restarted, Since the transmission of the intrusion abnormality command to the production side MPU 92 is performed again, the intrusion abnormality notification is resumed. In order to cancel the state in which the intrusion abnormality flag is set to "1", it is necessary to execute a partial clear process (step S104) or a full clear process (step S105).

In step S208, timer subtraction processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S209, counter processing for outputting the result of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts to the outside is performed. In step S210, command output processing for transmitting various commands to the MPU 92 on the production side is performed. In step S211, port output processing is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are returned to the corresponding registers in the main MPU 72, respectively.

In step S213, a management process is executed for managing the game history and displaying the content corresponding to the management result on the combined display section 66. FIG. Specifically, the ratio of the total number of games in the second section, which will be described later, to the total number of games is calculated, and the ratio of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66 . In this case, the ratio of the total number of games in the second interval to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this configuration, even if the setting value is changed, the calculation may be continued without initializing the information of the ratio performed for each setting value. After that, in step S214, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, interrupt permission processing is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S301). After that, start waiting processing is executed (step S302). FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the start waiting process.

First, it is determined whether or not a replay bet set flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S401). The replay bet set flag specifies whether or not the bet setting for the same number of bets as the previous bet number has already been completed when any of the replay winnings have been established in the previous game. is a flag for If a negative determination is made in step S401, on condition that any replay winning has been established in the previous game (step S402: YES), the bet number setting counter 74a provided in the main side RAM 74 (see FIG. 9 ), the value of the bet number history counter provided in the main side RAM 74 is set (step S403). The bet number setting counter 74a is a counter for specifying the bet number of the game to be executed by the main MPU 72, and the bet number history counter is for specifying the bet number of the previous game by the main MPU 72. is a counter of After that, the bet set flag for replay is set to "1" (step S404).

When a positive determination is made in step S401, when a negative determination is made in step S402, or when the process of step S404 is executed, a bet handling process is executed (step S405). FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing bet handling processing.

If the current gaming state is not the second CB state (step S501: NO), "3" is set as the upper limit number of bets, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be betted in the current game (step S502). If the current gaming state is the second CB state (step S501: YES), the upper limit number of bets, which is the upper limit number of game media that can be betted in the current game, is set to "2" (step S503). That is, in the slot machine 10, the maximum bet number is set to "2" when in the second CB state, and the maximum bet number is set to "3" when not in the second CB state.

When the process of step S502 or step S503 is executed, on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is not the current bet upper limit number (step S504: NO), the stored virtual medals are It is determined whether or not an effective betting operation has been performed with one or more cards (step S505). The main RAM 74 is provided with a credit counter 74b (see FIG. 9) as an area for storing the number of virtual medals stored. In step S504, it is determined whether or not the value of the credit counter 74b is 1 or more, thereby determining whether or not there are one or more virtual medals stored. Further, when the first credit insertion button 47 is operated, it is determined that a valid betting operation has been performed, and when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is increased. It is determined that a valid bet operation has been made on condition that the number is 1 or less.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S505, a bet setting process is executed (step S506). In the bet setting process, when the first credit input button 47 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of bets, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is changed. In addition to setting the bet upper limit number, the value corresponding to the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than the bet upper limit number. If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a. In addition, in the bet amount setting process, when the second credit insertion button 48 is operated, if the sum of the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is 2 or more, the value of the bet amount setting counter 74a is is set to "2", the value for the number of virtual medals used for the setting is subtracted from the credit counter 74b, and if the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b is less than 2 If so, the value of the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0" after adding the value of the credit counter 74b to the bet number setting counter 74a.

If affirmative determination is made in step S504, if a negative determination is made in step S505, or if the process of step S506 is executed, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a detects that medals have been inserted into the medal slot 45. It is determined whether or not one medal has been detected (step S507). When an affirmative determination is made in step S507, if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is less than the bet upper limit number (step S508: NO), the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is incremented by 1 (step S509). ), if the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is equal to or greater than the bet upper limit number (step S508: YES), the value of the credit counter 74b of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S510). When the process of step S509 or step S510 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is greater than or equal to the upper limit bet number and the value of the credit counter 74b is greater than or equal to the upper limit stored memory number (specifically, "50"). (step S511: YES), the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S512). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

If a negative determination is made in step S507, if a negative determination is made in step S511, or if the process of step S512 is executed, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513). . If the current gaming state is the first CB state (step S513: YES), on condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "3" (step S514: YES), the acceptance provided in the main side RAM 74 The time bet set flag is set to "1" (step S515). On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the first CB state (step S513: NO), on the condition that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is 2 or more (step S516: YES), the bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance is set to "1" (step S515).

The bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not the number of game media capable of starting one game has been betted. When the game state is the first CB state, one game cannot be started in a state where "3" game media are not betted. It is possible to start the second game. Further, when the game state is not the first CB state, one game cannot be started in a state where two or more game media are not betted, and one game can be started by betting two or more game media. It is possible to start the second game.

Returning to the description of the start waiting process (FIG. 13), after executing the bet handling process in step S405, it is determined whether or not the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406). If the settlement button 51 has been operated (step S406: YES), after executing settlement processing (step S407), the bet set completion flag at the time of acceptance in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S408). In the settlement process of step S407, if the replay bet set flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", the number of bets corresponding to the sum of the value of the bet number setting counter 74a and the value of the credit counter 74b The hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the medals are discharged to the medal receiving tray 59. In this case, the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" and the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0". On the other hand, when the bet set flag at the time of replay of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the hopper device 53 is operated so that the number of medals corresponding to the value of the credit counter 74b is discharged to the medal receiving tray 59. Drive control. In this case, the credit counter 74b is cleared to "0".

Returning to the description of the normal processing (FIG. 12), after executing the start waiting processing in step S302, either the replay bet set flag or the acceptance bet set flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". is set (step S303). If a negative determination is made in step S303, the process returns to step S302. If an affirmative determination is made in step S303, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S302.

If the start lever 41 has been operated (step S304: YES), after the main line ML is activated, reception prohibition processing is executed (step S305). By executing the reception prohibiting process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal slot 45, the medal is ejected to the medal receiving tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, in step S306, setting processing at the time of starting for performing various settings when the game is started is executed, and in step S307, loop lottery processing for performing lottery corresponding to the ART state is executed, and step At S308, a winning combination lottery process for performing a winning combination lottery process for the current game is executed, and at a step S309, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are driven and controlled in a mode corresponding to the result of the current winning combination lottery process. Execute reel control processing for

After that, medium application processing is executed (step S310). In the medium awarding process, when a minor winning combination has been established in the current game, a process for awarding the player with a number of game media corresponding to the winning of the minor winning combination is executed. Specifically, when virtual medals are awarded, a value corresponding to the current minor winning combination is added to the credit counter 74b of the main RAM 74, and when the value of the credit counter 74b reaches the upper limit storage memory number. drives and controls the hopper device 53 so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit storage memory number is paid out to the medal receiving tray 59 . In addition, in the medium provision process, display control is performed on the dual-use display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be provided this time is performed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the combined display section 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a process for dealing with the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and the game section corresponding to the result of the current game (step S311). Also, an external output setting process for outputting the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall is executed (step S312). Thereafter, acceptance permission processing is executed (step S313). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medals inserted from the medal slot 45 are collected by the hopper device 53 after being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

Next, the setting process at the time of start executed in step S306 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, both the replay bet set flag and the accept bet set flag in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0" (step S601). After that, when the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is "3" (step S602: NO), the first bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S603). When the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is "2" (step S602: YES), a second bet number command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S604). The first bet number command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that the bet number of the game started this time is "3", and the second bet number command is a command that the bet number of the game started this time is " 2” is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that it is.

When the processing of step S603 or step S604 is executed, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a of the main side RAM 74 is set to the bet number history counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S605). Note that the value of the bet number setting counter 74a is cleared to "0" when the current game ends.

Next, the winning lottery process executed in step S308 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a first random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is obtained. The slot machine 10 is configured such that when the start lever 41 is operated, the first random number at that time is latched from the first random number circuit 75 . The first random number circuit 75 generates a first random number from "0" to "65535". Stored in RAM 74 . With such a configuration, the first random number can be acquired quickly at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and problems such as synchronization can be avoided. The first random number circuit 75 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the first random number, the lottery table for judging the winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S702). In this slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "1" to "6" are prepared in advance. It is possible to set on which winning probability the winning lottery process is to be executed. When the set value is "n+1" rather than "n", the winning probability is more advantageous to the player. Specifically, the set value of "n+1" is more advantageous for the player than the set value of "n" because the winning probability of the predetermined combination is higher than the set value of "n". . Also, even if the set value is the same level, the number of betted game media of "3" is more advantageous for the player than the number of bets of "2". In addition, there are three types of lottery modes, a normal mode, a first RT mode, and a second RT mode, in which the main MPU 72 has different lottery tables even if the set values are at the same stage. In addition, as game states, there are a first CB state and a second CB state apart from the state of each lottery mode. In step S702, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current set value, the current bet number, the current lottery mode, and the current gaming state is selected.

A lottery table corresponding to each of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode in the non-CB state will be described using the case where the set value is "3" as an example. First, the normal mode lottery table selected in the normal mode will be described. FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the normal mode lottery table when betting 3 cards, which is selected when the number of bets is "3", and FIG. 18 is selected when the number of bets is "2". FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a normal mode lottery table when two cards are bet on the bet; In the following description, the explanatory diagram of FIG. 19 will be referred to as appropriate.

In the normal mode lottery table, index values IV are set as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 regardless of whether 3 or 2 coins are bet. A winning combination is associated with each index value IV, and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery combination in relation to the maximum value of the first random number circuit 75 ("65535"). In addition, the number of index value IVs is the same when betting 3 cards and when betting 2 cards. It is the same at time and at the time of betting two cards.

Specifically, the index values IV=1 to 4 are set with the first bell winning data. When winning with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. The winning of the first bell is established without fail regardless of the types of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42 to 44, otherwise the winning of the first bell does not occur. When winning with the index value IV=2, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop and the third stop and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 The winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the timing, and the winning of the first bell is not generated in other cases. When winning with index value IV=3, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the types of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be the second stop and the third stop and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 The winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the timing, and the winning of the first bell is not generated in other cases. If a win is made with the index value IV=4, the winning of the first bell is assured regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

In the present slot machine 10, as already explained, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated in the non-CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled so that up to four symbols can be slid. done. In other words, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to be stopped within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated. By performing such reel control, it is possible to facilitate establishment of a prize corresponding to a winning combination, and to avoid establishment of a prize corresponding to a non-winning combination. becomes possible. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, only one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R constitutes a combination of symbols for winning a prize. If there are five or more symbols between constituent symbols, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42 to 44, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML. say). 1st bell winning, 2nd bell winning and various replay winning are prize modes in which no drop occurs when the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order. Cherry winning, 1st CB winning and 2nd CB winning are winning modes in which a failure may occur depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 with respect to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the index value IV=5 is set with the first bell winning data and the second bell winning data. When the winning is made with the index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. The winning of the second bell is surely realized regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and the winning of the first bell is surely established in other cases.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV=6. If a win is made with the index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the first watermelon prize will not be established. As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV=7. If a win is made with the index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, there is a possibility that the second watermelon prize will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only cherry winning data is set for the index value IV=8. If a win is made with the index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 19, a cherry win can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. However, depending on the operation timing of the left stop button 42 with respect to the rotational position of the left reel 32L, there is a possibility that the cherry winning will not be established.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=9. When a win is made with the index value IV=9, as shown in FIG. 19, the first chance replay win is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. do. Also, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set to the index value IV=10. When winning with index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 19, the second chance replay win is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44. do.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data are set to index values IV=11-16. In this case, when the winning is made with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 19, the first stop is the left reel 32L, and the second stop (the reel for which the second stop command is generated) is the middle reel 32M. , and when the third stop (reel where the last stop command is generated) is the right reel 32R, the 1st replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, otherwise , the normal replay winning is established without fail regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. 1RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases.

For the index value IV=17, only the first CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. For example, only the second CB winning data is set as shown in FIG. In other words, the first CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the first CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". can be established. The second CB winning data is set as a winning combination only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2", and the second CB winning is only when the number of bets on the game medium is "2". can be established. When the first CB winning data is set, if the number of bets on the game medium is "3", the first CB winning can be established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the first CB winning will not be established. When the second CB winning data is set, if the number of game media bets is "2", the second CB winning can be established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, as shown in FIG. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, there is a possibility that the second CB winning will not be established.

Here, the winning data other than the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data are deleted in the winning game regardless of whether or not the corresponding winning has been established, and are deleted in the games following the winning game. is not carried over. On the other hand, the 1st CB winning data and the 2nd CB winning data are cleared by the clearing process of the main side RAM 74 (the 1st CB winning data is partially cleared (step S104) or completely cleared (step S105), and the 2nd CB winning data is stored until the corresponding prize is established, even in the games following the winning game, except when the all clearing process (step S105) is performed. In this case, in a game in which one of the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data and the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery.

In other words, as a result of playing the game in a situation where the number of bets is "3", the first CB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 and the first CB winning data is carried over because the first CB winning has not been established. In this state, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets "3" after that, and the number of bets is increased after that. Even if the game is played under the condition of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. In addition, as a result of the game being played in a situation where the number of bets is "2", the second CB winning data is set in the main side RAM 74 and the second CB winning data is carried over because the second CB winning has not been established. In this state, the index value IV corresponding to the first CB winning data is excluded from the lottery even if the game is played with the number of bets "3" after that, and the number of bets is increased after that. Even if the game is played under the condition of "2", the index value IV corresponding to the second CB winning data is excluded from the lottery. This is not limited to the case where the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the same applies to the first RT mode and the second RT mode. Thus, to prevent either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data from being newly stored although either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is already stored. is possible, and it is possible to prevent a plurality of CB winning data from being accumulated and stored.

When the normal mode lottery table for betting 3 cards in FIG. 17 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the index value IV= The odds of winning on 3 are approximately 1/6.6, respectively. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=4 is about 1/13.1. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=5 is about 1/500. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=6 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=10 are about 1/164. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=7 is approximately 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=8 is about 1/423. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=9 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13, and the winning when the index value IV=14. , the probability of winning when the index value IV=15, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=16 are each about 1/41. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/6.6.

On the other hand, when the normal mode lottery table for 2-coin bet shown in FIG. lower probability than if Specifically, when the normal mode lottery table for betting 2 is selected, the probability of winning for each of the index values IV=1 to 16 is determined by the normal mode lottery table for betting 3. This probability is lower than 2/3 of the probability of As a result, the game executed with the game medium "3" bet is accompanied by the awarding of the game medium, rather than the game executed with the game medium "2" bet. It is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of a replay prize in which a minor winning prize and a replay are awarded.

However, when the normal lottery table for betting two cards is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/2.2. On the other hand, when the normal lottery table for betting 3 cards is selected as described above, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/6.6. As a result, the probability that the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game executed in the state where "2" game media is betted is executed in the state where "3" game media are betted. It is possible to increase the probability that the first CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the game played.

As mentioned above, the probability of occurrence of small wins with game media and replay wins with replays is higher when the number of bets is "3" than when the number of bets is "2". The probability that CB winning data (first CB winning data or second CB winning data) is stored in the main RAM 74 is higher when the number of bets is "2" than when the number of bets is "3". The high configuration is not limited to the normal mode, and is the same for the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

In the normal mode lottery table, as already described, 1RT replay winning data is set as winning data with index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/6.8 in the situation where the number of bets on game media is "3", and the number of bets on game media is "2". is about 1/10.9 in the case of If a win is made with any of the index values IV=11 to 16, the stop order of the first stop, second stop and third stop of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R corresponds to the winning combination. When the order is established, the first RT replay prize is established, and the lottery mode shifts from the normal mode to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Next, the lottery table for the first RT mode selected when the set value is "3" and the first RT mode is in the non-CB state will be described. 20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode when betting 3 cards. Even in the lottery table for the first RT mode when betting 2 cards, the number of index values IV is 3. It is the same as the lottery table for the 1st RT mode at the time of betting, and the types of winning combinations set for each index value IV are the lottery table for the 1st RT mode at the time of betting 3 cards, except for the index value IV=23. is the same as

As shown in FIG. 20, in the lottery table for the first RT mode when 3 cards are bet, the winning data set to index values IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are determined by betting 3 cards. It is the same as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17). Although illustration is omitted, the winning data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 10 in the lottery table for the first RT mode when two cards are bet, and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same when two cards are bet. is the same as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18). Therefore, when compared with the same number of bets, the types of wins for which game media can be awarded and the winning probabilities of those wins are the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Winning probabilities of the chance play and the second chance replay are also the same in the normal mode and the first RT mode.

The first CB winning data is set to the index value IV=23 in the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 20) when three cards are bet, and the winning probability is about 1/6.6. In addition, as already explained, the 1st CB winning data is also set to the index value IV=17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) when betting 3 cards, and the winning probability is about 1/6.6. ing. Therefore, the winning probability of the first CB winning data is the same in both the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Although not shown, the second CB winning data is set to the index value IV=23 in the first RT mode lottery table when two cards are bet, and the winning probability is about 1/2.2. , the second CB winning data is also set in the index value IV=17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18) when two cards are bet, and the winning probability is about 1/2.2. Therefore, the winning probability of the second CB winning data is the same in both the normal mode and the first RT mode.

Winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 22 are different from those in the normal mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data with index values IV=11 to 16 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/6.8 when three cards are bet, and about 1/10.2 when two cards are bet.

When winning with index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 21, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. 2RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44 in other cases. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=12, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=13, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=14, the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=15, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=16, the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L. The 2nd RT replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

In the 1st RT mode, any one of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, and the stop order of the first stop, second stop and third stop of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is the stop order corresponding to the winning combination. If so, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When shifting to the second RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, as winning data with index values IV=17 to 22, in addition to normal replay winning data, first drop replay winning data is set. The probability of winning one of these index values IV=17 to 22 is about 1/10.9 when three cards are bet, and about 1/16.4 when two cards are bet.

When the lottery table for the first RT mode wins with the index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 21, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, otherwise the first fall replay winning prize is established according to the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. It will definitely work regardless. Also, when winning with the index value IV=18, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=19, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay wins are each. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=20, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is awarded. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=21, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=22, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the first falling replay prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the normal mode. When shifting to the normal mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is the normal mode lottery table.

By setting the lottery table for the first RT mode as described above, the probability of winning a combination that enables the establishment of a replay prize in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is determined by the number of bets on the game medium. If it is "3", it is about 1/4.1. On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is approximately 1/6.7 if the number of game media bet is "3". That is, in a situation where the number of game media bet is "3", the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode. In the situation where the number of game media bet is "2", the replay probability is about 1/6.1 in the first RT mode, whereas it is about 1/10.3 in the normal mode. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of game media bet is "2", the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode.

Next, the lottery table for the second RT mode selected when the set value is "3" and the second RT mode is in the non-CB state will be described. 22 and 23 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode when betting 3 cards. Even in the lottery table for the second RT mode when betting 2 cards, the number of index values IV is 3. The lottery table for the second RT mode at the time of betting is the same as the lottery table for the second RT mode at the time of betting. is the same as

As shown in FIG. 22, in the second RT mode lottery table for the 3-coin bet, the winning data set for each index value IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are equal to the 3-coin bet. It is the same as the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) at time and the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) at 3-coin bet. Although illustration is omitted, the winning data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 10 in the second RT mode lottery table when two cards are bet and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same when two cards are bet. 18) and the first RT mode lottery table for betting two cards. Therefore, when compared with the same number of bets, the types of hands that allow game media to be awarded and the winning probabilities of those hands are the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, the winning probabilities of the first chance play and the second chance replay are also the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

The 1st CB winning data is set to the index value IV=18 in the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 22) when 3 cards are bet, and the winning probability is about 1/6.6. Also, as already explained, the index value IV=17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 17) when betting 3 coins and the index value IV=23 in the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20) when betting 3 coins. The first CB winning data is set, and the winning probability is about 1/6.6. Therefore, the winning probability of the first CB winning data is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

Although not shown, the second CB winning data is set to the index value IV=18 in the second RT mode lottery table when two cards are bet, and the winning probability is about 1/2.2. , index value IV=17 in the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18) when two cards are bet and index value IV=23 in the first RT mode lottery table when two cards are bet are also set with second CB winning data. , the winning probability is about 1/2.2. Therefore, the winning probability of the second CB winning data is the same in the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode.

Winning combination data set to index values IV=11 to 17 are different from those in the normal mode and the first RT mode. Specifically, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 22, in addition to the normal replay winning data, the second drop replay winning data is set as the winning data of the index values IV=11 to 16. . The probability of winning one of these index values IV=11 to 16 is about 1/6.8 when three cards are bet, and about 1/10.2 when two cards are bet.
When the lottery table for the second RT mode wins with the index value IV=11, as shown in FIG. 23, the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is In the case of the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, otherwise the second falling replay winning is achieved at the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. I'm sure it will work regardless. Also, when winning with the index value IV=12, when the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is awarded. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=13, when the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay winning prize is each. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=14, if the first stop is the middle reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is awarded. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when winning with the index value IV=15, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the middle reel 32M, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, when winning with the index value IV=16, when the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the middle reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay prize is won. It is surely established regardless of the operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning prize is surely established regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the second falling replay winning prize is established, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode. When shifting to the first RT mode, the lottery table referred to in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, only the normal replay winning data is set for the index value IV=17. The probability of winning with the index value IV=17 is set higher than the probability of winning other combinations. Specifically, when betting 3 coins, winning is about 1/9.3, and when betting 2 coins. If it is time, it will be elected at about 1/14.1. Then, when winning is achieved with this index value IV=17, normal replay winning is established regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the operation timings of the stop buttons 42-44.

By setting the lottery table for the second RT mode as described above, the replay probability in the second RT mode is approximately 1/3.8 if the number of game media bet is "3". On the other hand, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.7 when the number of bets on the game medium is "3", and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1/6.7 when the number of bets on the game medium is "3". If so, it is about 1/4.1. That is, in a situation where the number of bets on game media is "3", the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. In the situation where the number of bets on the game medium is "2", the replay probability is about 1/5.7 in the second RT mode, while it is about 1/10.3 in the normal mode. In 1RT mode, it is about 1/6.1. Therefore, even in a situation where the number of game media bet is "2", the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, it is not limited to this, and the first RT mode and the second RT mode may have the same or substantially the same replay probability, and the second RT mode has a significantly higher replay probability than the first RT mode. A high configuration is also possible.

In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the 1st RT mode lottery table, and the 2nd RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 also stores the lottery process for each combination in the first CB state and the second CB state (FIG. 16). ) is stored in the CB lottery table. Only one index value IV is set in the lottery table for CB, and normal replay winning data is set in the one index value IV. The probability of winning with the index value IV is 3/10, and when winning with the index value IV, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped if the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is a predetermined timing. Regardless of the order, regular replay prizes are established. When the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored. On the other hand, if the index value IV is won but the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, or if the index value IV is not won, the first bell win can be established.

Here, in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, the winning probability is the same between the set values of "1" to "6" for the index values IV other than the index values IV=7 and 10. It has become. This applies both when the number of game media bet is "3" and when it is "2". On the other hand, the winning probabilities of the index values IV=7 and 10 are different between the setting values "1" to "6". FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining that the winning probabilities of the index values IV=7 and 10 are different among the setting values "1" to "6" when three cards are bet.

As shown in FIG. 24, the probability of winning with the index value IV=7 at the time of betting 3 cards is, in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, when the set value is "1". The setting value with the lowest and highest value has the highest winning probability, and the setting value of "6" is the highest. Also, the probability of winning with the index value IV=10 when betting 3 cards is the lowest and highest value when the set value is "1" in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. The probability of winning is higher for the set value of , and the set value of "6" is the highest. As a result, it is possible to provide different advantages among the set values of "1" to "6". Note that even when two cards are bet, the probability of winning with the index value IV=7 is set such that the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode. In addition, the probability of winning with the index value IV=10 is set such that the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning in any of the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode.

Returning to the description of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), after selecting the lottery table in step S702 and setting the index value IV to 1 (step S703), the judgment value DV used when judging whether the winning combination is right or wrong is set. Set (step S704). In this determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding the current index value IV and the corresponding point value PV to the current determination value DV. Note that in the first judgment value setting process, the value of the first random number obtained in step S701 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the value of the first random number corresponds to the index value IV=1, which is the current index value IV. A new determination value DV is obtained by adding the point value PV to be determined.

After that, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is determined (step S705). Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds "65535" is judged in the winning judgment. If the value exceeds "65535" (step S705: YES), the winning data acquisition process is executed to set the data of the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV at that time in the main RAM 74 (step S706). .

If the judgment value DV does not exceed "65535" (step S705: NO), it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, after adding 1 to the index value IV (step S707), it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined (step S708). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined, the process returns to step S704 to continue the determination of the winning combination. At this time, in step S704, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S705, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV.

When the process of step S706 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S708, it means that the determination of whether the winning combination is correct has ended. In this case, stop information first setting processing for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed (step S709). After that, in step S710, an advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is executed, in step S711, the first control process of the game section is executed, and in step S712, a stop order notification control process is executed. Details of the processing in steps S710 to S712 will be described later.

After that, a game start command transmission process is executed (step S713). In the transmission process, if a win is made in the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the current role, information corresponding to the winning combination and information corresponding to the current lottery mode and current gaming state. , and information corresponding to the processing results of steps S710 and S711 are set in a game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize various information determined by the main side MPU 72. .

When receiving the game start command, the effect-side MPU 92 grasps various information about the current game from the game start command. Then, the effect-side MPU 92 determines the content of the effect in a manner corresponding to the grasped various information. Then, the data table corresponding to the content of the determined performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 to the performance side RAM 94, and the light emission control of the upper lamp 61, the sound output control of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63 are performed according to the read data table. Execute control.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S309 of the normal process (FIG. 12) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation start process for starting rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed (step S801). In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R started rotating in the previous game. waits until the wait time elapses. When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and rotation start information is set in the motor control storage area provided in the main RAM 74 . By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing of step S206 in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11), and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. Further, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R reaches a constant speed, the main MPU 72 can generate a stop command by lighting a lamp (not shown) of each stop button 42-44. Players and the like are notified of this.

After that, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S802). If none of the stop buttons 42-44 has been operated, the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed until one of the stop buttons 42-44 is operated. When it is determined that any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated, it is determined whether the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R have been operated, that is, whether a stop command has been generated. (step S803). If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S802, and the process of step S802 is repeatedly executed until any one of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, the stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S804). The stop instruction command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is transmitted, stop control processing shown in steps S805 to S811 is performed to stop the spinning reels.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the timing when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated is confirmed (step S805). Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. After that, based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time is calculated (step S806).

In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are slid by one symbol and then stopped, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reels are stopped after being slid by three symbols, and four symbols. There are 5 patterns of stop modes, including a stop mode of stopping after sliding. Therefore, in step S806, any value from "0" to "4" is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the main side RAM74.

After that, the calculated sliding number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position (step S807). Then, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal (step S808), and if they are equal, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R A reel stop process for stopping the rotation of is performed (step S809). After that, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped (step S810). If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed (step S811), and the process returns to step S802.

Here, the stop information is information for making the stop mode of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). , it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") with respect to the arrival symbol that has reached the base position when each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is operated to stop. As the stop information, sliding number data indicating the correspondence between each symbol and the sliding number is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in association with each lottery result and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sliding number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stop order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived while the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating. .

As the processing for setting the stop information, the first stop information setting processing executed in step S709 of the winning lottery processing (FIG. 16) and the step S811 of the reel control processing (FIG. 25) are executed. There is a stop information second setting process. In the first stop information setting process, stop information is set according to the result of the lottery process for the combination. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main side RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reel is stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, and the stop numbers of the stopped reels 32L, 32M and 32R. .

When it is determined in step S810 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, a prize determination process is executed in step S812. In the winning determination process, the types of symbols stopped on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are grasped. Then, based on the contents of the winning data stored in the main RAM 74, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R becomes the winning combination in the winning combination lottery process. It is determined whether or not the combination of symbols corresponds to each other, and if the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning combination, it is determined that the winning combination has been won and the winning handling process is executed.

In the winning handling process, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the medium awarding process if the winning is a minor win. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S302) so that the replay setting process is executed.

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S813). The winning result command includes data indicating whether or not the current winning has been established, and, if the winning has been established, data indicating the type of the winning.

Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 26, the corresponding processing at the end of the game executed in step S311 of the normal processing (FIG. 12) will be described. In addition, since the process of step S311 in the normal process (FIG. 12) is executed after the reel control process (step S309), the corresponding process at the end of the game is that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating in one game. will be executed after

First, CB processing is executed to perform transition control and progression control for the first CB state or the second CB state (step S901). The CB processing will be described later in detail. After that, on the condition that the state is neither the first CB state nor the second CB state (step S902: NO), control processing in the lottery mode is executed (step S903). In the control process of the lottery mode, when the 1st replay winning is established in the current game, the normal mode is shifted to the 1st RT mode, and when the 2nd replay winning is established in the current game, the second RT mode is entered. If the 1RT mode is shifted to the 2nd RT mode and the first fall replay prize is established in this game, the first RT mode is shifted to the normal mode, and the second fall replay prize is established in the current game. If so, the second RT mode is changed to the first RT mode.

After that, the process jumps to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S904). Specifically, when the game state is the normal game state which is neither the preparation state, the pseudo-bonus state, the ART state, nor the end preparation state, normal processing is executed (step S905), and the game state is the preparation state. If yes, prepare state processing is executed (step S906), if the gaming state is the pseudo bonus state, processing for the pseudo bonus is executed (step S907), and if the gaming state is the ART state, the ART state. Processing is executed (step S908), and when the game state is the end preparation state, the second control processing of the game section is executed (step S909). Also, when any one of the normal processing of step S905, the preparation state processing of step S906, the pseudo-bonus processing of step S907 and the ART state processing of step S908 is executed, the second control processing of the game section (step S909) to run. Details of the processing in steps S905 to S909 will be described later.

In addition, when the current gaming state is the first CB state or the second CB state, by making an affirmative determination in step S902, normal processing in step S905, preparation state processing in step S906, pseudo bonus processing in step S907 Processing and ART state processing in step S908 are not executed. Therefore, in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, processing for progressing the normal game state, processing for progressing the preparation state, processing for progressing the pseudo-bonus state, and progressing the ART state is not executed. On the other hand, even if the current game state is the first CB state or the second CB state, the second control process for the game section in step S909 is executed. Therefore, even in the case of the first CB state or the second CB state, the processing for advancing the second section is executed.

<About game status and game section>
Next, the game state and game section will be described. FIG. 27 is an explanatory diagram for explaining game states and game intervals that exist in the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG.

In this slot machine 10, as game states, there are a normal game state ST1, a first CB state ST2, a second CB state ST3, a preparation state ST4, a pseudo-bonus state ST5, an ART state ST6, and an end preparation state ST7. are doing. These game states ST1 to ST7 do not overlap each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the main side RAM 74 is stayed by executing partial clear processing (step S104) or full clear processing (step S105). In addition, when the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 generated in the normal game state ST1 ends, when the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, and when the ART state ST6 ends , and when the end preparation state ST7 ends, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In the normal game state ST1, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2".

The normal game state ST1 is the expected net increase in game media in one game ("Expected number of game media to be given in one game" to "Game media bet in one game number of media”) is less than one. In addition, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the normal game state ST1. Further, in the normal game state ST1, there is a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74 .

The first CB state ST2 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the first CB winning is established while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . In the first CB state ST2, one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "3", while one game can be executed when the number of bets on game media is "2". can't Also, the second CB state ST3 is a game state to which the game is shifted when the second CB winning is established in a situation where the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM74. In the second CB state ST3, one game can be executed when the bet number of game media is "2", while the upper limit bet number is set to "2", so "3" game media are bet. Can not do it.

The first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states in which the game media owned by the player are not increased. Furthermore, in both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the relevant game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the relevant game state. It is a game state in which the number of is reduced. Details of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 will be described later.

The preparation state ST4 is a game state in which the player stays before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, and can shift from the normal game state ST1. In the preparation state ST4, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The preparation state ST4 is a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There exists an internal state where

In the preparation state ST4, when any of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. A game medium of “11” is given when the first bell win is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the preparation state ST4.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, but in the preparation state ST4, it is possible to stay in any of these lottery modes. In the preparation state ST4 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game is 1 or more when 3 coins are bet. On the other hand, in the preparation state ST4 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 if two coins are bet. In addition, in the preparation state ST4 and in the normal mode, the expected net increase in game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet.

In the case of the preparation state ST4 and the normal mode, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables establishment of the 1st replay winning prize is notified. . In the case of the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second RT replay winning prize is If any of the index values IV=17 to 22 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay winning prize is notified. In the preparation state ST4, the second RT replay prize is established and the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode, whereby the game state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6.

It should be noted that the transition to the preparation state ST4 may occur when the lottery mode is the second RT mode. The stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid the establishment of is not reported. Then, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode in the preparation state ST4, and then shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 when the shift to the second RT mode occurs. Further, when the preparation state ST4 is terminated by the satisfaction of the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

The pseudo-bonus state ST5 is a game state to which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs when the second RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST4 and the lottery mode changes to the second RT mode in a state of winning. The pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes "0". Shift to ART state ST6 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 If the player wins the game, the state shifts to the ART state ST6 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. Transition to the ART state ST6 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 When no winning is made, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending conditions of the second section SC2 described later, the normal game state ST1 is entered. When the second section SC2 ends at the time of transition to , the process transitions to the end preparation state ST7. Transition to the ART state ST6 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 When no winning is made, and when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without satisfying the ending conditions of the second section SC2 described later, the normal game state ST1 is entered. When the second section SC2 does not end at the time of transition to , the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 without shifting to the end preparation state ST7. Further, when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The pseudo bonus state ST5 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. There is a stored internal state.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell winning is notified. A game medium of "11" is awarded when the first bell win is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game is 1 or more if 3 coins are bet. On the other hand, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 if two coins are bet. In addition, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in the normal mode, the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet.

Transition to Pseudo-Bonus State ST5 By shifting to the second RT mode in the preparation state ST4 in the winning state, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started. When any one of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid establishment of the second falling replay winning prize is notified. Therefore, in the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, basically stays in the second RT mode, and in the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode, as described above, if three cards are bet, the The net increase expected value of game media becomes 1 or more.

However, due to an operation mistake in the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, the transition from the second RT mode to the first RT mode may occur in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and further from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. migration can occur. On the other hand, in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and in the normal mode, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of the 1RT replay winning prize Stopping order is announced. In the case of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the 1st RT mode, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enables the establishment of the 2nd RT replay prize if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won. is notified, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid establishment of the first fall replay winning prize is notified when any of the index values IV=17 to 22 is won.

Even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is maintained and it is not the second RT mode. The remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is subtracted.

The ART state ST6 is a game state to which the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs when the 2nd RT replay prize is established in the preparation state ST4 and the lottery mode becomes the 2nd RT mode in a state of winning. Shift to ART state ST6 This is a game state to shift to when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends in a winning situation. The ART state ST6 ends when the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 becomes "0". When the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and when the second section SC2 ends when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game shifts to the end preparation state ST7. When the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and when the second section SC2 does not end when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game does not shift to the end preparation state ST7. It shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, when the ART state ST6 is terminated by the satisfaction of the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.

In the ART state ST6, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The ART state ST6 is a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, and either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74. There exists an internal state where

In the ART state ST6, when any one of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified. A game medium of "11" is awarded when the first bell win is established. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be given in one game in the ART state ST6.

As already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, and the player can stay in any of these lottery modes in the ART state ST6. In the ART state ST6 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the expected value of the net addition of game media in one game is 1 or more if 3 coins are bet. On the other hand, in the ART state ST6 and in either the first RT mode or the second RT mode, the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 if two coins are bet. Further, in the case of the ART state ST6 and the normal mode, the net increase expected value of game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet.

Transition to ART state ST6 ART state ST6 is started by shifting to the second RT mode in the preparation state ST4 in the winning state, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 basically stays in the second RT mode. transition to ART state ST6 ART state ST6 is started when ending in a winning situation. In the case of the ART state ST6 and the second RT mode, if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped so that the establishment of the second falling replay winning prize can be avoided. The order will be announced. Therefore, in the case of the ART state ST6, basically stays in the second RT mode, and in the case of the ART state ST6 and the second RT mode, as described above, if three coins are bet, the game media in one game expected net increase is 1 or more.

However, a mistake in the operation of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R may cause a transition from the second RT mode to the first RT mode in the ART state ST6, and furthermore, a transition from the first RT mode to the normal mode may occur in the ART state ST6. may occur. On the other hand, in the case of the ART state ST6 and the normal mode, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable the establishment of the 1st replay winning prize are stopped if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 is won. The order will be announced. Also, in the ART state ST6 and in the first RT mode, if any of the index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the establishment of the second RT replay winning prize is If any of the index values IV=17 to 22 is won, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the first falling replay winning prize is notified.

Even if the lottery mode shifts from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or shifts from the first RT mode to the normal mode in the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is maintained and the ART state is not the second RT mode. The number of remaining continuous games in ST6 is subtracted.

The end preparation state ST7 is a case in which the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, being satisfied, and the second section SC2 is entered at the time of transition to the normal game state ST1 thereafter. It is a game state that shifts when is finished. The end preparation state ST7 ends when one game is executed. When the ready-to-end state ST7 ends, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. In the end preparation state ST7, one game can be executed regardless of whether the number of game media bet is "3" or "2". The end preparation state ST7 is a gaming state in which the expected net increase in game media in one game is less than 1 regardless of whether 3 or 2 are bet. Also, as already explained, there are the normal mode, the first RT mode and the second RT mode as the lottery mode, but the end preparation state ST7 can stay in any of these lottery modes. In addition, the end preparation state ST7 includes a non-internal state in which neither the first CB winning data nor the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and a state in which either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main side. There is an internal state stored in RAM 74 .

In the configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST7 exist as described above, game sections are set separately from these game states ST1 to ST7. A first section SC1 and a second section SC2 are set as game sections. In other words, in the slot machine 10, the number of game media bets of “2” and “3”, the set values of “1” to “6”, the normal mode, the first RT mode and the There are a lottery mode of 2RT mode, various game states ST1 to ST7, and game sections of first section SC1 and second section SC2.

The first section SC1 includes the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enable establishment of a winning that is advantageous to the player when a winning combination to be established is different depending on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Due to the notification of the stop order, the net increase expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media given in one game") is 1 or more. This is a section in which an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6) that can be obtained does not start, and the advantageous game state does not continue. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the complete clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the normal game state ST1 and the normal mode are set to the first section SC1. Further, when the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed in the second section SC2, the first section SC1 is also set. The second section SC2 is a section in which the advantageous gaming state can be started and in which the advantageous gaming state can be continued.

FIG. 28(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first section SC1 and the second section SC2. When the partial clearing process (step S104) or the complete clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed as described above, the first section SC1 is executed, and the second section SC2 is initialized. also becomes the first section SC1. On the other hand, the second section SC2 is shifted from the first section SC1 by generating an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 based on the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first section SC1. In this case, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first section SC1, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur, while the bet number of the first section SC1 is "2". Even if a certain game is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2. Therefore, a player who expects to shift from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 needs to play a game with a bet number of "3" instead of a game with a bet number of "2". There is

In the first section SC1, the net increase expected value of the game media in one game is certainly less than 1, whereas in the second section SC2, only when the net increase expected value of the game media in one game is less than 1 It may be 1 or more. Therefore, the second section SC2 is more advantageous than the first section SC1. Therefore, the player expects the first section SC1 to shift to the second section SC2.

The first section SC1 ends when an opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 occurs, and shifts to the second section SC2. On the other hand, the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6 or the end preparation state ST7 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1, and shifts to the first section SC1. As a condition for ending the second section SC2, the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2 without transition to the first section SC1 is the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). ), and the second section SC2 continues without transitioning to the first section SC1, so that the total number of restricted net additions of game media reaches the upper limit net addition number (specifically, 2400). An ending condition is set such that either one of the conditions for reaching is satisfied. The restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0 in the situation where no game media are awarded") ")" minus the "total number of game media consumed to execute the game while the second section SC2 is being continued ("0" when the game is not being executed)" In the case of the difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets is an increase of the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

In other words, when the second section SC2 is continued and the total number of net increases with restrictions on the number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number, the second section SC2 ends and the second section SC2 ends. It shifts to 1 section SC1. Further, when the number of games executed since the start of the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games by continuing the second section SC2, the second section SC2 ends and the first section SC1 starts. Transition. When any one of these ending conditions is satisfied, the preparation state ST4 is terminated and the second section SC2 is terminated in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied even in the middle of the preparation state ST4. The pseudo bonus state ST5 is terminated in a game in which the situation is shifted to the normal game state ST1 in the first section SC1 and the ending condition is established even in the middle of the pseudo bonus state ST5, and the second section SC2 is ended. is ended, the state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 in the first section SC1, and even in the middle of the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is ended in the game in which the ending condition is satisfied, and the second game state ST6 is ended. After the section SC2 is finished, the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing excessively.

As shown in FIG. 27, the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 can be stayed in either the first section SC1 or the second section SC2. On the other hand, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6, and the end preparation state ST7 do not stay in the first section SC1, but stay only in the second section SC2.

FIG. 28(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of each game state ST1 to ST7 in the second section SC2. As already explained, the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the ART state ST6, and the end preparation state ST7 can be used in any of the situations where the bet number of game media is "3" or "2". Further, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when the number of bets on game media is "3", and in the second CB state ST3, when the number of bets on game media is It is possible to run the game only if it is "2". This is the same even if the game section is the second section SC2.

In the case of the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, whether the game with the bet number of "3" or the game with the bet number of "2" is executed. The net increase expected value of game media is less than one. In this case, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, lottery processing for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 is performed based on the result of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in each game. Although it can be executed, the transition lottery process is executed in games where the number of bets is "3", but is not executed in games where the number of bets is "2". In addition, in the normal game state ST1 in the second section SC2, as will be described later, the value of the canceled game number counter 74e provided in the main side RAM 74 is decremented by 1 each time one game is executed, and after the decrement of 1, When the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e is "0", the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. is executed, but is not executed in games where the number of bets is "2". Therefore, in the normal game state ST1 in the second interval SC2, a game with a bet number of "3" is better to be executed than a game with a bet number of "2". It is advantageous for the player.

If the second section SC2 is in any one of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6, and the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed, the expected net increase in game media is 1 or more. On the other hand, when a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed, the net increase expected value of game media is less than one. Therefore, in the second section SC2 in any of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6, it is better to execute a game in which the bet number is "3". '' is more advantageous to the player than having a game run.

As described above, in the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2, it is advantageous to execute the game with the number of bets "3". However, the number of game media awarded in a game with a bet number of "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 is It is added as the restricted total net increase number of game media in the second section SC2, and the bet number is "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2. ” is added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. That is, the game in which the number of bets is "2" in any of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 is disadvantageous to the player. The game contributes to fulfilling the ending conditions of the second section SC2. From this point of view, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in any of the normal game state ST1, the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2. This is more advantageous to the player than executing a game with a bet number of "2".

Even in the second section SC2, the first CB prize can be established and the second CB prize can be established in the same manner as in the first section SC1. When the first CB winning is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 enters the first CB state ST2, and the second section SC2 is maintained even after the first CB state ST2 and after the first CB state ST2 ends. be. In addition, when the second CB winning is established in the second section SC2, the second section SC2 becomes the second CB state ST3, and the second section SC2 continues even after the second CB state ST3 and when the second CB state ST3 ends. maintained. In both the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, as already explained, the number of game media owned by the player at the end of the game state is greater than the number of game media owned by the player at the start of the game state. This is a game state in which the number of media is reduced. That is, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states disadvantageous to the player. On the other hand, the games executed in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 in the second section SC2 are added as the total number of games executed by continuing the second section SC2. In other words, although the games executed in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are disadvantageous to the player, the games contribute to fulfilling the ending condition of the second section SC2. . Therefore, if the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, it is more disadvantageous for the player.

It should be noted that in the end preparation state ST7, the amount of game media is reduced regardless of whether a game with a bet number of "3" is executed or a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the second section SC2. Although the net increase expected value is less than 1, this is a gaming state in which only one game is executed while the second section SC2 ends with the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6. Therefore, the games executed in the end preparation state ST7 do not contribute to the restricted total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and furthermore do not contribute to the total number of games in the second section SC2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even a game executed in the end preparation state ST7 contributes to the restricted total net increase in the number of game media in the second section SC2, and furthermore, in the second section SC2 It may be configured to contribute to the total number of games.

<Regarding CB states ST2 and ST3>
Next, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are described in detail. FIG. 29(a) shows the first CB winning combination (that is, the index value IV at which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74) and the second CB winning combination (that is, the second CB winning data that is stored in the main RAM 74). FIG. 29(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining a first CB state ST2 and a second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the first CB combination can be won in games where the number of bets is "3", but cannot be won in games where the number of bets is "2". In a game in which the number of bets is "3", the first CB combination is won with a probability of about 1/6.6. However, the winning state of the first CB role (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB role (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the first CB combination is excluded from the lottery targets in the lottery process (FIG. 16).

The second CB combination can be won in games where the number of bets is "2", but cannot be won in games where the number of bets is "3". In a game where the number of bets is "2", the second CB role is won with a probability of about 1/2.2. However, the winning state of the first CB role (that is, the state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), the winning state of the second CB role (that is, the state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74), In either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the second CB combination is excluded from the lottery targets in the lottery process (FIG. 16).

In the winning state of the 1st CB combination, the 1st CB winning can be established in the game with the number of bets of "3", but the winning of the 1st CB is not established in the game with the number of bets of "2". Therefore, in the case where the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination, even if the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the combination results in no winning of any index value IV. , regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, the first CB winning is not established. Also, when a game with the number of bets "2" is executed in the winning state of the 1st CB combination, even if the winning index value IV that can cause a so-called dropout occurs in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), reel Regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44, the first CB prize is not established. When the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the first CB combination and the first CB winning is established, the first CB state ST2 is entered.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the first CB state ST2, it is possible to execute a game in which the bet number is "3", and in a situation where the bet number is 2 or less, it is possible to execute the game. Impossible. In the first CB state ST2, normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, a normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. If the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the left stop button 42 is pressed. When the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not the predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the winning of the first bell is achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

However, it is not limited to this, and when normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the first CB state ST2, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the normal replay prize is established reliably regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, in the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop of each stop button 42-44 A configuration may be adopted in which the winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the operation timing.

When the first bell win is established in the first CB state ST2, the game medium of "1" is provided. As already explained, in the first CB state ST2, the game can be executed only when "3" game media are betted. On the other hand, the number of game media awarded in the game in the first CB state ST2 is "1". Then, the first CB state ST2 ends when "30" game media are provided. Therefore, in the first CB state ST2, it is necessary to generate 30 times the event that "1" game media is awarded in the game executed by betting "3" game media. The game media owned by the player will decrease by at least 60 from the start of the first CB state ST2 to the end of the first CB state ST2. Therefore, the first CB state ST2 is a game state disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in the first CB state ST2, as described above, the normal replay winning may be established, and both the normal replay winning and the first bell winning may not be established. Then, when the first CB state ST2 occurs in the second section SC2, the first CB state ST2, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 games or more, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. will be added to the total number of games played.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, the second CB winning can be established in the game with the bet number of "2", while the second CB winning is not established in the game with the bet number of "3". Therefore, when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed with the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the combination results in no winning of any index value IV. , the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44 do not establish the second CB winning. Further, when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB combination, even if the winning index value IV that can cause a so-called dropout occurs in the combination lottery process (FIG. 16), reel The second CB prize is not established regardless of the stop order of 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. When the game with the bet number of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination and the second CB winning is established, the second CB state ST3 is entered.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed in a situation where the number of bets is "2", and the maximum bet number of game media is "2". In the second CB state ST3, normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 with a probability of 3/10 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game. If the operation timing of the button 42 is a predetermined timing, a normal replay prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. When the operation timing of the left stop button 42 is not the predetermined timing, the normal replay winning is not established even if the normal replay winning data is stored.

In the second CB state ST3, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), or when the normal replay winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 but the left stop button 42 is pressed. When the normal replay winning cannot be established because the operation timing is not the predetermined timing, the first bell winning can be established. In this case, the winning of the first bell is achieved regardless of the order in which the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

However, it is not limited to this, and in the second CB state ST3, when normal replay winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination, the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, 32R Also, a configuration may be adopted in which the normal replay prize is established reliably regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, in the first CB state ST2, when the normal replay winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stopping of the stop buttons 42 to 44 A configuration may be adopted in which the winning of the first bell is surely established regardless of the operation timing.

If the first bell win is established in the second CB state ST3, the game medium of "1" is provided. As already explained, in the second CB state ST3, the game can be executed only when "2" game media are betted. On the other hand, the number of game media awarded in the game in the second CB state ST3 is "1". Then, the second CB state ST3 ends when "30" game media are awarded. Therefore, in the second CB state ST3, it is necessary to generate 30 times the event that "1" game media is awarded in the game executed by betting "2" game media. The game media possessed by the player will decrease by at least 30 from the start of the second CB state ST3 to the end of the second CB state ST3. Therefore, the second CB state ST3 becomes a game state disadvantageous to the player. However, this disadvantage of the second CB state ST3 is lower than that of the first CB state ST2.

Further, in the second CB state ST3, as described above, the normal replay winning can be established, and both the normal replay winning and the first bell winning may not be established. Then, when the second CB state ST3 occurs in the second section SC2, the second CB state ST3, which is disadvantageous to the player, continues for 30 or more games, and the number of games is executed in the second section SC2. added to the total number of games played.

As described above, in the configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as game states disadvantageous to the player, by executing the game with the number of bets "2", the winning state of the second CB combination is obtained. At the same time, after preventing the second CB winning from being established, the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed. Regardless of the order and the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. That is, when the second CB role is won by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2", a game in which the number of bets is "3" is subsequently executed to achieve the second CB role. Even in the winning state of , the second CB prize is not established. Also, in the winning state of the second CB role, even if a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed, the first CB role is excluded from the lottery targets in the role lottery process (FIG. 16). will not be elected. Since the winning state of the first CB combination is not established, the first CB prize is not established, and the game state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. As a result, it is possible to execute a game with a bet number of "3" while preventing transitions to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. By executing a game with a bet number of "3", a transition to the second section SC2 can occur as already described, and a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and ART state ST6 can occur.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is assumed that the processing for clearing all of the main side RAM 74 (step S105) is executed for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, in a situation where medals are to be paid out, an illegal jig is used for the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 to prevent medals from being detected, thereby paying out more medals than should be paid out. It is assumed that there will be fraudulent acts that On the other hand, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the entry of the illegal jig, and the object detection sensor detects the entry of the illegal jig. Intrusion anomaly notification is executed when Therefore, even if the fraudulent jig is inserted in such a way that it is not detected by the object detection sensor, the fraudulent jig is used to repeat the act of illegally paying out a large number of medals. Intrusion of an illegal jig may be detected by an object detection sensor, and intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudulent person will forcibly terminate the intrusion abnormality notification by illegally executing the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 . Then, it is assumed that a game is played using the illegally obtained medals in the present slot machine 10 in which the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, when such a fraudulent act is performed, the main side RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105), so that the main side RAM 74 does not store the second CB winning data. In other words, it is not in the winning state of the second CB combination. When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in a state in which the second CB role is not won, the first CB role can be won, and if the first CB award is established, the player will be disadvantaged. It becomes the first CB state ST2, which is a game state. As a result, it becomes possible to give a disadvantage to the person who has committed the above fraudulent act. On the other hand, in a game hall, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed before the opening of the business, and the second CB role is won. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game with a bet number of "3" while preventing the occurrence of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the probability of winning the second CB role in a game where the number of bets is "2" is about 1/2.2, whereas in a game where the number of bets is "3" , the probability of winning the first CB role is about 1/6.6. That is, the probability of winning the second CB combination is set higher than the probability of winning the first CB combination. As a result, when the second CB role is won by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2" in a game hall or the like, the number of games required until the second CB role is won is reduced. becomes possible. On the other hand, even if a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed before the 2nd CB role is erroneously won, the probability of winning the 1st CB role is higher than the probability of winning the 2nd CB role. By making it low, it is possible to make it difficult to win the first CB combination.

The probability of winning the 2nd CB role is not limited to a configuration higher than the probability of winning the 1st CB role, and the probability of winning the 1st CB role is higher than the probability of winning the 2nd CB role. A high configuration may be employed, and a configuration may be employed in which the probability of winning the first CB role and the probability of winning the second CB role are the same or substantially the same.

FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing the CB processing executed by the main MPU 72. As shown in FIG. Incidentally, the CB process is executed at step S901 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As already explained, the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26) is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the processing for CB is also performed in one game. will be executed after all rotations of are stopped.

By determining whether or not "1" is set to either the first CB state flag or the second CB state flag provided in the main side RAM 74, the current gaming state is changed to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3. (step S1001). The first CB state flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game state is the first CB state ST2 in the main side MPU 72, and the second CB state flag mainly indicates whether or not the game state is the second CB state ST3. This is a flag for identification by the side MPU 72 .

If a negative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first CB winning has been established in this game (step S1002). That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the first CB winning has stopped on the main line ML while the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . If the first CB winning has been established (step S1002: YES), the first CB status flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1003), and the first CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1004). ). Then, a first CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the first CB state ST2 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1005). As a result, the gaming state becomes the first CB state ST2. In the first CB state ST2, the processing of steps S513 to S515 in the bet handling processing (FIG. 14) is executed as already described, so that the game is executed only in the situation where "3" game media are betted. The Rukoto.

If a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined whether or not the second CB winning has been established in this game (step S1006). That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the second CB winning has stopped on the main line ML while the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 . If the second CB winning has been established (step S1006: YES), the second CB status flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1007), and the second CB winning data in the main RAM 74 is cleared (step S1008). ). Then, a second CB winning command indicating that the state has shifted to the second CB state ST3 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1009). As a result, the gaming state becomes the second CB state ST3. In the second CB state ST3, the processing of steps S503, S508, S515, and S516 in the bet handling processing (FIG. 14) is executed as already described, so that the game media "2" are betted. The game will be executed only at

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the first bell winning has been established in the current game (step S1010). If the first bell winning has been established (step S1010: YES), 1 is added to the value of the total award counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1011). The total given counter is a counter for specifying the total number of game media given in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 by the main side MPU 72, and the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is started. Cleared to "0" when

When the value of the total grant counter after adding 1 becomes "30" which is the end reference number of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 (step S1012: YES), the CBs corresponding to the current CB states ST2 and ST3 The state flag is cleared to "0" (step S1013). Then, a CB end command indicating that the current CB states ST2 and ST3 have ended is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1014).

Next, how the game state shifts to the CB states ST2 and ST3 and how the shift to the CB states ST2 and ST3 is restricted will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 31(a) shows a period in which the game is played with "3" game media being bet, and FIG. 31(b) shows a period in which the game is played with "2" game media being bet. FIG. 31(c) shows the period during which the 1st CB combination is won, FIG. 31(d) shows the period during which the 2nd CB combination is won, and FIG. 31(e) shows the period. Shows the period in which the first CB winning or the second CB winning can be established, FIG. 31(f) shows the period in either the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, and FIG. 31(g) shows the first section FIG. 31(h) shows a period during which the game can be completed in the second section SC2 in SC1.

First, the case where transitions to the CB states ST2 and ST3 are restricted will be described.

At timing t1, which is the timing after the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105), a game with a bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 31(b). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the game section is the first section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal game state ST1. be. Then, the game with the number of bets "2" is repeatedly executed, so that the second CB combination is won at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 31(d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. Also, in a situation where the second CB combination is won, a game with the number of bets of "2" as shown in FIG. This is the period during which the prize can be established.

After that, at timing t3, the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeatedly executed as shown in FIG. 31(a). Even if the 2nd CB role is won, the 2nd CB win will not be established if the game with the number of bets "3" is executed, and the 1st CB role will be won if the 2nd CB role is won. never do. Therefore, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 31(e), there is a period in which the establishment of CB winning is not possible. Further, when the game with the bet number of "2" is executed, the opportunity to shift to the second section SC2 does not occur, but when the game with the bet number of "3" is executed, the second section is not generated. Since an opportunity to shift to SC2 may occur, it is possible to shift to the second section SC2 at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 31(g).

After that, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t4, so that the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. , the game is completed in the second section SC2.

After that, at the timing of t5, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed as shown in FIG. 31(b). In this case, since the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, the situation is such that the second CB winning can be established as shown in FIG. 31(e). Also, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31(h). After that, when the second CB winning is established at the timing of t6, the state becomes the second CB state ST3 as shown in FIG. 31(f). Even if the game in the second CB state ST3 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31(h).

Next, a case where the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated from the timing after the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

At timing t7, which is the timing after the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105), a game with a bet number of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 31(a). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the game section is the first section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal game state ST1. be. When a game in which the bet number is "3" is executed, a transition to the second section SC2 may occur. It is a transition period. After that, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the timing of t8, so that the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. , the game is completed in the second section SC2.

After that, the game with the number of bets "3" is repeatedly executed, so that the first CB combination is won at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 31(c). Also, in a state where the first CB combination is won, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. This is the period during which the prize can be established. After that, when the first CB winning is established at the timing of t10, the first CB state ST2 is entered as shown in FIG. 31(f). Even if the game in the first CB state ST2 is executed in the second section SC2, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31(h).

After that, at the timing of t11, the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 31(f). Even after the first CB state ST2 ends, the second section SC2 continues as shown in FIG. If so, it is treated as a game completed in the second section SC2 as shown in FIG. 31(h).

Next, a case where the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated from the timing after the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed will be described.

At the timing t12, which is the timing after the processing for clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S105), a game with the bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 31(b). In this case, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won, the game section is the first section SC1, the lottery mode is the normal mode, and the normal game state ST1. be. Then, the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeatedly executed, so that the second CB combination is won at the timing of t13 as shown in FIG. 31(d). In this case, the transition to the second CB state ST3 does not occur by preventing the second CB winning from being established. Also, in a situation where the second CB combination is won, a game with the number of bets of "2" as shown in FIG. This is the period during which the prize can be established. Note that when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, there is no opportunity to shift to the second section SC2, so as shown in FIG. not. After that, when the second CB win is established at the timing of t14, the second CB state ST3 is entered from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 31(f).

Next, the contents of various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet will be described.

As described above, the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are game states that are disadvantageous to the player. By executing a game in which the number of bets is "3", it is possible to aim for the occurrence of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. . In this case, the slot machine 10 is configured to notify that the second CB combination is not won and that the third CB combination is won.

FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the information related to the winning state of the first CB and second CB winning combinations executed by the image display device 63. FIG.

When the game can be executed and when the game is being executed, the image display device 63 displays a moving image of the predetermined character image G11 as shown in FIGS. 32(a) to 32(c). . In this case, in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won, a non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 32(a). . The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed in a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the non-internal notification image G12 is maintained when the situation continues in which neither the first CB winning nor the second CB winning is won.

As the non-internal notification image G12, a non-internal explicit image G21 indicating that neither the first CB nor the second CB win has been won, and neither the first CB or second CB win has been won. A non-internal game number image G22 indicating the number of games executed in the situation is displayed. A character image of "returning" is specifically displayed as the non-explicit internal image G21. This clearly indicates that neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won.

As the non-internally played game number image G22, specifically, a character image indicating the number of games executed in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB win has been won, such as "010 game", is displayed. . In this case, after the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 is executed, the first game in the situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won is played. Until the game is completed, "000 games" is displayed as the non-internally played game number image G22. In addition, after the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is completed, until the first game is completed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won, the image G22 is displayed as the number of games not played internally. "000 games" is displayed. Thereafter, the number of games displayed as the non-internally consumed game number image G22 each time one game is executed, regardless of whether the game has a bet number of "3" or the game has a bet number of "2". 1 is added.

Winning the second CB role in a game where the number of bets is "2" in a situation in which neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, and the state of winning the second CB role is achieved. As shown in b), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is ended. In this case, the display of the predetermined character image G11 is continued, but the image display device 63 does not display an image clearly indicating that the second CB combination has been won.

Winning the first CB role in a game where the number of bets is "3" in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, and the winning state of the first CB role is achieved. As shown in c), the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated. In this case, the first internal clear image G13 that clearly indicates that the first CB win has been won is displayed in a partial area of the image display device 63 . The first internal explicit image G13 is displayed in a corner portion of the image display device 63 so as not to overlap the predetermined character image G11 in the front-rear direction. The display of the first internal clear image G13 is maintained when the winning state of the first CB combination continues. Then, when the first CB winning is established and the game state shifts to the first CB state ST2, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 ends.

In the first CB state ST2, the image display device 63 displays the CB state. In addition, in the second CB state ST3, the image display device 63 also displays the CB state. Although the specific content of the display during the CB state is arbitrary, for example, the entire display surface of the image display device 63 may be dimly displayed while the predetermined character image G11 is being displayed on the image display device 63. . Further, an image showing the remaining number of payouts of game media required until the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends may be displayed.

In addition to the above notifications, various types of bet number related notifications are executed as notifications related to winning states of the first CB and second CB hands. Specifically, as the bet number-related notification, in a situation where neither the first CB role nor the second CB role has been won, reel By the timing when the stop operations of 32L, 32M, and 32R become valid, notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. The manner of execution of notification of the response to the winning of the second CB role is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "winning the second CB role" is output from the speaker 62 . The notification corresponding to winning of the 2nd CB role is also generated after the game in which the 2nd CB role is won, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the 2nd CB role.

In the winning state of the second CB combination, when a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, a notification corresponding to 2 bets is executed. The manner of execution of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "2 bets are offered" is output from the speaker 62. FIG. The 2-bet notification indicates that the number of bets is "2" if a game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated without intervening games with the number of bets of "3" in the winning state of the second CB combination. does not occur after the second game of the game.

In a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won, the notification corresponding to 3 bets is executed when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed. The mode of execution of the 3-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "3 bets are paid" is output from the speaker 62. FIG. In the case where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated without intervening the game with the number of bets of "2". In this case, it does not occur in the second and subsequent games in which the number of bets is "3".

In a situation where neither the 1st CB hand nor the 2nd CB hand is won, the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is valid if the 1st CB hand is won in a game where the number of bets is "3". The notification of the winning of the first CB combination is executed by the timing of . The manner of execution of notification of the winning of the 1st CB role is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as ``Winning the 1st CB role'' is output from the speaker 62. FIG. However, the notice corresponding to the winning of the 1st CB role is generated only in the game in which the 1st CB role is won, and in the subsequent game in which the 1st CB role is won, the number of bets is "2" and the number of bets is "3". None of the games will run.

In the winning state of the first CB combination, when a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed, the notification corresponding to 2 bets is executed. The manner of execution of the 2-bet correspondence notification is arbitrary, but for example, a message such as "2 bets are offered" is output from the speaker 62. FIG. The 2-bet notification indicates that the number of bets is "2" if the game with the number of bets of "2" is repeated without intervening the game with the number of bets of "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination. does not occur after the second game of the game.

Next, the execution of various notifications in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of game media bet will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 33(a) shows the execution period of the game with the bet number of "2", FIG. 33(b) shows the execution period of the game with the bet number of "3", and FIG. 33(c) shows the bet number. FIG. 33(d) shows the period during which the notification sound is output when the number of bets is "2". FIG. 33(e) shows a period during which the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, and FIG. (f) shows the period during which the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63, FIG. 33(g) shows the period during which the first CB win is won, and FIG. 33(h) shows the first 33(i) shows the period during which the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is executed, and FIG. 33(j) shows the state during the CB state on the image display device 63. Indicates the period during which the display is being performed.

When the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is started, the effect execution control is started by the effect side MPU 92 at the timing of t1. In this case, since the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main side RAM 74 has been executed, neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. Therefore, at the timing of t1, the non-internal notification image G12 starts to be displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 33(e).

After that, at timing t2, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed as shown in FIG. 33(b). In this case, since a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand is won, the notification corresponding to 3 bets is supported as shown in FIG. 33(d). A notification sound is output. As a result, it is possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets of "3" is being executed in a situation where neither the first CB nor the second CB is won. becomes. Also, at the timing of t2, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 game" to "001 game".

At timing t3, as shown in FIG. 33(b), a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed again in a situation where neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "3" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "2", the 3-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, the 3-bet correspondence notification is repeatedly executed in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "3" under the condition that neither the first CB nor the second CB is won. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Also, at the timing of t3, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 33(b), the game with the number of bets of "3" is executed again under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, the first CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 33(g). Therefore, at the timing t4, a notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the first CB combination is output as shown in FIG. 33(d). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won. Further, the notification corresponding to the winning of the first CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the first CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the first CB role has been won before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the game in which the first CB role has been won. . Also, at timing t4, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "002 game" to "003 game".

After that, the game in which the first CB winning combination is won at the timing t5 ends without the establishment of the first CB winning. In this case, at the timing t5, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. The display of the internal explicit image G13 is started. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the first CB combination has been won.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 33(b), a game is executed in which the number of bets is "3" in the winning state of the first CB combination. Then, at timing t7, which is the timing at which the game ends, the first CB win is established as shown in FIGS. 33(g) and 33(i), thereby shifting to the first CB state ST2. In this case, at the timing t7, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. The display during the CB state is started.

After that, at the timing of t8, a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the first CB state ST2. In the game as well, the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 continues as shown in FIG. 33(j). After that, the game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated, so that the first CB state ST2 ends as shown in FIG. 33(i) at the timing of t9. In this case, the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 ends at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. 33(j). In addition, since neither the first CB nor the second CB is won, the non-internal notification image G12 starts to be displayed on the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 33(e) at the timing of t9. be done. In this case, the display content of the non-internal game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is "000 games".

After that, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. At the timing t10, the display content of the non-internally-completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "000 game" to "001 game".

After that, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed again under the condition that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. In the game, the second CB combination is won as shown in FIG. 33(h). Therefore, at the timing of t11, a notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is output as shown in FIG. 33(c). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. Further, the notification corresponding to winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective in the game in which the second CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the second CB role has been won before the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped in the game in which the second CB role has been won. . Also, at the timing of t11, the display content of the non-internally completed game number image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is updated from "001 game" to "002 game".

After that, the game in which the second CB winning combination is won at the timing t12 ends without the establishment of the second CB winning. In this case, at the timing of t12, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 ends as shown in FIG. 33(e). This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won.

After that, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification corresponding to the 2-bet combination is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player or the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, and the second CB combination is won. It is possible to make the player and the manager of the game hall recognize that there is a game hall. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed again. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated execution of the 2-bet notification in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33(b), at timing t15 and timing t16, a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. Since it is originally assumed that a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed when the 2nd CB role is won, the 3-bet support notification and the 2nd CB role are supported for the game. No notification is performed.

After that, at the timing of t17, as shown in FIG. 33(a), a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed in the winning state of the second CB combination. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the notification sound corresponding to the 2-bet notification is output, and the notification sound corresponding to the winning notification of the second CB combination is output again. As a result, it becomes possible for the player and the manager of the gaming hall to recognize that the game with the number of bets "2" has been executed in the winning state of the second CB combination, and the second CB combination is won. It is possible to make the player or the manager of the game hall recognize that the player is there. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the game hall manager to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

After that, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 33(a), the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination is executed again. However, since this game is a game in which the number of bets is "2" from the second time onward without intervening games in which the number of bets is "3", the 2-bet correspondence notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the repeated execution of the 2-bet notification in response to the intentional repetition of the game in which the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. Become. On the other hand, at the timing of t18, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the notification sound corresponding to the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is output again. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won. In addition, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB combination is started before the timing at which the stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective. This makes it possible for the player and the manager of the game hall to recognize that the second CB combination has been won before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped.

Next, a processing configuration for performing various notifications executed in relation to the winning state of the CB combination and the number of bets of game media as described above will be described.

FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the internal notification control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The internal notification control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, a period of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

First, it is determined whether or not a supply start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1101). When the main MPU 72 starts to supply operating power, if no abnormality has occurred in the storage state of the main RAM 74, the main processing (FIG. 10) executes a return command as a command at the start of the supply. Send either an initialization command or a partial initialization command. As already explained, when there is no abnormality in the storage state of the main-side RAM 74, the return command returns to the address before power-off without executing the partial clear processing (step S104) and the all clear processing (step S105). This is the command sent when going back. The all-initialization command is a command that is transmitted when the all-clearing process (step S105) is executed, as will be described later. The partial initialization command is a command that is transmitted when the partial clear processing (step S104) is executed, as will be described later.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1101, control processing at the start of supply is executed (step S1102). FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing control processing at the start of supply.

When the all clear processing (step S105) is executed in the main processing (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the all initialization command is received (step S1201: YES), the non-internal notification image on the image display device 63 The display of G12 is started (step S1202). When the all clear processing (step S105) is executed, all areas of the main side RAM 74 are initialized as will be described in detail later. situation. Therefore, when the all-initialization command is received, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started. In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games".

When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10) of the main MPU 72 and the partial initialization command is received (step S1203: YES), the partial initialization command Based on the set information, it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is won (step S1204). When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the area in which the second CB winning data is to be stored in the main RAM 74 is not initialized, as will be described in detail later, and the area other than the area ( (including an area where the first CB winning data is stored) is initialized.

If the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the main side will continue to perform the partial clearing process (step S104) after the supply of operating power is resumed. The state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the RAM 74 is maintained. On the other hand, if the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74 immediately before the supply of operating power is stopped, the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed after the supply of operating power is resumed. Also, the state in which the second CB winning data is not stored in the main side RAM 74 is maintained. Information indicating whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74 is set in the partial initialization command, as will be described later. Therefore, in step S1204, it is determined whether information indicating that the second CB winning data is stored is included in the partial initialization command.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1205). In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". When an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, "1" is set to the second CB inside flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1206). The 2nd CB inside flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that the 2nd CB state is the winning state.

If the return command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1207: YES), it is determined whether or not the second CB combination is won based on the information set in the return command (step S1208). As already explained, information indicating whether or not either the first CB winning data or the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74 is set in the return command. If the 2nd CB combination is won (step S1208: YES), the 2nd CB inside flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1209).

If the second CB combination is not won (step S1208: NO), it is determined whether or not the first CB combination is won based on the information set in the return command (step S1210). If the first CB combination is not won (step S1210: NO), display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1211). In this case, the display content of the non-internal game count image G22 of the non-internal notification image G12 is "000 games". If the first CB combination is won (step S1210: YES), display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1212). After that, "1" is set to the first CB internal flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1213). The 1st CB inside flag is a flag for the production side MPU 92 to specify that the 1st CB state is the winning state.

Returning to the description of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34), if the winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the information set in the winning result command will be used in the current game. It is determined whether or not the 1CB role has been won and the 1CB prize has not been established (step S1104). The main side MPU 72 transmits a winning result command to the effect side MPU 92 in step S813, which is a process executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game in the reel control process (FIG. 25). The winning result command includes information corresponding to the type of winning data stored in the main RAM 74 in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game, and whether or not a winning has been established in the current game. information, and if a prize has been won in the current game, information on the type of prize that has been established is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1104, "1" is set to the first CB internal flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S1105), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is terminated (step S1106). , the display of the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1107).

In the internal notification control process, when a winning result command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), the second CB role is won in this game from the information set in the winning result command, and the second It is determined whether or not 2CB winning has been established (step S1108). If an affirmative determination is made in step S1108, "1" is set in the second CB internal flag of the effect-side RAM 94 (step S1109), and the display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is ended (step S1110). .

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is further determined whether or not a first CB winning command or a second CB winning command has been received from the main MPU 72. Thus, it is determined whether or not the first CB prize or the second CB prize has been established in the current game (step S1111). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first CB winning command in step S1005 of the CB processing (FIG. 30) when the first CB winning is established, and when the second CB winning is established, the CB processing A second CB winning command is transmitted in step S1009 of (FIG. 30).

If any of the CB winnings have been established (step S1111: YES), the process of clearing the flag inside the CB is executed (step S1112). In the CB internal flag clearing process, when the first CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", the first CB internal flag is cleared to "0", and the second CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared. If the middle flag is set to "1", the middle flag inside the second CB is cleared to "0". After that, end processing of various displays is executed (step S1113). In the termination process, if the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63, the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is terminated, and the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63. If so, the display of the first internal explicit image G13 is ended. After that, the image display device 63 starts displaying during the CB state (step S1114).

In the internal notification control process, if a winning result command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1103: YES), it is determined whether or not a CB end command has been received from the main MPU 72. It is determined whether or not the CB states ST2 and ST3 that have been set have ended (step S1115). As already described, the main MPU 72 transmits a CB end command in step S1014 of the CB process (FIG. 30) when the CB states ST2 and ST3 to be executed are ended.

When the CB states ST2 and ST3 to be executed have ended (step S1115: YES), the display during the CB state on the image display device 63 is ended (step S1116). Thereafter, display of the non-internal notification image G12 on the image display device 63 is started (step S1117).

In the internal notification control process, when a game start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), both the first CB inside flag and the second CB inside flag of the effect side RAM 94 are set to "1". is not set (step S1119 and step S1120: NO), a non-internal medium notification process is executed (step S1121). Also, if a game start command has been received from the master side MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and if "1" is set in the first CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1119: YES). , the first CB inside notification processing is executed (step S1122). Also, if a game start command has been received from the master side MPU 72 (step S1118: YES), and if the second CB internal flag of the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S1120: YES). , second CB internal medium notification processing is executed (step S1123).

FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing the non-internal notification process executed in step S1121 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34).

First, 1 is added to the value of the returning counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S1301). The during-returning counter is a counter for specifying the number of games executed after the image display device 63 started displaying the non-internal notification image G12, and is set in the during-returning counter. A number corresponding to the displayed value is displayed as the non-internally completed game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. It should be noted that when the display of the non-internal notification image G12 is started on the image display device 63, the value of the in-return counter is cleared to "0". After that, the display content of the non-internal notification image G12 is changed so that the number corresponding to the value set in the returning counter after the addition of 1 is displayed in the non-internal completed game number image G22 in the non-internal notification image G12. Update (step S1302).

After that, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for this game is "3" (step S1303). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the setting process at the start (FIG. 15) which is executed when one game is started. (step S603), and if the number of bets for the game is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first bet number command has been received from the main MPU 72 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1303, the "3" bet notification processing is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "3" bet notification completion flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1304: NO). After that (step S1305), the "3" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1306). In the "3" bet notification process, there is a 3-bet corresponding notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of "3" has been executed in a situation where neither the first CB hand nor the second CB hand has been won. make it run. As a result, a message such as, for example, “3 sheets are required” is output from the speaker 62 . The “3” bet notification completion flag is a flag for the effect-side MPU 92 to specify whether or not the 3-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when a game with the number of bets of “3” is repeated. When the "3" bet notification completion flag is set to "1", the "3" bet notification processing is not executed, so that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. When a game with the number of bets of "3" is repeated in a situation, it is possible to prevent the 3-bet correspondence notification from being repeated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1304, or if the process of step S1306 is executed, whether or not the first CB role has been won in the current game is determined from the information set in the game start command received this time. Determine (step S1307). If the first CB winning combination is won (step S1307: YES), processing for notifying when the first CB is won is executed (step S1308). In the processing for notification when the first CB is won, the notification of the winning of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, a message such as "winning the first CB role" is output from the speaker 62. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S1303, that is, if the number of bets for this game is "2" and the second bet number command has been received from the main side MPU 72, the "3" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1309). The "3" bet notified flag is also cleared to "0" when neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won.

After that, it is determined whether or not the second CB role has been won in the current game based on the information set in the game start command received this time (step S1310). If the 2nd CB is won (step S1310: YES), processing for notifying when the 2nd CB is won is executed (step S1311). In the notification processing when the second CB is won, the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as "winning the second CB role".

FIG. 37 is a flow chart showing the first CB internal middle notification process executed in step S1122 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1401). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the setting process at the start (FIG. 15) which is executed when one game is started. (step S603), and if the number of bets for the game is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1401, it is determined whether or not a second bet number command has been received from the main MPU 72. FIG.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notification processing is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification completion flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1402: NO). After that (step S1403), the "2" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1404). In the “2” bet notification process, a 2-bet corresponding notification for notifying that a game with the number of bets of “2” has been executed in the winning state of the first CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as, for example, "Two sheets are required." The “2” bet notification completion flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game with the number of bets “2” is repeated. By not executing the "2" bet notification process when the "2" bet notification completion flag is set to "1", the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the first CB combination. It is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated when the game is repeated.

When a negative determination is made in step S1401, the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1405). The "2" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

FIG. 38 is a flow chart showing the second CB internal middle notification process executed in step S1123 of the internal notification control process (FIG. 34).

First, it is determined whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S1501). As already explained, the main MPU 72 transmits the first bet number command if the number of bets for the game is "3" in the setting process at the start (FIG. 15) which is executed when one game is started. (step S603), and if the number of bets for the game is "2", a second bet number command is transmitted (step S604). In step S1501, it is determined whether or not a second bet number command has been received from the main side MPU 72 .

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notification processing is executed on condition that "1" is not set in the "2" bet notification completion flag of the effect side RAM 94 (step S1502: NO). After that (step S1503), the "2" bet notified flag is set to "1" (step S1504). In the “2” bet notification process, a 2-bet corresponding notification is executed to notify that a game with the number of bets of “2” has been executed in a winning state of the second CB combination. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as, for example, "Two sheets are required." The “2” bet notification completion flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the 2-bet correspondence notification has already been executed when the game with the number of bets “2” is repeated. By not executing the "2" bet notification process when the "2" bet notification completion flag is set to "1", the number of bets is "2" in the winning state of the second CB combination. It is possible to prevent the 2-bet correspondence notification from being repeated when the game is repeated.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1502, or if the processing of step S1504 is executed, processing for notifying when the second CB is won is executed (step S1505). In the notification processing when the second CB is won, the notification of the winning of the second CB combination is executed. As a result, the speaker 62 outputs a message such as "winning the second CB role". As described above, by executing the process for notifying when the second CB is won, in the state where the second CB is won, every time a game in which the number of bets is "2" is executed, the notification corresponding to the winning of the second CB is made. will be executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S1501, the "2" bet notified flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S1506). The "2" bet notified flag is cleared to "0" even when the first CB combination is won, and is also cleared to "0" when the second CB combination is won.

Next, the contents of the areas of the main RAM 74 to be initialized in the partial clear processing (step S104) and the full clear processing (step S105) in the main MPU 72 will be described.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the storage area of the main RAM 74. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, each storage area of the main RAM 74 is set with an address. The address is set as serial number information. Specifically, the address "00FF" is set as the start address, the address "01FF" is set as the next address, and the address "02FF" is set as the next address. The addresses are set so that the numbers are consecutive even after that.

A second CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the second CB winning data, is set as a storage area corresponding to the start address "00FF". In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination, when the index value IV to which the 2nd CB winning data is set is won, the 2nd CB winning data is set in the 2nd CB winning data area, and when the 2nd CB winning is established, , the second CB winning data is cleared from the second CB winning data area.

A first CB winning data area, which is an area for storing the first CB winning data, is set as a storage area corresponding to "01FF" which is the next order to the start address "00FF". In the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the combination, when the index value IV to which the first CB winning data is set is won, the first CB winning data is set in the first CB winning data area, and when the first CB winning is established, clears the first CB winning data from the first CB winning data area.

A setting value storage area, which is an area for storing setting values to be set, is set as a storage area corresponding to "02FF" which is next in order to "01FF". The set value selected in the set value update process (step S106) of the main process (FIG. 10) is stored in the set value storage area.

FIG. 40(a) is a flow chart showing the all clear processing executed in step S105 of the main processing (FIG. 10).

First, "00FF", which is the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1601). Thereafter, a clear execution process is executed to clear the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1602).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next address in the address of the main RAM 74 (step S1603). As a result, if the target address was "00FF", which is the start address, the target address becomes "01FF", and if the target address was "01FF", the target address becomes "02FF". ”.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the target address updated by the address update processing corresponds to the end address (step S1604). The end address is an address corresponding to the next in order with respect to the final address set in the main RAM 74 . If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the process returns to step S1602. By repeating the processing of steps S1602 to S1604 in this way, all storage areas of the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0".

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for clear execution processing in step S1602 in the current all clear processing. Thereafter, an all initialization command indicating that all clear processing has been executed for the main side RAM 74 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1606).

FIG. 40(b) is a flow chart showing the partial clear processing executed in step S104 of the main processing (FIG. 10).

First, "01FF", which is the address following the start address of the main RAM 74, is set as the target address (step S1701). As a result, the second CB winning data area, which is a storage area corresponding to "00FF", which is the start address of the main RAM 74, is excluded from the execution target of "0" clearing and is also excluded from the execution target of the initial setting process (step S1705). are also excluded. Thereafter, a clear execution process is executed to clear the storage area corresponding to the current target address in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S1702).

After that, an address update process is executed to set the target address to the next address in the address of the main RAM 74 (step S1703). As a result, if the previous target address was "01FF", which is the address next in order to the start address of the main RAM 74, the target address becomes "02FF", and the previous target address becomes "02FF". , the target address is "03FF".

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the target address updated by the address updating process corresponds to the end address (step S1704). The end address is an address corresponding to the next in order with respect to the final address set in the main RAM 74 . If a negative determination is made in step S1704, the process returns to step S1702. By repeating the processing of steps S1702 to S1704 in this manner, all the storage areas of the main side RAM 74 other than the second CB winning data area, which is the storage area corresponding to the start address of the main side RAM 74, are stored. "0" is cleared.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1704, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, initial setting is executed for the storage area targeted for clear execution processing in step S1702 in the current partial clear processing. After that, a partial initialization command indicating that the partial clear processing has been executed for the main side RAM 74 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S1706). In this case, it is specified whether or not the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and if the second CB winning data is stored, a partial initialization command is issued with the information corresponding thereto set. sent.

Next, how the main MPU 72 executes the partial clearing process (step S104) and the all clearing process (step S105) will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 41(a) shows a period during which operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, FIG. 41(b) shows a period during which main processing (FIG. 10) is executed in the main MPU 72, c) shows the execution timing of the setting update start operation in which the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned on by the setting key and the reset button 56 is not pressed. FIG. 41(d) shows the execution of the RAM clearing operation in which the power switch 55 is turned ON while the setting key insertion hole 57 is being turned ON by the setting key and the reset button 56 is pressed. 41(e) shows a period during which the main MPU 72 is partially clearing (step S104), and FIG. 41(f) is a full clearing process (step S105) by the main MPU 72. is executed, FIG. 41(g) shows the period during which the first CB combination is won, and FIG. 41(h) shows the period during which the second CB combination is won.

First, when the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started while the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74, and the main side MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (FIG. 40(b)). will be explained.

At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 41(c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key is being turned on by the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the reset button 56 is not being pressed. When the setting update start operation is performed, the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. Main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the MPU 72, and after that, as shown in FIG. is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41(h), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started while the second CB winning data is stored in the main side RAM 74. A state in which winning data is stored is maintained. Note that the set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t3.

By executing the partial clearing process (FIG. 40(b)) when the setting update start operation is performed as described above, the operating power to the main side MPU 72 is reduced in the winning state of the second CB combination. Even if the set value update process (step S106) is executed when the supply of the operating power is restarted after the supply of is stopped, after the set value update process (step S106) is executed Also, it is possible to maintain the winning state of the second CB combination. Thereby, the manager of the game hall does not repeatedly execute the game with the number of bets "2" before the opening of the game hall to make the second CB combination winning state every time the set value is changed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event that should not occur.

Next, in a state in which the second CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and the main MPU 72 executes an all-clearing process (FIG. 40(a)). A case will be described.

At the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 41(d), the power switch 55 is turned on while the reset button 56 is pressed while the setting key is being turned on as shown in FIG. 41(d). 41(a), the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started at the timing of t4, and the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 41(b). The main processing (FIG. 10) is started at , and the master side MPU 72 performs all clear processing (FIG. 40A) as shown in FIG. be done. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41(h), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started with the second CB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74. Data will be erased. Note that the set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t6.

When the RAM clearing operation is performed as described above, the all clearing process (FIG. 40(a)) is executed to erase the second CB winning data, so that the all clearing process (FIG. 40 When (a)) is executed, it is possible to create a situation in which neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination is won. Then, when the game with the number of bets "3" is executed without winning the second CB combination, the first CB prize is established and the player can shift to the first CB state ST2 which is disadvantageous to the player. It will happen. As a result, it is possible to suppress the profit obtained by illegally performing the all clear processing (FIG. 40(a)).

Next, in a state in which the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, and the main MPU 72 executes a partial clear process (FIG. 40(b)). I will explain the case where

At timing t7, as shown in FIG. 41(c), the power switch 55 is turned on while the setting key is being turned on by the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 57 and the reset button 56 is not being pressed. When the setting update start operation is performed, the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. Main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the MPU 72, and after that, as shown in FIG. is executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 41(g), the supply of operating power to the main side MPU 72 is started with the first CB winning data stored in the main side RAM 74. Data will be erased. Note that the set value update process (step S106) is executed after the timing of t9.

Even if the partial clearing process (FIG. 40(b)) is executed when the setting update start operation is performed as described above, the first CB winning data is erased, so that in the original game It is possible to cancel the state in which the first CB winning data is stored, which is an abnormal state, upon changing the set value.

<Regarding the second section SC2>
Next, the second section SC2 will be explained. First, the first control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The first control process of the game section is executed in step S711, which is a process executed after completion of the win/loss determination of the win in the win lottery process (FIG. 16).

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1801). The second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 in the main side MPU 72, and when "1" is set in the second section flag, the second section SC2 , and the first section SC1 is when the value of the second section flag is "0". If "1" is set in the second section flag (step S1801: YES), the processing after step S1802 is not executed. As a result, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806 and the stay mode lottery process in step S1810 are not executed in the second section SC2.

If the second interval flag is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802). If the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: YES), the processing after step S1803 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the process for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery process in step S1806, and step S1810 The lottery process for the stay mode will not be executed.

If the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S1802: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter of the main side RAM 74 is "3". , determines whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1803). If the number of bets for this game is "2" (step S1803: NO), the processing after step S1804 is not executed. As a result, in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the first section SC1, the processing for setting the second section SC2 in step S1805, the direct hit lottery processing in step S1806, and the stay mode in step S1810. lottery processing will not be executed.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S1803: YES), it is determined whether or not any index value IV has been won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current combination (step S1804). ). If the lottery process (FIG. 16) for this combination is lost (step S1804: NO), the processes after step S1805 are not executed. As a result, even if it is the first section SC1, if it is lost in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the process for setting it to the second section SC2 in step S1805 and the direct hit lottery process in step S1806 And the lottery process of stay mode of step S1810 will not be performed.

In the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the current role, if any index value IV is won (step S1804: YES), the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the main RAM 74 The continuous game number counter 74c (see FIG. 9) and the total winning number counter 74d (see FIG. 9) provided in the are each cleared to "0" (step S1805). The second section SC2 is set by setting the second section flag to "1".

The number-of-continued-games counter 74c is for specifying the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. is a counter of When the value of the continuous game number counter 74c reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) in the second section SC2, even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, In the reached game, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

The total acquisition number counter 74d informs the main side MPU 72 of the restricted total net increase number of game media from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 is continued without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the “total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value. When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d reaches the value corresponding to the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400 cards) in the second section SC2, even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, In the reached game, the second section SC2 ends, and the state shifts to the first section SC1 and the normal game state ST1.

After that, direct hit lottery processing is executed (step S1806). In the direct hit lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the direct hit lottery in the ART state ST6 is selected. FIG. 43(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6 in the direct hit lottery process. As shown in FIG. 43(a), in the hand lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game, if the index value IV=5 is won, there is a 4% chance that the ART state ST6 will be won directly. If the index value IV=6 is won, the ART state ST6 is won directly with a probability of 1%, and if the index value IV=8 is won, the ART state ST6 is won directly with a probability of 3%. Thus, if the index value IV=9 is won, there is a 2% chance that the ART state ST6 will be won directly. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

Index values IV=5, 6, 8, and 9 that can be hit directly in the ART state ST6 are combinations in which the winning probability does not change at set values of "1" to "6". On the other hand, even if a player wins at index values IV=7 and 10 where the winning probability fluctuates between set values "1" to "6", direct hit winning in ART state ST6 is not achieved in the direct lottery process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set values of "1" to "6" from giving an advantage or disadvantage with respect to the probability of direct hit winning in the ART state ST6. Although the direct lottery process is executed even when the index value IV=7 or 10 is won, the configuration is not limited to preventing the direct hit lottery in the ART state ST6, and the index value IV=7. , 10, the direct lottery process may not be executed. In addition, even if a winning is made with any of the index values IV=1 to 3 and after 11, the direct hit lottery process is not limited to the direct hit winning of the ART state ST6, and the direct hit winning of the ART state ST6 is not limited. It may be a configuration that can be, or a configuration in which the direct hit lottery process is not executed.

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win in the ART state ST6 (step S1807: YES), the ART state ST6 transition confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1808). The transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed. When the transition confirmation flag of ART state ST6 is set to "1", a process is executed to shift the game state to ART state ST6 when the current game ends.

After that, lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S1809). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2.

When direct hit lottery processing does not result in direct hit winning in ART state ST6 (step S1807: NO), lottery processing in stay mode is executed (step S1810). The stay mode is a mode that determines the maximum number of games required until the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 is established. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stay mode.

As shown in FIG. 44, A mode, B mode and C mode are set as stay modes. These A mode, B mode and C mode have different advantages for the player in relation to the maximum number of games required until the transition condition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is satisfied.

Specifically, in the A mode, 700 games are set as the number of ceiling games. That is, when the A mode is set at the time of transition to the second section SC2, the number of games with a bet number of "3" executed in the second section SC2 in the normal game state ST1 is 700 games. By reaching it, the condition for shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is satisfied.

When the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the game enters the end preparation state ST7 and then the normal game state ST1. Also, when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the A mode. On the other hand, when the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the game shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. After the ART state ST6 ends, when the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the A mode.

Here, as already explained, the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1 is the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), the second section SC2 ends in the game reached and the first section SC1 continues even during the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6. Then, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 39 games. In addition, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before shifting from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the stopping operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed according to the notified order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The assumed maximum number of continuous games is based on the relationship between the probability of winning any of index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode and the probability of winning any of index values IV = 11 to 16 in the 1st RT mode. 70 games. Then, if it takes 700 games to transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and 70 games are played in the preparation state ST4 and 39 games are played in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed. , the remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is 691 games.

Further, when a game in which the bet number is "3" is executed in the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, the bet number is "3" in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode. is executed, and when a game is executed in which the number of bets is "3" in the state of ART state ST6 and the second RT mode, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game ("1 The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be given in the game") is about 2.5. The maximum number of continuous games (35 games) assumed in the preparation state ST4 which is the first RT mode, the number of continuous games (39 games) in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 which is the second RT mode, and the remaining upper limit of the ART state ST6 When 2.5 is added to the sum of the number of games (691 games), the result is about 1912. This value is less than 2400, which is the upper limit of the net increase in the number of sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the ART state ST6 occurs in the A mode, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 691 games.

In the case of the B mode, 500 games are set as the number of first ceiling games. In other words, when the B mode is set at the time of transition to the second section SC2, the number of games executed in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1 reaches 500 games, so that the first simulation is performed. A condition for shifting to the bonus state ST5 is established. The number of ceiling games for the first time is smaller than the number of ceiling games in the A mode. Therefore, the B mode is more advantageous than the A mode.

When the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the normal game state ST1 is entered without shifting to the end preparation state ST7 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. However, even if the normal game state ST1 is entered, the second section SC2 is maintained and the B mode is maintained. On the other hand, when the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the game shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. When the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, the normal game state ST1 is entered without transitioning to the end preparation state ST7. However, even if the normal game state ST1 is entered, the second section SC2 is maintained and the B mode is maintained.

When the normal game state ST1 is reached for the second time in the B mode, 80 games are set as the number of ceiling games for the second time. As a result, when the number of games executed in the normal game state ST1 reaches 80, the conditions for shifting to the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 are established in the B mode. That is, in the A mode, when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs once, the second section SC2 ends and shifts to the first section SC1 at the time of transition to the normal game state ST1 thereafter, and the A mode is activated. will be terminated. On the other hand, in the B mode, even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs once, the game is maintained in the second section SC2 and in the B mode at the time of transition to the normal game state ST1 thereafter. The second ceiling game number in the B mode is set to be smaller than the ceiling game number in the A mode. Therefore, the mode is more advantageous than the A mode also from this point. Also, the number of ceiling games for the second time in B mode is shorter than the number of ceiling games for the first time in B mode. As a result, in the B mode, the first transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 occurs, and then the transition to the normal game state ST1 and the second transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occur again. It is possible to reduce the maximum number of games required by.

If the transition condition to the ART state ST6 is not satisfied in the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the B mode, if the ending condition of the second section SC2 is not satisfied in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus When the state ST5 is completed, the state becomes the end preparation state ST7, and then the state becomes the normal game state ST1. Also, when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the B mode. On the other hand, when the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the game shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. After the ART state ST6 ends, when the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the B mode.

Here, as already explained, the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1 is the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), the second section SC2 ends in the game reached and the first section SC1 continues even during the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6. Then, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 39 games. In addition, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before shifting from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the stopping operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed according to the notified order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The assumed maximum number of continuous games is based on the relationship between the probability of winning any of index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode and the probability of winning any of index values IV = 11 to 16 in the 1st RT mode. 70 games. Then, if it takes 500 games to transition to the first pseudo-bonus state ST5, and furthermore, 70 games are played in the preparation state ST4 and 39 games are played in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In the bonus state ST5, the transition to the normal game state ST1 is performed without satisfying the conditions for transition to the ART state ST6, and 80 games are required to transition to the second pseudo-bonus state ST5, and 70 games in the preparation state ST4. is exhausted and 39 games are completed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 after the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends is 702 games.

Further, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, the bet number is "3" in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode. is executed, and when a game is executed in which the number of bets is "3" in the ART state ST6 and in the second mode, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game ("1 The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be given in the game") is about 2.5. In addition, even if the first RT mode continues for 35 games in the preparation state ST4 before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 starts, and the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 continues for 39 games, the total net increase with the limitation of the game media is determined. The number of sheets is 185 sheets. This total net increase number is obtained when the conditions for transition to the ART state ST6 are not established in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5, and 80 games, which is the second peak number of games, are executed in the subsequent normal game state ST1. It is the number of sheets that will be completely digested. That is, in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5, if the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied and in the subsequent normal game state ST1, 80 games, which is the second ceiling game number, are executed. Regardless of the game result until the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed, the total number of restricted net additions of game media is 0 at the time when the preparation state ST4 that occurs before the second pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started. It is highly likely that Then, the maximum number of continuous games (35 games) assumed in the preparation state ST4 which is the first RT mode, the maximum number of continuous games (39 games) in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 which is the second RT mode, and the ART state ST6 When 2.5 is added to the sum of the remaining upper limit number of games (702 games), the result is about 1940. This value is less than 2400, which is the upper limit of the net increase in the number of sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the ART state ST6 occurs only once in the B mode, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 702 games. This minimum value is the number of games greater than the minimum value of 691 games assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the A mode.

In the C mode, 100 games are set as the number of ceiling games. In other words, when the C mode is set at the time of transition to the second section SC2, the number of games executed in the second section SC2 in the normal game state ST1 reaches 100 games, resulting in a pseudo-bonus state ST5. The conditions for the transition to are established. The number of ceiling games for the first time is smaller than the number of ceiling games in the A mode and the number of ceiling games in the B mode. Therefore, the C mode is more advantageous than the A mode, and is also more advantageous than the B mode in terms of the number of first ceiling games.

When the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are not satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the game enters the end preparation state ST7 and then the normal game state ST1. Also, when shifting to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the C mode. On the other hand, when the conditions for shifting to the ART state ST6 are satisfied in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the game shifts to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. In this case, the second section SC2 continues. After the ART state ST6 ends, when the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1, the game section shifts from the second section SC2 to the first section SC1. This terminates the C mode.

Here, as already explained, the number of times the game is executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1 is the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), the second section SC2 ends in the game reached and the first section SC1 continues even during the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6. Then, the state shifts to the normal game state ST1. Further, the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 39 games. In addition, in the preparation state ST4 that occurs before shifting from the normal game state ST1 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when the stopping operation of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is performed according to the notified order of stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The assumed maximum number of continuous games is based on the relationship between the probability of winning any of index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode and the probability of winning any of index values IV = 11 to 16 in the 1st RT mode. 70 games. Then, if it takes 100 games to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and 70 games are played in the preparation state ST4 and 39 games are played in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed. , the remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is 1291 games.

Further, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the preparation state ST4 and the first RT mode, the bet number is "3" in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the second RT mode. is executed, and when a game is executed in which the number of bets is "3" in the ART state ST6 and in the second mode, the expected value of acquisition of game media in one game ("1 The value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be given in the game") is about 2.5. The maximum number of continuous games (35 games) assumed in the preparation state ST4 which is the first RT mode, the number of continuous games (39 games) in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 which is the second RT mode, and the remaining upper limit of the ART state ST6 When 2.5 is added to the sum of the number of games (1291 games), the result is about 3413. This value is larger than 2400 sheets, which is the upper limit net increase number of sheets in the second section SC2. Therefore, when the ART state ST6 occurs in the C mode, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 886 games based on the upper limit net increase number of the second section SC2. This number of games is greater than 691 games, which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the A mode, and the number of games in the ART state ST6 in the B mode. This is the number of games greater than 702 games, which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 when it occurs only once.

In the stay mode lottery process (step S1810) in the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, the stay mode of the second section SC2 to be started this time is determined by lottery from among A mode, B mode and C mode. . FIG. 43(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the respective selection probabilities of the A to C modes in the stay mode lottery process.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the hand in this game, if any of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, the A mode has a probability of 95%. If selected, B mode is selected with a probability of 3% and C mode is selected with a probability of 2%, and if the index value IV = 4 is won, A mode is selected with a probability of 90% and a probability of 7%. B mode is selected and C mode is selected with a probability of 3%, and if the index value IV = 5 is won, A mode is selected with a probability of 50% and B mode is selected with a probability of 40%. C mode is selected with a probability of 10%, and if the index value IV = 6 is won, A mode is selected with a probability of 85%, B mode is selected with a probability of 10%, and C is selected with a probability of 5%. When the mode is selected and the index value IV=7 is won, the A mode is selected with a probability of 88%, the B mode is selected with a 9% probability, and the C mode is selected with a 3% probability. When the value IV=8 is won, the A mode is selected with a probability of 60%, the B mode is selected with a probability of 30%, and the C mode is selected with a probability of 10%, and the index value IV=9 is selected. If so, A mode is selected with a probability of 70%, B mode is selected with a probability of 20%, and C mode is selected with a probability of 10%. A mode is selected with a probability of 80%, B mode is selected with a probability of 15%, and C mode is selected with a probability of 5%. A mode is selected, B mode is selected with a probability of 1%, and C mode is selected with a probability of 1%. In this case, the lower the probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the higher the probability that the C mode will be selected and the higher the probability that the B mode will be selected. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

Index values IV other than index values IV = 7 and 10 are sets of values '1' to '6' in which the probability of winning does not change, and index values IV = 7 and 10 are settings '1' to '6'. It is a role in which the winning probability fluctuates depending on the value. On the other hand, as described above, the B mode and the C mode can be selected for any index value IV, and the index values IV=7 and 10 are compared to the index values IV=1 to 3 and 11 and later. Therefore, the selection probability of B mode and C mode is high. As a result, it becomes possible to generate an advantage or a disadvantage according to the setting values "1" to "6" regarding the mode of selection of the stay mode.

After executing the stay mode lottery process (step S1810) in the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, the stay mode setting process is executed (step S1811). FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing stay mode setting processing.

If the stay mode selected when setting the second section SC2 this time is the A mode (step S1901: YES), the A mode flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1902), "700" is set in the unlocked game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S1903). The A mode flag is a flag for specifying the A mode in the main MPU 72, and the unlocked game number counter 74e informs the main MPU 72 of the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. It is a counter for specifying

If the stay mode selected when setting the second section SC2 this time is the B mode (step S1904: YES), the B mode flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1905), The unlocked game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 is set to "500" (step S1906), and the heaven preparation flag provided to the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1907). The B mode flag is a flag for specifying the B mode in the main MPU 72 . The heaven preparation flag is the state after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed in B mode, or the first pseudo-bonus state. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is after the ART state ST6 is ended when the transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred after ST5 is ended.

If the stay mode selected when setting the second section SC2 this time is the C mode (step S1904: NO), the C mode flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1908), "100" is set in the unlocked game number counter 74e (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 (step S1909). The C mode flag is a flag for specifying the C mode in the main MPU 72 .

Returning to the description of the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section, after executing the stay mode setting process (step S1811), the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67 is executed (step S1812). In the lighting lottery process for the section display section 67, when setting the second section SC2, the section display section 67 is turned on from the beginning (i.e., immediately lit), or when the section display section 67 is shifted to the preparation state ST4 after that, the section display section 67 is turned on. It is decided by lottery whether 67 is put in the lighting state (that is, lighting standby). FIG. 43(c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the respective selection probabilities of immediate lighting and lighting standby in the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 43(c), in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the winning combination in the current game, if one of the index values IV=1 to 3 is won, there is a 50% probability that the light will be turned on immediately. If it is selected and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 50%, and if the index value IV = 4 is won, the immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 60% and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 40%, and the index value IV = 5, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 90%, and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 10%. Lighting is selected and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 35%, and if the index value IV=7 is won, immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 62% and lighting standby is selected with a probability of 38%. When the value IV=8 is won, the immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 80%, and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 20%, and when the index value IV=9 is won, the probability is 75%. , the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 25%, and if the index value IV=10 is won, the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 70%, and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 30%. , when the winning is made after the index value IV=11, the immediate lighting is selected with a probability of 40%, and the lighting standby is selected with a probability of 60%. In this case, the index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of selecting immediate lighting.

When immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display section 67 (step S1813: YES), the lighting process of the section display section 67 is executed (step S1814). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that the current section is the second section SC2.

On the other hand, when lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process (step S1812) of the section display unit 67 (step S1813: NO), the lighting standby flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" ( step S1815). The lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2.

Next, the timing at which the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state in the second section SC2 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 46(a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 46(b) shows the period of the second section SC2, and FIG. 46(c) shows the period of the normal game state ST1, FIG. 46(d) shows a period in any one of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the completion preparation state ST7 that occurs when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, and FIG. 46(e) shows the ART state ST6 and FIG. 46(f) shows a period of A mode, and FIG. 46(g) shows a period of B mode. FIG. 46(h) shows the period during which the section display section 67 is in the lighting state. Note that the number of bets for each game in the time chart of FIG. 46 is "3".

One game is executed at the timing t1 in the first interval SC1 as shown in FIG. 46(a). In this case, the winning result is that none of the index values IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(b), transition to the second section SC2 does not occur.

After that, at the timing of t2, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game, one of the index values IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, at the timing t2, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the second section SC2 is reached as shown in FIG. 46(b). Also, since the A mode is selected as the stay mode, the A mode is set at the timing t2 as shown in FIG. 46(f). However, lighting standby is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67 executed at the timing of t2. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(h), at the timing t2 when the second section SC2 is started, the section display section 67 is maintained in the off state without being switched to the lighting state.

After that, the game is repeated in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, a new game is started at timing t3 as shown in FIG. 46(a). By confirming the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the game, the normal game state ST1 is changed to the preparation state at the timing t4, which is the timing at which the game ends, as shown in FIGS. Move to ST4. Also, the expected net increase in game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be given in one game") shifts to a preparation state ST4 in which 1 or more can be achieved. At the time t4, the interval display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state as shown in FIG. 46(h).

In other words, although the section display section 67 can be maintained in the off state even after transitioning to the second section SC2, it is surely turned on when the game state shifts to a game state in which the expected value of the net increase in game media can be 1 or more. . As a result, in a game state in which the net increase expected value of the game media can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is in question.

Thereafter, at time t5, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the state of preparation ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, as the game is played repeatedly, a transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated. Even in this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state.

After that, a new game is started at the timing t6 as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game immediately before the current game, the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0, and the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and furthermore, the current stay mode is the A mode. Therefore, the game this time is in an end preparation state ST7 that occurs when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. In the game in the end preparation state ST7, at the timing t7 when the game ends, the end preparation state ST7 is shifted to the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d). At the timing of t7, the second section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 46(b) and becomes the first section SC1, and the A mode ends as shown in FIG. 46(f). Further, since the second section SC2 ends, the section display section 67 is turned off at the timing t7 as shown in FIG. 46(h).

After that, at the timing t8, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game, one of the index values IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, at the timing t8, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the second section SC2 is reached as shown in FIG. 46(b). Also, since the A mode is selected as the stay mode, the A mode is set at the timing of t8 as shown in FIG. 46(f). Further, immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67 executed at the timing of t8. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state at the timing t8 when the second section SC2 is started.

After that, the game is repeated in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the game in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed ends. Therefore, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d), the normal game state ST1 shifts to the preparation state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit.

Thereafter, at time t10, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the preparation state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, by repeatedly playing the game, a shift from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated. Even in this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state. In this situation, the game is ended at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 46(a), so that the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIGS. 46(d) and 46(e), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is shifted to the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit.

Thereafter, at time t12, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, the ART state ST6 is digested by repeatedly playing the game.

After that, at the timing of t13, a new game is started as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game immediately before the current game, the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 0, and the current stay mode is the A mode. Therefore, the game this time is in an end preparation state ST7 that occurs when the ART state ST6 ends. Then, in the game in the end preparation state ST7, at the timing t14 when the game ends, the end preparation state ST7 is shifted to the normal game state ST1 as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(e). Also, at the timing of t14, the second section SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 46(b) and becomes the first section SC1, and the A mode ends as shown in FIG. 46(f). Also, since the second section SC2 ends, the section display section 67 is turned off at the timing t14 as shown in FIG. 46(h).

After that, at the timing of t15, a new game is executed as shown in FIG. 46(a). In the game, one of the index values IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). Therefore, at the timing of t15, which is the timing at which the current game is started, the second section SC2 is entered as shown in FIG. 46(b). Also, since the B mode is selected as the stay mode, the B mode is set at the timing of t15 as shown in FIG. 46(g). Further, immediate lighting is selected in the lighting lottery process of the section display section 67 executed at the timing of t15. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state at the timing of t15 when the second section SC2 is started.

After that, the game is repeated in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. Then, in this situation, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the game in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed ends. Therefore, at the timing of t16, as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d), the normal game state ST1 shifts to the preparation state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit.

Thereafter, at time t17, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the state of preparation ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, by repeatedly playing the game, a shift from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated. Even in this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state.

In this situation, the game is ended at the timing t18 as shown in FIG. 46(a), so that the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, although the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 to be terminated this time is the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the B mode. Therefore, transition to the end preparation state ST7 does not occur, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 shifts to the normal game state ST1 at the timing of t18 as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d). Further, even if the transition to the normal game state ST1 occurs in this way, the second section SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 46(b) and the B mode is maintained as shown in FIG. 46(g). . Also, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state.

That is, when the section display unit 67 is switched to the lighting state once in the second section SC2, it is maintained in the lighting state until the second section SC2 ends. As a result, it becomes possible to notify the manager of the game hall that the second section SC2 is continuing.

After that, at the timing of t19, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the normal game state ST1. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, the game is repeated. Then, in this situation, at the timing of t20, as shown in FIG. 46(a), the game in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed ends. Therefore, at the timing t20, as shown in FIGS. 46(c) and 46(d), the normal game state ST1 shifts to the preparation state ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit.

Thereafter, at time t21, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the state of preparation ST4. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, as the game is played repeatedly, a transition from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated. Even in this case, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state.

In this situation, the game is ended at the timing of t22 as shown in FIG. 46(a), so that the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 becomes 0 games. In this case, the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Therefore, at the timing of t22, as shown in FIGS. 46(d) and 46(e), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is shifted to the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit.

After that, at timing t23, as shown in FIG. 46(a), a new game is started in the second section SC2 and in the ART state ST6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 46(h), the section display section 67 is kept lit. After that, the ART state ST6 is digested by repeatedly playing the game.

Next, the second control process of the game section executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The second control process for the game section is executed at step S909 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped rotating in one game. is executed after all

If "1" is set to the second section flag of the main side RAM 74 and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2001: YES), the state of the flag of the main side RAM 74 is confirmed. It is determined whether or not the game state is the end preparation state ST7 (step S2002). As already explained, the end preparation state ST7 is a case where the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2, which will be described later, and upon transition to the normal game state ST1 thereafter. This is the game state to be shifted to when the second section SC2 ends.

If it is in the termination preparation state ST7 (step S2002: YES), it is determined whether or not the termination preparation completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2003). The termination preparation completion flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not one game has been executed in the termination preparation state ST7. In the pseudo-bonus processing (step S907) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26), the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0 and the transition to the ART state ST6 has not been confirmed. Further, when it is specified that the second section SC2 is to end when the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 after that, a flag for setting the end preparation state ST7 is set and the end preparation completion flag is set. "0" is cleared. In addition, in the ART state processing (step S908) in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26), the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 0 games, and when the subsequent transition to the normal game state ST1 When it is specified that the two sections SC2 are to end, a flag is set to set the end preparation state ST7, and the end preparation completion flag is cleared to "0".

If the termination preparation completion flag is not set to "1" (step S2003: NO), the termination preparation completion flag is set to "1", and then the processing from step S2005 onwards is executed. If the end preparation completion flag is set to "1" (step S2003: YES), it means that one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7. In this case, a process for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in any of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, a counter for storing the number of continuous games in the game states ST4 to ST6 is displayed. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the game states ST4 to ST6 including . Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared to "0" and the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any one of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and after that, The number of remaining games to be unlocked is reset at the time of a new shift to the second section SC2. Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S2015). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2016). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 executes the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 due to the fulfillment of the ending condition.

If it is not the end preparation state ST7 (step S2002: NO), or if the process of step S2004 is executed, the value of the continuous game number counter 74c of the main side RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S2005). As already explained, the number-of-continued-games counter 74c informs the main MPU 72 of the number of times the game has been executed from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. It is a counter for specifying

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c after adding one is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S2006). If the value of the continuous game number counter 74c is 1500 or more, it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is met. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, and processing for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In the initialization process of the second section SC2, even if the player stays in any of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, a counter for storing the number of continuous games in the game states ST4 to ST6 is displayed. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the game states ST4 to ST6 including . Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared to "0" and the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any one of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) at that time is invalidated, and after that, The number of remaining games to be unlocked is reset at the time of a new shift to the second section SC2. Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S2015). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2016). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 executes an effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 due to the fulfillment of the ending condition.

If the value of the number-of-continued-games counter 74c is less than 1500 (step S2006: NO), the current game wins the first chance replay, the second chance replay, the normal replay, the first RT replay, and the second RT replay. , first fall replay win or second fall replay win is established (step S2007). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", the determination in step S2007 is made, and the current game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Any game state of the state ST3, the ready state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 is subject to the determination in step S2007.

If none of the replay winnings have been established (step S2007: NO), the number of bets for this game (that is, the value of the bet number setting counter 74a) is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S2008). . In this case, even if a replay win was established in the previous game and the current game is a game corresponding to a replay due to the establishment of the replay win, the number of bets for this game (that is, the bet number setting counter 74a value) is subtracted from the total acquisition number counter 74d.

As already explained, the total acquisition number counter 74d counts the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions from the start of the second section SC2 when the second section SC2 continues without intervening the first section SC1. This is a counter for identification by the main MPU 72 . As already explained, the restricted total net increase in the number of game media refers to the "total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues (the total number of game media awarded "0" when the game is not running)" to "the total number of game media consumed for executing the game while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" when the game is not running) is the predetermined difference number of sheets, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number of sheets is set as a predetermined reference value, and the number of sheets increases by the predetermined difference number of sheets from the predetermined reference value.

After that, whether or not any of the small prizes (1st bell prize, 2nd bell prize, 1st watermelon prize, 2nd watermelon prize, and cherry prize) for which game media are given in this game has been established Determine (step S2009). In this case, regardless of whether the number of bets in the current game is "2" or "3", the determination in step S2009 is made, and the current game is in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB. Any game state of the state ST3, the ready state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 is subject to the determination in step S2009. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, the number of game media provided in the current game is added to the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main RAM 74 (step S2010).

When a negative determination is made in step S2009, or when the process of step S2010 is executed, it is determined whether or not the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 is 0 or more (step S2011). When the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d is less than 0 (step S2011: NO), the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" (step S2012).

As described above, in step S2008, the number of bets for the current number of games is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d. Therefore, for example, in the game in the normal game state ST1 immediately after the transition to the second section SC2, any small win is established. Otherwise, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d will be less than zero. In this case, by making a negative determination in step S2011, the total acquisition number counter 74d is cleared to "0" in step S2012. As a result, "the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 is continuing ("0" in the situation where no game medium is awarded)" to "the second section When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute the game while SC2 is being continued ("0" when the game is not being executed) is set as the predetermined difference number, Using the minimum value of the predetermined difference number as a predetermined reference value, the total net increase number with limitation of game media, which is the increase of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value, is measured using the total acquired number counter 74d. becomes possible.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2007, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2011, or if the process of step S2012 is executed, does the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceed the upper limit net increase number of "2400"? It is determined whether or not (step S2013). If the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400", it means that the ending condition of the second section SC2 has been met. In this case, an affirmative determination is made in step S2013, and processing for ending the second section SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the initialization process of the second section SC2 is executed (step S2014). In the initialization process of the second section SC2, the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game section becomes the first section SC1. In the initialization process of the second interval SC2, even if the user stays in any of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, a counter for storing the number of continuous games in the game states ST4 to ST6 is displayed. The game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 by clearing the various data indicating the game states ST4 to ST6 including . Further, in the initialization process of the second section SC2, the flag for specifying the stay mode is cleared to "0" and the canceled game number counter 74e of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, even if the current game state is any one of the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, and the second CB state ST3, the remaining number of unlocked games at that time (that is, the number of ceiling games) is invalidated, and after that, The number of remaining games to be unlocked is reset at the time of a new shift to the second section SC2. Note that even during the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the initialization processing of the second section SC2 is executed and the second section SC2 ends, but the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 continues without being terminated.

After that, when the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the section display section 67 is switched from the lighting state to the non-lighting state (step S2015). As a result, the notification of the second section SC2 on the section display section 67 is terminated. Thereafter, a second section initialization command indicating that the second section SC2 has been initialized is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2016). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 executes the effect corresponding to the end of the second section SC2 due to the fulfillment of the ending condition.

Here, if any of the replay winnings are established, the process of steps S2008 to S2012 is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S2007. In a game in which a replay winning prize is established, the game media owned by the player at the start of the game is used for setting bets, but as a profit from the replay winning establishment, the same number of bets as in the game in which the replay winning prize was established A new game can be played again with the number of bets. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In this case, by not executing the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 in a game in which a replay winning has been established, in a game in which the number of game media owned by the player does not change, the value of the total winning number counter 74d is increased. It is possible to omit the execution of processing for changing , and it is possible to omit the execution of useless processing.

On the other hand, even in a game in which a replay win has been established, it is determined in step S2013 whether or not the value of the total winning number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". As a result, even though the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game prior to the game in which the replay winning was established, the second Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 is not executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds "2400" which is the upper limit net increase number in the game in which the subsequent replay winning is established. , and the initialization process of the second section SC2 can be executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2013, ending handling processing is executed (step S2017). FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the ending handling process.

First, it is determined whether or not the ending start flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2101). The ending start flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is the execution period of the ending effect of the second section SC2.

If the ending start flag is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), the value of the continuous game number counter 74c, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 in the main RAM 74, It is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, in the side RAM 74 is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S2102). ). Also, the value of a continuous game number counter 74c, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 in the main RAM 74, and the counter for measuring the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74. , and the value of the ART continuation counter is equal to or greater than 1500, which is the upper limit number of games (step S2103). In the main RAM 74, the value of a total winning number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions, and in the main RAM 74, a counter for measuring the number of remaining continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. It is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter, which is a counter, and the value obtained by multiplying the expected acquisition value "2.5" exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" (step S2014). ). Also, in the main RAM 74, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d, which is a counter for measuring the total net increase in number of game media with restrictions, and the counter in the main RAM 74, for measuring the number of remaining continuous games in the ART state ST6. The sum of the value obtained by multiplying the value of the ART continuation counter by the acquisition expected value "2.5" exceeds the upper limit net increase number "2400" (step S2015). The expected acquisition value is the case where a game with a bet number of "3" is executed in the second RT mode in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, or in the second mode in the ART state ST6. It is the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media bet in one game" from the "expected number of game media to be awarded in one game" when a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed under certain circumstances.

If an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2102 to S2105, it means that there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. In this case, the ending start flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2106), and an ending start command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2107). The effect side MPU 92 starts the ending effect by receiving the ending start command. As a result, when there is a high possibility that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied, the ending effect is executed before the second section SC2 is finished by satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. It becomes possible to

However, in a configuration in which the ending condition of the second section SC2 can be satisfied not only in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 but also in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3 and the preparation state ST4, An ending effect can be executed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, but no ending effect is executed in the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3 and the preparation state ST4. As a result, when the second section SC2 ends in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, which are advantageous states for the player, the ending effect can be provided as a privilege. In the normal game state ST1, the first CB state ST2, the second CB state ST3 and the preparation state ST4, the ending performance is not executed, thereby making it inconspicuous that the ending condition of the second section SC2 is satisfied. becomes possible.

FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing an ending effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. FIG. The ending effect control process is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

If an ending start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2201: YES), an ending effect start process is executed (step S2202). In the process of starting the ending effect, the ending effect table enabling execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. - 特許庁The effect execution control is performed by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the ending effect of the second section SC2.

During execution of the ending effect (step S2203: YES), if a game start command indicating that one game has newly started is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2204: YES), update processing of the ending effect is executed. (Step S2205). As a result, the data group to be referred to in the ending effect table already read into the effect-side RAM 94 in the previous step S2202 is changed with the start of a new game, and the ending effect of the second section SC2 is changed. is updated with the start of a new game.

When the second section initialization command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2206: YES) while the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2203: YES), ending processing of the ending effect is executed (step S2207). ). In the end processing of the ending effect, an ending end effect table enabling the execution of the ending effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. - 特許庁The ending effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 by controlling the execution of the effect in the effect side MPU 92 according to the ending effect table.

<Regarding normal game state ST1>
Next, the processing contents in the normal game state ST1 will be explained. FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . The advantageous lottery process at the start of the game is a step that is executed after the win/loss determination is completed in the win lottery process (FIG. 16) and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section. It is executed in S710.

First, it is determined whether or not the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2301). As already explained, the second section flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the game section is the second section SC2 in the main side MPU 72, and the second section flag may be set to "1". The second section SC2 is the first section SC1 when the value of the second section flag is "0". If the second section flag is not set to "1" (step S2301: NO), the processing after step S2302 is not executed. As a result, the direct lottery process of step S2308 and the transition lottery process of step S2311 are not executed in the case of the first section SC1.

If the second section flag is set to "1" (step S2301: YES), if the current gaming state is the preparation state ST4 or the pseudo-bonus state ST5 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2302: YES), the pseudo bonus processing at the start of the game is executed (step S2303), and if the current gaming state is the preparation state ST4 or ART state ST6 before shifting to the ART state ST6 (step S2304: YES), the game ART processing at the start is executed (step S2305). The pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game and the ART processing at the start of the game will be described later.

When "1" is set to the second interval flag (step S2301: YES), and the game state is neither the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 nor the ART state ST6 (steps S2302 and S2304 : NO), it is determined whether the current gaming state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2306). If the current game state is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 (step S2306: YES), the processing after step S2307 is not executed. As a result, even if it is the second section SC2, if it is the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the direct lottery process of step S2309 and the transition lottery process of step S2312 are not executed.

If the current gaming state is neither the first CB state ST2 nor the second CB state ST3 (step S2306: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter of the main side RAM 74 is "3". , determines whether or not the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2307). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2307: NO), the processes after step S2308 are not executed. As a result, the direct lottery process of step S2309 and the transition process of step S2312 are not executed in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2307: YES), it is determined whether or not any of the index values IV = 5 to 10 has been won in the lottery process for the current combination (Fig. 16). (step S2308). If the determination in step S2308 is affirmative, direct lottery processing is executed (step S2309). In the direct hit lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the direct hit lottery in the ART state ST6 is selected.

FIG. 51(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6 in the direct hit lottery process in step S2309. As shown in FIG. 51(a), in the hand lottery process (FIG. 16) in this game, if the index value IV=5 is won, there is a 4% chance that the ART state ST6 will be won directly. If the index value IV=6 is won, the ART state ST6 is won directly with a probability of 1%, and if the index value IV=7 is won, the ART state ST6 is won directly with a probability of 1%. Therefore, if the index value IV = 8 is won, there is a 3% probability that the ART state ST6 will be won directly, and if the index value IV = 9 is won, the ART state ST6 will be won with a 2% probability. It is a direct hit win, and if the index value IV=10 is won, the direct hit win in the ART state ST6 has a probability of 1%. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

Here, in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806) executed when shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2 in the first control processing (FIG. 42) of the game section, the setting of "1" to "6" Even if the index value IV=7 or 10 where the winning probability fluctuates in the value is won, the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win in the ART state ST6. On the other hand, in the direct hit lottery process (step S2309) executed in the game started in the second section SC2 in the advantageous lottery process (FIG. 50) at the start of the game, "1" to "6" Even if the player wins at the index value IV=7 or 10 where the winning probability fluctuates at the setting value of , it is possible to win the direct hit in the ART state ST6 in the direct lottery process. As a result, regarding the probability of winning a direct hit in the ART state ST6, in the situation of shifting from the first section SC1 to the second section SC2, the set values of "1" to "6" do not give rise to advantages or disadvantages. is possible, and in the game executed after shifting to the second section SC2, it is possible to generate an advantage or a disadvantage according to the setting values "1" to "6".

If the direct hit lottery process results in a direct hit win in ART state ST6 (step S2310: YES), the transition determination flag for ART state ST6 provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2311). The transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed. When the transition confirmation flag of ART state ST6 is set to "1", a process is executed to shift the game state to ART state ST6 when the current game ends.

If the direct hit lottery process does not result in a direct hit win in the ART state ST6 (step S2310: NO), the shift lottery process is executed (step S2312). In the transition lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not to transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

FIG. 51(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the transition lottery process of step S2312. As shown in FIG. 51(b), in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the role in the current game, if the index value IV=5 is won, there is a 50% chance that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 will be entered. , when the index value IV=6 is won, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won with a probability of 20%, and when the index value IV=7 is won, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won with a probability of 10%. If the index value IV=8 is won, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won with a probability of 40%, and if the index value IV=9 is won, the probability is 30%. A transition win to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won, and if the index value IV=10 is won, a transition win to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is obtained with a probability of 20%. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

If the transfer lottery process results in a transition win for the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2313: YES), the transition confirmation flag for the pseudo-bonus state ST5 provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2314). The transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 whether or not the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. When "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, a process for shifting the game state to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed when the current game ends.

Next, normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is executed at step S905 in the corresponding process (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the normal processing also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from rotating in one game. executed later.

If the second section flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the current game section is the second section SC2 (step S2401: YES), the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". is set (step S2402). In the direct hit lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309) at the start of the current game, if the direct hit lottery to the ART state ST6 is won, "1" is set to the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6.

If "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 (step S2402: YES), "1" is set in the ART state flag provided in the main RAM 74 (step S2403). The ART state flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that it is either the state before transition to the ART state ST6 or the ART state ST6. Also, the transition confirmation flag of ART state ST6 in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2404). Also, the preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2405). The ready state flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is in the ready state ST4. When both the ready state flag and the ART state flag are set to "1", the main MPU 72 can specify that the state is the ready state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6. In this situation, when the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode, the preparation state flag is cleared to "0", so that the preparation state flag is "0" and the ART state flag is "1". Therefore, the main MPU 72 can identify that the state has shifted to the ART state ST6. In addition, a preparation start command for ART indicating that the state has changed to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2406). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6.

After that, it is determined whether or not the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2407). As already described, the lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display section 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2. If the lighting standby flag is set to "1" (step S2407: YES), the lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S2408). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that the current section is the second section SC2. Note that the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0" when the process of step S2408 is executed.

As described above, when the transition to the preparation state ST4 occurs while the lighting standby flag is set to "1", the interval display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. The ready state ST4 is a gaming state in which the net increase expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media given in one game") can be 1 or more. is. In other words, although the section display section 67 can be maintained in the off state even after transitioning to the second section SC2, it is surely turned on when the game state shifts to a game state in which the expected value of the net increase in game media can be 1 or more. . As a result, in a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is in question.

When a negative determination is made in step S2402, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the main RAM 74 (step S2409). In the transition lottery process (step S2312) at the start of the current game, when the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is won, the transition confirmation flag of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is set to "1".

If a negative determination is made in step S2409, it is determined whether or not the value of the bet number setting counter of the main side RAM 74 is "3", thereby determining whether the bet number for this game is "3". is determined (step S2410). If the number of bets for the current game is "2" (step S2410: NO), the processes after step S2411 are not executed. As a result, the process of subtracting 1 from the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e in step S2411 is not executed in the game in which the number of bets is "2" even in the second section SC2. That is, even if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed in the normal game state ST1 of the second section SC2, the remaining unlocked game number (that is, the number of ceiling games) is not reduced, and the bet number is " 3” is executed, the number of remaining unlocked games (that is, the number of ceiling games) is reduced.

If the number of bets for the current game is "3" (step S2410: YES), the value of the canceled game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2411). As a result, the number of remaining unlocked games (that is, the ceiling number of games) is reduced by one game, and the maximum number of remaining games required before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is reduced by one game. After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2412).

In the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the normal processing (step S905) is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S902 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26). Therefore, when the normal game state ST1 is shifted to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the normal game state ST1 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games completed in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is It is not treated as the completion of the remaining number of unlocked games in the normal game state ST1. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the normal game state ST1 is resumed while the lottery mode remains the normal mode.

If the value of the number-of-released-games counter 74e is "0" (step S2412: YES), it means that the number of remaining games to be released before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is zero. In this case, the pseudo-bonus state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2413). The pseudo-bonus state flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify either the state before transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Also, the preparation state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2414). When both the ready state flag and the pseudo-bonus state flag are set to "1", the main MPU 72 can specify that the state is the ready state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. When the lottery mode shifts from the 1st RT mode to the 2nd RT mode in this situation, the ready state flag is cleared to "0" and the pseudo bonus state flag is set to "1" by clearing the ready state flag to "0". Since it becomes a situation, the main side MPU 72 can specify that it has transitioned to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In addition, a pseudo bonus preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5 is entered is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2415). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo bonus state ST5.

After that, it is determined whether or not the lighting standby flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2416). As already described, the lighting standby flag is a flag for specifying in the main MPU 72 that switching of the section display portion 67 from the off state to the lighting state is waiting in the second section SC2. If the lighting standby flag is set to "1" (step S2416: YES), lighting processing of the section display section 67 is executed (step S2417). In the lighting process of the section display section 67, the section display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, the section display unit 67 starts to notify that it is the second section SC2. Note that the lighting standby flag is cleared to "0" when the process of step S2417 is executed.

As described above, when the transition to the preparation state ST4 occurs while the lighting standby flag is set to "1", the interval display section 67 is switched from the off state to the on state. The ready state ST4 is a gaming state in which the net increase expected value of game media in one game (the value obtained by subtracting the "number of game media betted in one game" from the "expected number of game media given in one game") can be 1 or more. is. In other words, although the section display section 67 can be maintained in the off state even after transitioning to the second section SC2, it is surely turned on when the game state shifts to a game state in which the expected value of the net increase in game media can be 1 or more. . As a result, in a game state in which the net increase expected value of game media can be 1 or more, it is possible to notify the manager of the game hall or the like that the game state is in question.

On the other hand, if the pseudo-bonus state transition confirmation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2409: YES), after the pseudo-bonus state transition confirmation flag is cleared to "0" (step S2418), The processing of steps S2413 to S2417 already explained is executed. As a result, the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is entered, and the corresponding performance is started. Further, when switching from the off state to the on state in the interval display portion 67 is on standby, the interval display portion 67 is switched from the off state to the on state.

Next, the stop order notification control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The stop order notification control process is performed after the win/loss determination is completed in the win lottery process (FIG. 16) and after the first control process (step S711) of the game section. executed.

If the current game state is one of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 (step S2501: YES), an advantageous state notification control process is executed (step S2502). In the notification control process for the advantageous state, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that enable establishment of the first bell prize if any of the index values IV = 1 to 3, 5 are won in the current game. The stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the dual-use display unit 66, and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the first bell prize is notified by the image display device 63. A command for making it so is transmitted to the production side MPU 92.例文帳に追加

In the notification control process for the advantageous state, the reels 32L, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32L, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M, 32M The stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which enables establishment of the first RT replay prize, is notified by image display device 63 while the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32R is displayed on shared display unit 66. A command for making it so is transmitted to the production side MPU 92.例文帳に追加In the notification control process for the advantageous state, reels 32L and 32M that enable establishment of the 2nd RT replay prize if any of the index values IV=11 to 16 in the first mode is won in this game. , 32R are displayed on the combined display unit 66, and the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables establishment of the second RT replay winning prize. A command is sent to the production side MPU 92 to make it possible.

In the notification control process for the advantageous state, the reel 32L that makes it possible to avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning if any of the index values IV = 17 to 22 in the first RT mode is won in the current game. , 32M and 32R are displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R that makes it possible to avoid establishment of the first falling replay winning prize is displayed on the image display device. At 63, a command for notification is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92. In the notification control process for the advantageous state, on the condition that the gaming state is either the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, the index value IV in the second RT mode in the current game is set to any one of 11 to 16. When winning, a display corresponding to the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can avoid the establishment of the second fall replay is performed on the combined display part 66, and the second fall replay is performed. A command for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid establishment of a prize is sent to the effect side MPU 92 by the image display device 63. - 特許庁

If a negative determination is made in step S2501, it is determined whether or not the index value IV=5 has been won in the current game (step S2503). In the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the index value IV=5 will not result in winning, so the case where the negative determination is made in step S2501 and the case where the affirmative determination is made in step S2503 is normal. It becomes game state ST1.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2503, it is determined whether or not the ART state transition determination flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2504). As already explained, the ART state transition confirmation flag is the first control process (FIG. 42) of the game section executed before the stop order notification control process is executed in the current game, or the advantageous lottery process at the start of the game. This flag is set to "1" by winning a direct hit to the ART state ST6 in the direct hit lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309) in (FIG. 50). Then, in the direct lottery process (step S1806 or step S2309), when the index value IV=5 is won, the direct hit lottery to the ART state ST6 is made with a probability of 4%.

If the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is set to "1" (step S2504: YES), display data setting processing for left first stop is executed (step S2505). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. FIG. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, the left first stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2506). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the left first stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to start the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

On the other hand, if the transition confirmation flag of the ART state ST6 is not set to "1" (step S2504: NO), display data setting processing for the right first stop is executed (step S2507). As a result, a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary is started on the combined display section 66. FIG. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

After that, the right first stop command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2508). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the right first stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to start the display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

54(a) and 54(b), the effect of executing the processing of steps S2503 to S2508 will be described. FIG. 54(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state in which it is notified that the first stop is the left reel 32L when the winning is made with the index value IV=5, and FIG. 54(b). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state in which it is notified that the first stop is the right reel 32R when the winning is made with the index value IV=5.

As already explained, the first bell winning data and the second bell winning data are set for the index value IV=5. When the index value IV=5 is won and the left reel 32L is stopped as the first stop, the second bell win is established regardless of the rest of the stop order. In this case, the winning of the second bell is established without fail regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44. Also, when the index value IV=5 is won, if the middle reel 32M or the right reel 32R is stopped as the first stop, the first bell win is established regardless of the rest of the stop order. In this case, the winning of the first bell is established without fail regardless of the stop operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42-44.

When the processes of steps S2505 and S2506 are executed in the stop order notification control process (FIG. 53), the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest are arbitrary in the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. 54(a1). As shown in FIG. 54(a2), the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R in the order according to the notification, the second bell winning is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 54(a3).

When the processes of steps S2507 and S2508 are executed in the stop order notification control process (FIG. 53), the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary in the image display device 63 as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 54(b2), the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. Then, by stopping the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the order according to the notification, the first bell winning is established on the main line ML as shown in FIG. 54(b3).

The processing of steps S2505 and S2506 is executed when the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed, and the processing of steps S2507 and S2508 is executed when the transition to the ART state ST6 is executed. This is the case when migration is not confirmed. In this case, when the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed based on the winning index value IV=5, the second bell winning is established, and the ART state 6 of the winning index value IV=5. When the transition to the first bell is not confirmed, the winning of the first bell is established. Then, the second bell winning prize is not established when the index value IV=5 is not won. As a result, it is possible to inform the player that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed based on the winning of the index value IV=5 by the establishment of the second bell prize on the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. .

On the other hand, the winning of the first bell can be established even when the index value IV=5 is not won. If the winning index value IV=5 is not confirmed to shift to the ART state 6, the winning of the first bell is established. It is possible to make it inconspicuous to the player when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not confirmed to shift to ST6.

In particular, in the case where the index value IV=5 is won but the transition to the ART state 6 is not confirmed, the image display device 63 corresponds to the stop order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest are arbitrary. Not only is the display shown in FIG. If the display corresponding to the stopping order in which the first stop is the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary in the dual-purpose display section 66, the display content of the dual-purpose display section 66 indicates that the index value IV=5 is won. Although it may be assumed that the transition to ART state 6 was not confirmed, as described above, even in the combined display unit 66, the first stop corresponds to the right reel 32R and the rest is arbitrary. By displaying, it is possible to prevent such an analogy from being made.

The number of given game media is “11” regardless of whether the first bell win is established or the second bell win is established. Therefore, when the index value IV = 5 is won, the types of prizes to be promoted to be established are different by changing the notification mode of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R depending on whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed. Even if it is allowed to do so, the profit related to the provision of game media does not change. In this case, notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R does not directly benefit the player. It is optional to have or not.

Returning to the description of the stop order notification control process (FIG. 53), if a negative determination is made in step S2503, if the process of step S2506 is executed, or if the process of step S2508 is executed, the index value It is determined whether or not IV=4 is won (step S2509). In addition, in the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3, the index value IV=4 will not win the lottery. It becomes game state ST1.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2509, on condition that the second interval flag is set to "1" (step S2510: YES), the pushing order generation lottery process is executed (step S2511). In the pressing order generation lottery process, there is a 25% probability that the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is selected not to be notified, and a 25% probability that the first stop is the left reel 32L and the rest is arbitrary. with a 25% probability that the first stop is the middle reel 32M and the rest is optional, and a 25% probability that the first stop is the right reel 32R. It may be chosen to report a stop order that is rest-arbitrary.

If notification of any stop order is selected in the push order generation lottery process (step S2512: YES), display corresponding to the selected stop order is started on the combined display unit 66 (step S2513). ). The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated. Also, a stop command corresponding to the selected stop order is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 (step S2514). When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the stop command, it causes the image display device 63 to perform display corresponding to the selected stop order. The display is started before the operation to stop the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes effective, and when a stop command is issued to all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game in which the display is executed, is terminated.

As already explained, only the winning data of the first bell is set to the index value IV=4. The first bell winning is established even when the buttons 42 to 44 are operated at any stop operation timing. In this case, if a winner is won with the index value IV=4, and one of the stop orders is selected in the push order generation lottery process (step S2511), the selected stop order will be The information is notified by the image display device 63 and the combined display unit 66 . Thus, not only when the index value IV=5 is won in the normal game state ST1, but also when the index value IV=4 is won, the first bell is won after the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is notified. It is possible to create a situation in which

The stop order also includes a stop order that is notified when the player wins the index value IV=5 but the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed. As a result, even if a situation occurs in which the first bell prize is established after the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified in the normal game state ST1, the win is made with the index value IV=5, but the ART state ST6. It is possible to prevent the player from identifying whether or not the transition to .

In particular, when the winning order of the index value IV=4 is notified by the image display device 63 of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R, the display corresponding to the stop order is also performed on the combined display unit 66. will be If the display corresponding to the stop order is not performed on the dual-purpose display unit 66, there is a risk that it may be inferred from the display content of the dual-purpose display unit 66 that the player has won the index value IV=4. As described above, by displaying a display corresponding to the stop order on the combined display unit 66 as well, it is possible to prevent such an analogy from occurring.

When the index value IV=4 is won, regardless of whether or not the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the first bell win is established. Therefore, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in different manners when winning with the index value IV=4, the profit associated with the awarding of game media does not change. In this case, notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R does not directly benefit the player. It is optional to have or not.

<Regarding the preparation state ST4>
Next, the processing contents in the preparation state ST4 will be explained.

In the preparation state ST4, the preparation state processing is executed at step S906 in the corresponding processing (FIG. 26) at the end of the game. Here, as already explained, the preparation state ST4 includes the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6.

In the preparation state processing in the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the preparation state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" when the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. , the value of the ready state flag of the main side RAM 74 is "0" and the pseudo bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". Also, the pseudo-bonus continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "39", which is the value corresponding to the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Also, a pseudo-bonus start command indicating that the state has shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is transmitted to the effect-side MPU 92 . As a result, an effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started.

In the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, if any of the index values IV = 5 to 10 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 16), the number of games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is increased. Whether or not to increase the number may be determined by lottery, and when the number of games to be increased is determined by lottery, the determined number of games may be added to the number of initial continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

In the preparation state processing in the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6, the preparation state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" when the lottery mode shifts from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. , the value of the ready state flag of the main RAM 74 is "0" and the ART state flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". In addition, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "10" corresponding to the number of games to be continued during the start period of the ART state ST6, which will be described later, and the main MPU 72 is informed that it is the start period of the ART state ST6. A start period flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to specify the period. Also, an ART state start command indicating that the game has transitioned to the ART state ST6 is transmitted to the MPU 92 on the effect side. Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the ART state ST6.

In addition, in the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the ART state ST6, if any of the index values IV = 5 to 10 is won in the winning lottery process (Fig. 16), the number of continuous games during the start period in the ART state ST6 It may be decided by lottery whether or not to increase the number of games, and when it is decided by lottery to increase the number of games, the determined number of games is added to the number of initial continuous games in the start period in the ART state ST6.

<Regarding Pseudo-Bonus State ST5>
Next, the details of processing in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 will be described. FIG. 55(a) is a flow chart showing a pseudo-bonus process executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The pseudo-bonus processing at the start of the game is executed in step S2303 in the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (FIG. 50), and the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is determined in the winning lottery processing (FIG. 16). It is executed in step S710 which is a process executed after completion and before the first control process (step S711) of the game section.

If any of the index values IV = 5 to 10 is won in the lottery process (Fig. 16) for the current role (step S2601: YES), the transition confirmation flag provided in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not it is set (step S2602). The transition confirmation flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current pseudo-bonus state ST5. If the transition determination flag is not set to "1" (step S2602: NO), the transition lottery process for ART state ST6 is executed (step S2603). In the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST6, it is determined by lottery whether or not to transition to the ART state ST6 after the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends.

FIG. 55(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST6 in the lottery process for transition to ART state ST6 in step S2603. As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the hand lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game, if the index value IV=5 is won, there is a 50% chance that the ART state ST6 transition will be won. If the index value IV=6 is won, the transition to the ART state ST6 is won with a probability of 20%, and if the index value IV=7 is won, the transition to the ART state ST6 is won with a probability of 10%. Thus, if the index value IV=8 is won, there is a 40% probability that the ART state ST6 transition will be won, and if the index value IV=9 is won, the ART state ST6 will be won with a 30% probability. If the player wins for transition, and if the index value IV=10 is won, the player wins for transition to ART state ST6 with a probability of 20%. In this case, an index value IV with a lower probability of winning in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) has a higher probability of winning a transition to the ART state ST6. As a result, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

When the transition to ART state ST6 is won in the transition lottery process for ART state ST6 (step S2604: YES), the transition determination flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2605). After that, a transition determination command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been won is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2606). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the determination of the transition to the ART state ST6.

Next, the pseudo-bonus processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The pseudo-bonus processing is executed at step S907 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26). As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the pseudo-bonus processing also stops all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from rotating in one game. is executed after

First, the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is subtracted by 1 (step S2701). As already explained, the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is a counter for specifying the number of remaining games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 by the main side MPU 72, and the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is set when transitioning from the preparation state ST4 to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. is set to "39".

When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is established, the pseudo bonus process (step S907) is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S902 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 26). Therefore, if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is shifted to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 during the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games played in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is It is not treated as the number of games played in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is resumed while the lottery mode remains the normal mode without shifting to the preparation state ST4.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter after subtracting 1 is "0" (step S2702). That is, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is 0 games. If the value of the pseudo-bonus continuation counter is "0" (step S2702: YES), the present pseudo-bonus state ST5 is determined by determining whether or not "1" is set in the transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74. determines whether or not the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed (step S2703).

If the transition confirmation flag is set to "1" (step S2703: YES), the ART state ST6 start setting process is executed (step S2704). In the start setting process, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "10", which is a value corresponding to the number of games to be played during the start period of the ART state ST6, which will be described later, and the start period of the ART state ST6 is set. A start period flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" for identification by the main MPU 72 . Thereafter, an ART state start command indicating that the game has transitioned to the ART state ST6 is transmitted to the production side MPU 92 (step S2705). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the ART state ST6. After that, the transition confirmation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2706).

On the other hand, if the transition confirmation flag is not set to "1" (step S2703: NO), advantageous end processing is executed (step S2707). FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing advantageous end processing. First, an advantageous end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2801). The advantageous end command is a command sent to the effect-side MPU 92 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the advantageous end command in the situation of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. to

After that, it is determined whether or not the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2802). The heaven preparation flag is the state after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed in B mode, or the first pseudo-bonus state. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is after the ART state ST6 is ended when the transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred after ST5 is ended. When the second section SC2 of the B mode is started, the heaven preparation flag is set to "1", and the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is entered after the second section SC2 of the B mode is started. until the ART state ST6 that started before the execution of the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, or the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. If there is, the state in which the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" is maintained until the ART state ST6 ends. On the other hand, when the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends in the second section SC2 which is the B mode, when the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, or when the first When the transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred after the pseudo bonus state ST5 is completed, when the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 when the ART state ST6 is completed, Heaven The ready flag is cleared to "0".

If the heaven preparation flag is not set to "1" (step S2802: NO), the processing for setting the end preparation state ST7 is executed (step S2803). In the setting process, if the current gaming state is the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST7 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST7. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7.

If the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" (step S2802: YES), "80" is set to the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2805). As already explained, the unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. At step S2805, "80" is set to the number-of-released-games counter 74e, so that 80 games are required until the transition to the next pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed in the B mode. Thereafter, game state setting processing is executed (step S2806). In the setting process, if the current game state is the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the pseudo-bonus state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Also, the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2807).

FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the pseudo-bonus effect control process executed by the effect side MPU 92. As shown in FIG. The effect control process for the pseudo bonus is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

First, it is determined whether or not the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2901). When the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S2901: YES), the processing after step S2902 is not executed. This makes it possible to give priority to execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2.

If the ending effect of the second section SC2 is not being executed (step S2901: NO), the process after step S2902 is executed. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not a pseudo-bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2902). When the pseudo bonus start command is received (step S2902: YES), the effect setting process at the start is executed (step S2903). In the effect setting process at the start, a pseudo-bonus effect table enabling the execution of the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is read from the effect-side ROM 93 and stored in the effect-side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the pseudo-bonus effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the effect corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

The pseudo-bonus effect table stored in the effect-side RAM 94 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started contains instructions for executing an effect corresponding to the fact that the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Data is set. When the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 by referring to the pseudo-bonus performance table as it is. is executed. On the other hand, when the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the data for finally executing the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 will occur is included in the effect. It is set for the pseudo-bonus effect table stored in the side RAM 94 .

When a game start command indicating that one game has newly started is received from the main MPU 72 in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2904: YES), an effect update process is executed (step S2905). As a result, the data group to be referred to in the pseudo-bonus effect table already read out to the effect-side RAM 94 in the previous step S2903 is changed with the start of a new game, corresponding to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The content of the presentation to be performed is updated with the start of a new game.

In the pseudo-bonus state ST5, when a transition confirmation command indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 in the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed is received from the main MPU 72 (step S2906: YES), the lottery process for executing the resurrection effect is executed. (step S2907). The resurrection effect means that after the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur when the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, all the reels 32L, 32M, This is an effect in which a display effect indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs when an ART state start command is received from the main MPU 72 after the rotation of 32R has stopped is executed. In the resurrection performance execution lottery process, the execution winning of the resurrection performance has a probability of 20%.

When execution winning of resurrection effect is not achieved (step S2908: NO), setting processing of normal transition effect is executed (step S2909). In the normal transition effect setting process, a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command is executed, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed from the current game. A display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is executed over the final game, and a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs when the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started. is set for the pseudo-bonus effect table stored in the effect-side RAM 94 . As a result, the image display device 63 executes a display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command. A display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is executed over the final game of ST5, and a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs when the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started. A display effect indicating that is executed. In addition, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 execute effects corresponding to these display effects.

When execution of the resurrection effect is won (step S2908: YES), setting processing of the resurrection effect is executed (step S2910). In the resurrection effect setting process, after the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur when the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, all the reels 32L and 32M are displayed in the final game. , 32R has stopped rotating, data for executing a display effect indicating that a transition to the ART state ST6 occurs when an ART state start command is received from the main MPU 72 is provided by the effect side. It is set for the pseudo bonus effect table stored in the RAM 94 . As a result, the image display device 63 does not execute the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 has been confirmed in the current game that triggered the transmission of the transition confirmation command, and the pseudo state is not executed from the current game. A display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed throughout the final game of the bonus state ST5, and furthermore, when the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, the ART state ST6 is displayed. After the display effect indicating that the transition to ART state ST6 does not occur, after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has stopped in the final game, the display effect indicates that the transition to ART state ST6 will occur. is executed. In addition, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 execute effects corresponding to these display effects.

When the ART state start command is received in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2911: YES), when it is determined that the resurrection effect is to be executed in the present pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2912: YES), resurrection An effect execution process is executed (step S2913). In the resurrection performance execution processing, the data to be referred to in the pseudo-bonus performance table stored in the performance side RAM 94 is changed to a data group corresponding to the execution of the resurrection performance. As a result, in the image display device 63, the display effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6, which was started in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, does not occur is terminated, and the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. is started. In addition, the upper lamp 61 and the speaker 62 execute effects corresponding to these display effects.

When an advantageous end command is received in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 (step S2914: YES), end effect setting processing is executed (step S2915). In the end effect setting process, a table for executing an effect indicating that the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 is read out from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. Let As a result, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute an effect indicating that the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 is over and the game is shifted to the normal game state ST1. This effect is continued until the completion preparation state ST7 is terminated and the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

Next, how the pseudo-bonus state ST5 progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 59(a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 59(b) shows the period during which the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and FIG. 59(c) shows the period during which the normal game state ST1. (d) shows the period of the ART state ST6, and FIG. 59(e) shows the period during which the end effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transition to the ART state ST6 is executed, FIG. 59(f) shows the period during which the resurrection effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 will occur, FIG. 59(g) shows the period of the end preparation state ST7, and FIG. 59(h) It indicates the period during which the interval display section 67 is in the lighting state.

First, a case will be described in which the revival effect is executed while shifting to the ART state ST6 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends.

At the timing t1, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has already been set when the previous game ends. In addition, since the section display section 67 is in the lighting state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, even at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. The section display section 67 is in a lighting state.

After that, at the timing of t2, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 as shown in FIG. 59(a). This game is the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In the present pseudo-bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed in the middle of the state, and it is decided that the resurrection effect will be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59(e), at the timing of t2, which is the timing at which the current game is started, an ending effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6 occurs. be started. FIG. 60(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution contents of the ending effect in the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 60(a), in the end effect, an end image G31 is displayed indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transition to the ART state ST6.

After that, at timing t3, which is the end timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the end effect is ended as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 59(f), the resurrection effect is started. FIG. 60(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of execution of the resurrection effect in the image display device 63. FIG. As shown in FIG. 60(b), in the resurrection effect, a resurrection image G32 is displayed that indicates that the transition to the ART state ST6 will occur rather than that the transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur. As a result, it is possible to make the player, who has recognized that the transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur due to the end effect, recognize that the transition to the ART state ST6 will actually occur. The resurrection effect started at the timing of t3 is continued until the next game start timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 59(f).

Also, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIGS. 59(b) and 59(d), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and the ART state ST6 starts. In addition, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state as shown in FIG. 59(h) during all the above periods.

Next, the case where the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the B mode will be described.

At the timing of t5, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has already been set when the previous game is ended. In addition, since the section display section 67 is in the lighting state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, even at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. The section display section 67 is in a lighting state.

Thereafter, at time t6, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 as shown in FIG. 59(a). This game is the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In this pseudo-bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59(e), at the timing of t6, which is the timing at which the current game is started, an ending effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6 occurs. be started. After that, at timing t7, which is the end timing after the rotation of all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has stopped, the end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 59(e).

In addition, since this time is a case where the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the B mode, the second section SC2 will not end even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. . Therefore, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIGS. 59(b) and 59(c), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends and the normal game state ST1 is started without transitioning to the end preparation state ST7. In addition, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state as shown in FIG. 59(h) during all the above periods. After that, at the timing of t8, the first game after shifting to the normal game state ST1 is started as shown in FIG. 59(a).

Next, the case where the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the A mode will be described.

At the timing of t9, the first game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed as shown in FIG. 59(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the pseudo-bonus state ST5 has already been set when the previous game ends. In addition, since the interval display section 67 is in the lighting state at least at the timing when the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is started, even at the timing t9 as shown in FIG. The section display section 67 is in a lighting state.

After that, at the timing of t10, a new game is started in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 as shown in FIG. 59(a). This game is the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. In this pseudo-bonus state ST5, the transition to the ART state ST6 is not confirmed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59(e), at the timing of t10, which is the timing at which the current game is started, an ending effect indicating that the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6 occurs. be started. After that, at timing t11, which is the end timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the end effect is ended as shown in FIG. 59(e).

Also, this time, since the transition to the ART state ST6 does not occur in the pseudo bonus state ST5 in the second section SC2 of the A mode, as shown in FIGS. After the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is terminated, the game shifts to the end preparation state ST7. After that, in the end preparation state ST7, the game is executed from timing t12 to timing t13 as shown in FIG. 59(a). Then, at the timing of t13 when the game ends, as shown in FIGS. 59(c) and 59(g), the end preparation state ST7 ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. Also, at the timing of t13, as shown in FIG. 59(h), the section display section 67 switches from the lit state to the extinguished state. After that, at the timing of t14, as shown in FIG. 59(a), the first game after shifting to the normal game state ST1 is started.

At the timing of t11, an effect is started indicating that the current pseudo-bonus state ST5 is over and the game is shifted to the normal game state ST1. This effect is continued until the timing of t13, which is the timing at which the end preparation state ST7 ends.

Even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without confirming the transition to the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 of the A mode as described above, one game end preparation state is reached after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. Since ST7 is reached and the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighted state in the end preparation state ST7, it is the timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. However, the interval display section 67 is lit. Thus, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the situation where the effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed, the section is displayed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped. Even if the part 67 is confirmed, it cannot be specified that the transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur. Therefore, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in a situation where the effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed, the resurrection effect is performed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped. It is possible to make the player expect that the process will be executed, and it is possible to maintain the expectation that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed.

<Regarding ART state ST6>
Next, the ART state ST6 will be explained. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the ART state ST6. The ART state ST6 includes a start period ST11, a first unit execution time ST12, and a second unit execution time ST13.

The start period ST11 is a game state that occurs when the ART state ST6 is newly started. The start period ST11 continues over 10 games. In the start period ST11, the point lottery process is executed based on the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, and the points selected in the point lottery process are added. Then, when the start period ST11 ends, based on the total points acquired in the current start period ST11, the stock number of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 occurring after the end of the start period ST11 and the first unit execution At time ST12, the type of continuation rate mode that determines the continuation rate when the continuation lottery process is executed is determined. As types of the continuation rate modes, a first continuation mode with a continuation rate of 50%, a second continuation mode with a continuation rate of 60%, a third continuation mode with a continuation rate of 70%, and a continuation rate of There is a fourth continuous mode which is 80%.

The first unit execution time ST12 is a game state that occurs after the start period ST11 ends in the ART state ST6. The initial number of games in the first unit execution ST12 is any one of 29 games to 32 games. Further, when the additional condition for the number of continued games of the first unit execution time ST12 is satisfied, the additional game number determined when the additional condition is satisfied when the first unit execution time ST12 is started is the initial game. Add to numbers. When a new execution round of the first unit execution round ST12 is started, the initial game number of the execution round is first notified in the start game of the execution round, and if the additional condition is satisfied, then , the number of additional games determined when the additional condition is satisfied is notified. After these notifications are made, the total number of continued games in the current run is displayed, and the display of the number of continued games is continued. In this case, every time one game is completed, the display of the number of continued games is decremented by one.

In the first unit execution time ST12, the continuation rate increase lottery process is executed based on the result of the role lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game, and the continuation rate increase lottery process results in an increased winning, and the continuation lottery process. is promoted to persistence mode, where the persistence of is higher than before. When the number of remaining continuous games of the first unit execution times ST12 is 0 games, if the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 is 1 or more, the stock number is decremented by 1, and then the first unit execution times ST12. A new run of is started. On the other hand, when the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 is "0", the continuation lottery process is executed with the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate mode at that time. Then, when the continuous lottery process wins the continuous lottery, new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started, and when the continuous lottery process does not win the continuous lottery, the ART state ST6 ends. do.

The second unit execution times ST13 is a game state that occurs when the conditions for continuing the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are met after the first unit execution times ST12 has been executed 12 times. That is, the 1st to 12th unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the ART state ST6 are the first unit execution times ST12, and the 13th and subsequent unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are the second unit execution times ST13. The initial number of games of the second unit execution ST13 is any one of 29 games to 32 games. Unlike the first unit execution time ST12, the number of continuous games is not increased in the second unit execution time ST13. Further, since the stock numbers of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 determined in the start period ST11 are 6 or less, the stock number does not remain in the second unit execution time ST13.

When the number of remaining continuous games in the second unit execution ST13 is 0, continuous lottery processing is executed with a specific continuous rate. The specific continuation rate is a continuation rate equal to or higher than the continuation rate corresponding to the continuation rate mode having the highest continuation rate among the continuation rate modes in the first unit execution times ST12, specifically, the first unit execution times ST12. is 80%, the specific continuation rate in the second unit execution times ST13 is set to 90%, which is higher than the continuation rate. As a result, the second unit execution time ST13 is more likely to be continuously won in the continuous lottery process than the first unit execution time ST12. When the winning is continued in the continuous lottery process, a new execution round of the second unit execution time ST13 is started, and when the continuous winning is not won in the continuous lottery process, the ART state ST6 ends.

Next, distribution of the number of games in the ART state ST6 will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the number of games is apportioned in the ART state ST6.

As already explained, in the second section SC2, the upper limit number of games (specifically 1500 games) and the upper limit net increase number (specifically 2400 games) are set. Even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 is in progress, these game states are ended in the middle due to the forcible end of the second section SC2. In addition, the second section SC2 has stay modes of A mode to C mode, and the number of games played after the start of the second section SC2 reaches the number of ceiling games in any of the stay modes. As a result, the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. In this case, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is the case where the A mode is set in the second section SC2, and the minimum value is required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. "A" in FIG. 62 shows the relationship between the number of ceiling games, the maximum number of games to be continued in the preparation state ST4 to which the ceiling game number is reached, and the number of games to be continued in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. That's 691 games.

The ART state ST6 has a start period ST11, a first unit execution time ST12, and a second unit execution time ST13, as already described. The number of continuous games in the start period ST11 is 10 games as indicated by "B" in FIG. The initial number of games for the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 29 games to 32 games as indicated by "C" in FIG. 348 games to 384 games, as indicated by "D" in . Further, although the number of continuous games may be added in the first unit execution time ST12, the maximum number of games that can be added in the first unit execution time ST12 is 170 games as indicated by "E" in FIG. It has become. That is, the first unit execution time ST12 is executed a maximum of 12 times as described above, and the maximum number of games that can be added within the range of the maximum 12 times is 170 games. The maximum number of games of the total number of games of "B", "D" and "E" is 564 games as indicated by "F" in FIG.

The 564 games of "F" are fewer than the 691 games of "A", which is the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6. The difference between "A" and "F" is 127 games as indicated by "G" in FIG. As a result, when the maximum number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is 691 games, which is the assumed minimum value, the first unit execution time ST12 is executed 12 times and the first unit execution time ST12 is executed. Even if the total number of additional games that have occurred in a situation where the number of games is 170, which is the maximum number of games, it is possible to leave room for a plurality of occurrences of the second unit execution times ST13. Specifically, it is possible to leave room for the second unit execution times ST13 to occur at least three times. Therefore, when the transition to the first ART state ST6 occurs in the second section SC2, regardless of the game content in the second section SC2 until the start of the ART state ST6, the second unit It is possible to create a situation where the continuation lottery process for determining whether or not to continue the execution time ST13 is executed at a specific continuation rate, which is the highest continuation rate.

Next, the processing contents in the ART state ST6 will be explained. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing ART processing executed by the main MPU 72 at the start of the game. The ART processing at the start of the game is executed in step S2305 in the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game (FIG. 50), and the advantageous lottery processing at the start of the game is completed in the winning lottery processing (FIG. 16). After that, it is executed in step S710, which is a process executed before the first control process (step S711) of the game section.

If the current situation is the start period ST11 (step S3001: YES), a point lottery process is executed (step S3002). In the point lottery process, one of points "1" to "3" is selected by lottery. In this case, the point lottery process is carried out so that the expected value of the selected points is greater for those who have won the index value IV with the lower winning probability in the lottery process (FIG. 16) for the role in the current game. executed. Then, the points selected by the point lottery process are added to the point counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3003). The points counter is a counter for specifying the total points acquired in the start period ST11 by the main side MPU 72 . The point counter is cleared to "0" when the ART state ST6 is newly started.

Thereafter, by referring to the value of the ART continuation counter in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game of the start period ST11 (step S3004). If it is the final game of the start period (step S3004: YES), the stock number corresponding to the point counter value of the main RAM 74 is specified, and the stock number is set in the stock number counter provided in the main RAM 74. (Step S3005). The stock number counter is a counter for specifying the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 in the main MPU 72 . The maximum stock number that can be selected in step S3005 is "6", and if the value of the point counter is any of "13 to 15", "1" is selected as the stock number and the stock number counter is set to "1", and the value of the point counter is one of "16 to 18", "2" is selected as the stock number and the stock number counter is set to "2". If the value of the counter is one of "19 to 21", "3" is selected as the stock number, "3" is set in the stock number counter, and the value of the point counter is "22 to 24". If either, "4" is selected as the stock number and "4" is set in the stock number counter, and if the value of the point counter is any of "25 to 27", the stock number "5" is selected and "5" is set in the stock number counter, and when the value of the point counter is 28 or more, "6" is selected as the stock number and "6" is set in the stock number counter. be done.

After that, the continuation mode corresponding to the value of the point counter in the main RAM 74 is specified, and the value corresponding to the continuation mode is set in the continuation mode counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3006). The continuation mode counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the continuation rate in the case where the continuation lottery process is executed when the first unit execution times ST12 ends. Specifically, when the value of the point counter is any of "10 to 15", "1" corresponding to the first continuation mode with a continuation rate of 50% is set in the continuation mode counter. If the value of the counter for points is any one of "16 to 20", "2" corresponding to the second continuation mode with a continuation rate of 60% is set in the continuation mode counter, and the value of the counter for points is set to " 21 to 25", "3" corresponding to the third continuation mode with a continuation rate of 70% is set in the continuation mode counter, and when the value of the point counter is 26 or more "4" is set in the continuation mode counter, corresponding to the fourth continuation mode with a continuation rate of 80%.

If the current state is not the start period ST11 (step S3001: NO), it is determined whether the start game is the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3007). If it is the start game of the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3007: YES), the process for starting the current set is executed (step S3008). In the processing for starting the current set, although the details will be described later, a processing for setting the number of continuous games for unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be started this time is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the value of the completion counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 10 or less (step S3009). The completion counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have been executed in the current ART state ST6. When the first unit execution time ST12 is started for the first time, the value of the completion counter is "0", and the value of the completion counter is incremented by 1 each time the first unit execution time ST12 is continued. Further, as already explained, the first unit execution time ST12 is executed 12 times at maximum. Therefore, when the value of the completion counter is 10 or less, it means that the current start target is the first to eleventh first unit execution times ST12.

If the value of the completion counter is 10 or less (step S3009: YES), the processing for adding the next set is executed (step S3010), and if the value of the completion counter is 11 or more (step S3009: NO ), the next set of superimposition processing is not executed. That is, when the 1st to 11th first unit execution times ST12 are started, the process for adding the next set (step S3010) is executed, and the 12th first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time is executed. When ST13 is started, the next set addition processing (step S3010) is not executed. Details of the next set addition process will be described later, but when the current first unit execution time ST12 continues, in the next first unit execution time ST12, the number of games is added to the initial number of games of the next first unit execution time ST12. A process for determining the number of additional games to be played is executed.

When a negative determination is made in step S3007, when a negative determination is made in step S3009, or when the process of step S3010 is executed, the current status is determined by determining whether the value of the completion counter is 11 or less. It is determined whether or not it is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S3011). When an affirmative determination is made in step S3011, a continuation rate increase lottery process is executed (step S3012). In the continuation rate increasing lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the continuation mode for determining the continuation rate of the continuation lottery process executed when the first unit execution time ST12 ends is to be promoted from the current continuation mode. In this case, the winning index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game has a higher probability of winning in the continuation rate increasing lottery process.

If the result of the continuation rate increase lottery process is increased winning (step S3013: YES), the continuation rate increase process is executed (step S3014). In the continuation rate increasing process, if the current state is the fourth continuation mode with the maximum continuation rate (specifically, 80%) in the first unit execution times ST12, the fourth continuation mode is maintained, and the first continuation mode is maintained. 1 to the value of the continuation mode counter of the main side RAM 74 is added so that the continuation mode becomes the continuation rate one step higher in the case of any of the 3rd continuation modes.

If a negative determination is made in step S3011, if a negative determination is made in step S3013, or if the process of step S3014 is executed, the ART continuation counter of the main side RAM 74 is referred to, and the unit of the current game is It is determined whether or not it is the final game in execution times ST12 and ST13 (step S3015). If an affirmative determination is made in step S3015, it is determined whether or not the value of the stock number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3016). When the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, it means that the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 1 or more as already explained, and when the value of the stock number counter is "0" This means that the stock numbers of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are "0". In this case, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the value of the stock number counter may be 1 or more, whereas if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, the stock number counter value is " 0”.

When the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, a continuation decision command indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been decided is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3020). The effect side MPU 92 receives the continuation confirmation command so that the effect indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is confirmed is executed. It should be noted that the continuation determination command is transmitted in a state in which the numerical information set in the addition counter 74h of the main side RAM 74 is set. Numerical information corresponding to the number of additional games to be added to the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started is set in the addition counter 74h, details of which will be described later. be done.

If the value of the stock number counter is "0" (step S3016: NO), a continuous lottery process is executed (step S3017). In the continuation lottery process, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the continuation lottery table corresponding to the value of the continuation mode counter of the main side RAM 74 is read. In this case, if the value of the continuation mode counter is "1", a continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 50% is read, and if the value of the continuation mode counter is "2", the continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 60% is read. If the value of the continuation mode counter is "3", the continuation lottery table with a continuation rate of 70% is read, and if the value of the continuation mode counter is "4", the continuation rate is 80%. read out. Further, if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, the continuation lottery table in which the continuation rate is 90% regardless of the value of the continuation mode counter of the main side RAM 74 is read. Numerical information is obtained from a random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the obtained numerical information is checked against the read continuous lottery table.

If the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is continuation winning (step S3018: YES), the continuation confirmation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3019). The continuation decision flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been decided. Thereafter, a continuation determination command indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been determined is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3020). The effect side MPU 92 receives the continuation confirmation command so that the effect indicating that the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is confirmed is executed.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. The ART state process is executed at step S908 in the corresponding process at the end of the game (FIG. 26). As described above, the corresponding processing at the end of the game is executed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game, so the ART state processing is also performed after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating in one game. executed later.

First, 1 is subtracted from the value of the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3101). The ART continuation counter is used by the main side MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the start period ST11 if it is the start period ST11. is used to specify the remaining number of continuous games in the main MPU 72 .

In the case of the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the ART state processing (step S908) is not executed by making an affirmative determination in step S902 in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 26). Therefore, when the ART state ST6 is shifted to the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3, the ART state ST6 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games played in the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 is reduced to the ART state. It is not treated as the number of games played in ST6. When the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state ST3 ends, the ART state ST6 is resumed while the lottery mode remains the normal mode without shifting to the preparation state ST4.

After that, it is determined whether or not the current period is the start period ST11 by determining whether or not the start period flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3102). If it is the start period ST11 (step S3102: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the ART continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0", so that the remaining number of continuous games in the start period ST11 is 0. It is determined whether or not it has become (step S3103).

If the value of the ART continuation counter is "0" (step S3103: YES), the maximum number of additional games in the current ART state ST6 is displayed in the additional remaining counter 74f (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74. A certain "170" is set (step S3104). The add-on remaining counter 74f is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining add-on game number that can be generated in the first unit execution times ST12 in the current ART state ST6. After that, the setting processing of the first unit execution times ST12 is executed (step S3105). In the process of setting the first unit execution times ST12, the unit execution flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and the start period flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". The unit execution flag is a flag for specifying in the main side MPU 72 that it is the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13. Thereafter, a shift command to the first unit execution times ST12 indicating that the start period ST11 has shifted to the first unit execution times ST12 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3106). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12.

If the current state is not the start period ST11 (step S3102: NO), by determining whether or not the value of the ART continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is "0", the remaining unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are determined. It is determined whether or not the number of continuous games is 0 (step S3107). If the value of the ART continuation counter is "0" (step S3107: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the stock number counter of the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S3108). When the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more, it means that the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 1 or more as already explained, and when the value of the stock number counter is "0" This means that the stock numbers of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are "0". In this case, if this time is the first unit execution time ST12, the value of the stock number counter may be 1 or more, whereas if this time is the second unit execution time ST13, the stock number counter value is " 0”. If the value of the stock number counter is 1 or more (step S3108: YES), after subtracting 1 from the value of the stock number counter (step S3109), the processing during the continuation of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in steps S3112 to S3115 to run.

If the value of the stock number counter is "0" (step S3108: NO), it is determined whether or not the continuation determination flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1". It is determined whether or not the continuous lottery process (step S3017) has been continuously won (step S3110). If the continuation decision flag is set to "1" (step S3110: YES), after clearing the continuation decision flag to "0" (step S3111), the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in steps S3112 to S3115 are continued. Perform time processing.

That is, in a situation where the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 1 or more, if the number of remaining continuous games of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 becomes 0, the stock number can be consumed by one. The next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 occur without executing the continuous lottery process. On the other hand, when the number of remaining continuation games of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 0 in the situation where the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is "0", the continuation lottery process is executed and the continuation is performed. The next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are generated by winning continuously in the lottery process.

As a process for continuing the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, first, 1 is added to the value of the completion counter of the main side RAM 74 (step S3112). As already explained, the completion counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have been executed in the current ART state ST6. Then, by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter after the addition of 1 is "12", the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be executed by the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 this time are the first. It is determined whether or not the unit execution time ST12 has changed to the second unit execution time ST13.

If the value of the completion counter is not "12" (step S3113: NO), the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the same kind as the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 which are the current execution targets are continued. , ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3114). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to display the effect corresponding to the continuation of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the same kind as the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 which are the current execution targets. to be executed. On the other hand, if the value of the completion counter is "12" (step S3113: YES), it indicates that the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 to be executed have changed from the first unit execution time ST12 to the second unit execution time ST13. A transition command for the second unit execution times ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3115). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the second unit execution time ST13.

On the other hand, if the continuation decision flag is not set to "1" (step S3110: NO), that is, the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is "0" and the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) continues. If the winning is not successful, advantageous end processing is executed (step S3116). The processing contents of the advantageous end processing are the same as the advantageous end processing executed in step S2707 in the pseudo-bonus processing (FIG. 56).

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 57, first, an advantageous end command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S2801). The advantageous end command is a command sent to the effect-side MPU 92 when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends without satisfying the ending condition of the second section SC2. When the effect-side MPU 92 receives the advantageous end command in the situation of the ART state ST6, the effect indicating the end of the ART state ST6 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63. .

After that, it is determined whether or not the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2802). The heaven preparation flag is the state after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is executed in B mode, or the first pseudo-bonus state. This is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify whether or not it is after the ART state ST6 is ended when the transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred after ST5 is ended. When the second section SC2 of the B mode is started, the heaven preparation flag is set to "1", and the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 is entered after the second section SC2 of the B mode is started. until the ART state ST6 that started before the execution of the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, or after the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, the transition to the ART state ST6 occurs. If there is, the state in which the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" is maintained until the ART state ST6 ends. On the other hand, when the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends in the second section SC2 which is the B mode, when the ART state ST6 started before the first pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, or when the first When the transition to the ART state ST6 has occurred after the pseudo bonus state ST5 is completed, when the game state is shifted to the normal game state ST1 when the ART state ST6 is completed, Heaven The ready flag is cleared to "0".

If the heaven preparation flag is not set to "1" (step S2802: NO), the processing for setting the end preparation state ST7 is executed (step S2803). In the setting process, if the current game state is the ART state ST6, the ART state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, in the setting process, the termination preparation state flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The end preparation state flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the end preparation state ST7 is set, and when the end preparation state flag is set to "1", the game state becomes the end preparation state ST7. Thereafter, the termination preparation completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2804). As already described, the end preparation completion flag is a flag for the main side MPU 72 to specify whether or not one game has been executed in the end preparation state ST7.

If the heaven preparation flag is set to "1" (step S2802: YES), "80" is set to the unlocked game number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 (step S2805). As already explained, the unlocked game number counter 74e is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games required until the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed. At step S2805, "80" is set to the number-of-released-games counter 74e, so that 80 games are required until the transition to the next pseudo-bonus state ST5 is confirmed in the B mode. Thereafter, game state setting processing is executed (step S2806). In the setting process, if the current game state is the ART state ST6, the ART state flag of the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0". As a result, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Also, the heaven preparation flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2807).

Next, the loop lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The loop lottery process is executed in step S307, which is a process executed after one game is started in the normal process (FIG. 12) and before the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is executed. .

First, it is determined whether or not it is the start game of a new execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 (step S3201). Since the loop lottery process is a process for determining which of 29 games to 32 games should be the initial number of games for each unit execution time ST12, ST13, the first unit execution time ST12 or the second It is executed only in the starting game of a new execution time in the unit execution time ST13.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3201, numerical information corresponding to the first standby period is set in the update waiting counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3202). Acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 can be repeated in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). The second random number is 1-byte numerical information consisting of 8 bits. The second random number circuit 76 sequentially updates the second random number within the numerical range of "0 to 255" based on the clock signal output from the clock circuit, and when the update of the second random number completes one round, a new initial value is generated. value to start the next round of updating the second random number. When the second random number is obtained repeatedly in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), at least the first waiting period is ensured from when the second random number is obtained once until when the second random number is obtained next time. . The first standby period is set to be longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once. is set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is longer than the period required for . The update waiting counter is a counter for specifying whether or not the first waiting period has elapsed in the main MPU 72 .

After executing the process of step S3202, the process of updating the update waiting counter is executed (step S3203). Specifically, 1 is subtracted from the value of the update waiting counter. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the update wait counter after subtracting 1 has become "0" (step S3204). If the value of the update wait counter is not "0" (step S3204: NO), the process returns to step S3203 to re-execute update processing of the update wait counter. Then, update processing of the update waiting counter is repeated until the value of the update waiting counter becomes "0".

If the value of the update wait counter is "0" (step S3204: YES), it means that the first waiting period has elapsed, so the process advances to step S3205. In step S3205, the repetition number "15" is set in the repetition number counter 74g (see FIG. 9) provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3205). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 65), acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 can be repeated as already described. Then, when the second random number is obtained repeatedly, not only is the first standby period secured as a fixed period from when the second random number is obtained once until when the second random number is obtained next. , a second standby period is secured as a period of variation. Even if the second waiting period reaches the maximum value, it is shorter than the first waiting period, more specifically shorter than the first waiting period. However, without being limited to this, the second standby period may be the same as the first standby period, or the second standby period may be longer than the first standby period. The standby period may be configured to always be longer than the first standby period.

After that, the second random number obtained in the previous step S3212 is read from the second random number obtaining area provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3206). Note that after the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the second random number acquisition area contains a second random number having a decimal value of "0". will be stored. Thereafter, the lower 4-bit numerical value of the 8-bit second random number read in step S3206 is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as the variation numerical value (step S3207). In this case, since the variation numerical value is 4-bit numerical information, the minimum value is “0” and the maximum value is “15”.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variation value stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g of the main RAM 74 (step S3208). In other words, a process for judging the magnitude relationship is executed. If the variation numerical value is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g (step S3208: YES), the process proceeds to step S3209 by the JUMP instruction. : NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 by a NOP command. In step S3209, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter 74g. If the value of the repetition number counter 74g after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S3210: NO), the process returns to step S3208, and if the value of the repetition number counter 74g after subtracting 1 is "0" ( Step S3210: YES), and proceeds to step S3211.

As described above, the process proceeds to step S3209 regardless of whether the determination in step S3208 is affirmative or the determination in step S3208 is negative. is executed, the processing time required to proceed to the processing of step S3209 is longer by about 10 microseconds. Then, depending on whether or not the variation numerical value determined as the lower four bits of the second random number obtained last time is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g as described above, the JUMP instruction is executed and the NOP instruction is executed. There are cases where it is executed. Furthermore, the value of the repetition number counter 74g is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S3209 is executed, and the processes of steps S3208 and S3209 are repeated until the value of the repetition number counter 74g after the decrement of 1 becomes "0". . As a result, the ratio of the number of times the JUMP instruction is executed in step S3208 and the number of times the NOP instruction is executed in step S3208 out of the 15 repetition times is obtained as the lower 4-bit value of the second random number obtained last time. As a result, the second standby period can be varied.

In step S3211, 1 is added to the value of the lottery execution counter provided in the main side RAM74. The lottery execution counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3213) has been executed in the current start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

After that, the second random number at that time is obtained from the second random number circuit 76 and stored in the second random number obtaining area of the main RAM 74 (step S3212). Then, addition lottery processing is executed (step S3213). In the addition lottery process, an addition lottery table stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and a second random number is collated against the read addition lottery table, so that the second random number is set in the addition lottery table. It is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information. Only one addition lottery table is provided, and the winning numerical value information is set so that the probability of winning an addition lottery in the addition lottery process is 60%.

Here, as already described, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed at a timing prior to the timing at which the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is executed in the normal process (FIG. 12). The result of the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) does not affect the addition lottery process. However, it is not limited to this, and the loop lottery process (Fig. 65) is executed at a timing later than the timing at which the winning lottery process (Fig. 16) is executed in the normal process (Fig. 12). In addition, by setting the addition lottery table so as to correspond to the type of index value IV that can be won in the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role, the result of the lottery process (FIG. 16) of the role in the current game is the result of the addition lottery process. may be configured to affect the

If addition lottery processing (step S3213) does not result in an addition winning (step S3214: NO), this loop lottery processing ends. In other words, when the additional lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an additional lottery, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed without executing the process for increasing the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. is terminated.

If addition lottery processing (step S3213) results in addition winning (step S3214: YES), 1 is added to the value of the initial addition counter provided in the main side RAM 74 (step S3215). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter of the main RAM 74 is "3" (step S3216). As already explained, the initial number of games for the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 29 to 32 games. The maximum number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3213) is three.

If the value of the lottery execution counter is less than 3, it means that the number of addition lottery processes (step S3213) executed in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) has not reached three times. , a negative determination is made, and the process returns to step S3202. On the other hand, if the value of the lottery execution counter is "3", it means that the number of addition lottery processes (step S3213) executed in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) has reached the maximum value of 3. Therefore, an affirmative determination is made in step S3216, and this loop lottery process ends.

Next, how the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 66(a) shows the period during which one game is executed, FIG. 66(b) shows the period during which the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed, and FIG. 66(c) shows the first standby period. , FIG. 66(d) shows the second standby period, and FIG. 66(e) shows the timing at which the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed.

At the timing of t1, one game is started as shown in FIG. 66(a). This game is the first game when new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started. Therefore, at the timing t1, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is started as shown in FIG. 66(b). At the timing of t1, the measurement of the first waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66(c).

After that, at the timing of t2, the measurement of the first standby period started at the timing of t1 is completed as shown in FIG. 66(c). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). Therefore, at timing t2, measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66(d). During the second standby period, the combination of the processes in steps S3208 and S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at the timing of t3, the measurement of the second standby period is completed as shown in FIG. 66(d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66(e) at the timing of t3, the second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the acquired second random number. . If the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an addition win, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "0", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 29 games.

In the case of FIG. 66, an addition lottery process (step S3213) executed at the timing of t3 results in addition winning. Therefore, the value of the initial addition counter is incremented by one. Then, at the timing of t3, the measurement of the first standby period is newly started as shown in FIG. 66(c).

After that, at the timing of t4, the measurement of the first standby period started at the timing of t3 is completed as shown in FIG. 66(c). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the first standby period from timing t1 to timing t2 and the first standby period from timing t3 to timing t4 are the same period.

At the timing of t4, measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66(d). During the second standby period, the combination of the processes in steps S3208 and S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at the timing of t5, the measurement of the second standby period is completed as shown in FIG. 66(d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the second waiting period from timing t2 to timing t3 is different from the second waiting period from timing t4 to timing t5.

At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 66(e), a second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the acquired second random number. If the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an addition win, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "1", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 30 games.

In the case of FIG. 66, addition winning is won in addition lottery processing (step S3213) executed at timing t5. Therefore, the value of the initial addition counter is incremented by one. Then, at the timing of t5, the measurement of the first standby period is newly started as shown in FIG. 66(c).

After that, at the timing of t6, the measurement of the first standby period started at the timing of t5 is completed as shown in FIG. 66(c). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the first waiting period from timing t1 to timing t2, the first waiting period from timing t3 to timing t4, and the first waiting period from timing t5 to timing t6 are the same period. ing.

At the timing of t6, measurement of the second waiting period is started as shown in FIG. 66(d). During the second standby period, the combination of the processes in steps S3208 and S3209 is repeated 15 times. Then, at the timing of t7, the measurement of the second standby period is completed as shown in FIG. 66(d). That is, an affirmative determination is made in step S3210 in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65). In this case, the second waiting period from timing t2 to timing t3, the second waiting period from timing t4 to timing t5, and the second waiting period from timing t6 to timing t7 are all different periods. It's becoming

At the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 66(e), the second random number is obtained from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed using the obtained second random number. If the addition lottery process (step S3213) does not result in an addition win, the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated without adding 1 to the value of the initial addition counter. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter remains "2", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 31 games. On the other hand, in the case where addition is won in the addition lottery process (step S3213), the value of the initial addition counter is incremented by 1, and then the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is terminated. In this case, since the value of the initial addition counter is "3", the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 started this time is 32 games.

The loop lottery process (FIG. 65) ends at the timing of t7, regardless of whether or not the addition lottery process (step S3213) executed at the timing of t7 results in an addition win. After that, the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game is executed.

A loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is executed in the first game when new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started as described above. Then, by repeatedly executing the addition lottery process on the condition that the addition lottery process (FIG. 65) is won, the number of initial games of the newly started unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is increased from 29 games. Determined from 32 games. In addition lottery processing, the second random number obtained from the second random number circuit 76 is used. A second random number is repeatedly obtained in the .

In this case, not only is the first waiting period as a fixed period from when the second random number is obtained until the next second random number is obtained, but also the second waiting period is secured as a variable period. A period is guaranteed. The first waiting period is set to be longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once. The period is set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is longer than the period required for one round. As a result, the second random number circuit 76 updates the random number for at least one cycle from when the second random number is obtained once to when the second random number is obtained next time. Even if the acquisition is repeated, it is possible to acquire any value of the second random number within the numerical range of "0 to 255" at each acquisition timing as the second random number. In addition, since the second waiting period is secured as a fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent the acquisition timing of the second random number from becoming biased within the range of one cycle of the second random number in the second random number circuit 76 . It becomes possible.

Next, the processing for adding the next set to be executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The next set of add-on processing is executed at step S3010 in the ART processing (FIG. 63) at the start of the game. As already described, the next set of additional processing is executed in the game in which the first to eleventh new execution times in the first unit execution time ST12 are started. In addition, as already explained, the processing for adding to the next set is based on the initial game number of the next first unit execution ST12 in the next first unit execution ST12 when the current first unit execution ST12 continues. A process for determining the number of games to be added is executed.

First, the addition lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the continuation mode counter of the main RAM 74 and the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3301). Then, an additional lottery process is executed (step S3302). In the additional lottery process, numerical information at that point in time is acquired from a random number counter that is periodically updated in the main RAM 74, and the acquired numerical information is checked against the above-mentioned additional lottery table.

0 games, 10 games, 30 games and 80 games are set as the number of games to be added to the addition lottery table. is set. Further, a plurality of types of additional lottery tables are set, and the plurality of types of additional lottery tables are associated with combinations of the number of executions of the continuation mode and the number of executions of the first unit execution number ST12. When the additional lottery process (step S3302) is executed as described above, the additional lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the continuation mode counter and the value of the completion counter is read out. corresponds to the combination of the execution counts of the first unit execution times ST12.

In the first continuation mode (specifically 50%) and the second continuation mode (specifically 60%) with a relatively low continuation rate, the current number of executions of the first unit execution times ST12 is from the first time to the second time. If it is the 5th time, an additional lottery table with a relatively low expected value for the number of added games (for example, the expected value for the added game is 10 games) is selected, and if it is the 6th time or later, the expected value for the added number of games is selected. is selected (for example, an expected value of 30 games) is selected. On the other hand, in the third continuation mode (specifically 70%) and the fourth continuation mode (specifically 80%) with relatively high continuation rates, the current execution count of the first unit execution times ST12 is 1. If it is the 5th time to the 5th time, an extra lottery table with a relatively high expected value of the additional game number (for example, the expected value of 30 games) is selected, and if it is the 6th time or later, the additional game number is given. An additional lottery table with a relatively low expected value (eg, 10 games given expected value) is selected. However, it is not limited to this, and for example, the above relationship may be reversed.

If the result of the extra lottery process (step S3302) is an extra win (step S3303: YES), that is, if the number of extra games other than 0 is selected in the extra lottery process (step S3302), the extra game number of the main RAM 74 is added. It is determined whether or not the value of the remaining counter 74f is greater than the number of additional games selected this time in the additional lottery process (step S3302) (step S3304). The addition remaining counter 74f is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of addition games that can be generated in the first unit execution times ST12 in the current ART state ST6, as already described. As already described, when the start period ST11 ends and the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the maximum number of additional games "170" is set to the additional remaining counter 74f.

That is, in step S3304, the number of remaining add-on games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is the number of games that is greater than the number of add-on games selected this time in the add-on lottery process (step S3302). It is determined whether or not However, without being limited to this, in step S3304, the remaining number of additional games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302). A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the number of games is equal to or greater than the number of games to be added.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3304, the number of games selected in the addition lottery process (step S3302) is set in the addition counter 74h provided in the main RAM 74 (step S3305). The add-on counter 74h specifies, in the main MPU 72, the number of additional games to be added to the initial number of games for the next execution of the first unit execution ST12 when the current execution of the first unit execution ST12 continues. is a counter for Thereafter, the number of games selected in the addition lottery process (step S3302) is subtracted from the value of the addition remaining counter 74f of the main RAM 74 (step S3306).

Even if the number of additional games of 1 or more is selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302) as described above, the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is determined by the additional lottery. In the process (step S3302), if the number of games is not larger than the number of added games selected this time, the selected number of added games is invalidated without being added. In other words, the remaining number of add-on games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is not set as an addition target, and the add-on lottery process (step S3302) does not result in an add-on win. Similarly, the number of additional games becomes 0 games. As a result, not only is it possible to reduce the number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 to the maximum number of games or less, but also the first unit execution time ST12 in the subsequent execution time. Even if it is, it is possible to increase the possibility that the additional number of games will be awarded.

Next, the processing for starting the current set executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The start processing for the current set is executed in step S3008 in the ART processing (FIG. 63) at the start of the game. As already described, the start processing of the current set is executed in the game in which a new execution round of the first unit execution round ST12 or the second unit execution round ST13 is started, and the unit execution round ST12, This is executed to set the number of games to be continued for the current execution in ST13.

First, "29", which is the minimum number of initial games, is set in the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3401). As already explained, the ART continuation counter is used by the main MPU 72 to specify the number of games remaining in the start period ST11 in the case of the start period ST11. It is used by the main side MPU 72 to specify the number of remaining continuous games of times ST12 and ST13.

After that, the value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3402). In the initial addition counter, the number of games to be added to the initial number of games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) executed when the current game is started is set. Note that the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0" after executing the process of step S3402.

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the current status is the first unit execution time ST12 by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is 11 or less (step S3403). If the current status is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S3403: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S3404). After that, the value of the addition counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S3405).

The add-on counter 74h is set with the number of add-on games selected in the next set of add-on processing (FIG. 67) executed in the game in which the previous run in the first unit run ST12 is started. Therefore, when the first unit execution time ST12 is continued and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the execution time one time before the newly started execution time is determined. On the condition that the number of additional games of 1 or more is selected at the start of , the selected number of additional games of 1 or more is added to the initial number of games of the newly started execution.

In the start period ST11, the processing for adding the next set (step S3010) is not executed, so the number of games added to the initial number of games does not occur in the first first unit execution time ST12. As a result, in the configuration in which the maximum number of games (specifically, 170 games) is set as the number of games that can be added in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6, the first execution time in the subsequent execution time is set. It is possible to increase the possibility that the additional number of games will be awarded even in the unit execution times ST12. However, it is not limited to this, and the addition lottery process (step S3302) is executed at the start of the start period ST11 or the first unit execution time ST12. However, the number of games may be added to the initial number of games.

If a negative determination is made in step S3403, or if the process of step S3404 is executed, a command to start unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3406). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

FIG. 69 is a flow chart showing an effect control process for ART executed by the effect side MPU 92. FIG. The effect control process for ART is repeatedly executed by the effect side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds).

It is determined whether or not the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S3501). When the ending effect of the second section SC2 is being executed (step S3501: YES), the processing after step S3502 is not executed. This makes it possible to give priority to the execution of the ending effect of the second section SC2.

If the ending effect of the second section SC2 is not being executed (step S3501: NO), on condition that it is the start period ST11 (step S3502: YES), effect control processing for the start period is executed (step S3503). . In the effect control process for the start period, processing for advancing the effect of the start period ST11 in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 based on the reception of the game start command from the main MPU 72 is executed. As already described, the main MPU 72 determines the stock number of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in the final game of the start period ST11, but this stock number may be notified by the image display device 63 or the like. It may not be notified.

In the effect control process for ART, it is determined whether or not a command indicating the start of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3504). The command indicating the start of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is a command to the first unit execution time ST12 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the start period ST11 ends and the first unit execution time ST12 starts. , a continuation command of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the first unit execution time ST12 continues and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started; A transition command to the second unit execution ST13 transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the first unit execution ST12 ends and the first second unit execution ST13 is started, and the second unit execution Continuation commands of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 transmitted from the main side MPU 72 when the time ST13 continues and a new execution time of the second unit execution time ST13 is started are included.

It should be noted that, when the command to shift to the first unit execution times ST12 is received, the effect corresponding to the start period ST11 is ended in other processing of step S3515, and the effect corresponding to the first unit execution times ST12 is started. Execute processing to ensure that Further, when a command to shift to the second unit execution time ST13 is received, the effect corresponding to the first unit execution time ST12 is terminated in other processing of step S3515, and the effect corresponding to the second unit execution time ST13 is terminated. to start.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3504, lottery processing for common effects is executed (step S3505). In the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the common effect is executed from the start game to the game one time before the final game. The common performance is executed irrespective of whether the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are continued or not, and whether the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are continued depends on the contents of the common performance. It is not possible to specify whether or not A plurality of types of performance stories are set for the common performance, and one performance story is selected from the plurality of types of performance stories in the lottery processing of the common performance.

Incidentally, the number of games to be continued in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 may vary depending on the initial number of games, and in the first unit execution number ST12, if the number of additional games is added to the initial number of games, the number of games to be added may vary. can. However, at the stage of determining the lottery process of the common effect, the number of continuous games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 cannot be specified. Therefore, in the common effect, the effect contents for 5 games are set for any of the effect stories, and the effect contents for the 5 games are repeated during the period in which the common effect is executed in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. will be

After executing the lottery process for common effects (step S3505), setting process for common effects is executed (step S3506). In the common performance setting process, the common performance table corresponding to the performance story selected in the common performance lottery process is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加The effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the common effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 execute the common effect corresponding to the effect story selected this time.

After that, lottery processing for non-continuous effects is executed (step S3507). In the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, a final game effect is executed to clearly indicate whether or not new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur in the final game. As the final game effect, a non-continuous effect executed when new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 do not occur and a continuous effect executed when new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 occur are set. there is A plurality of types of performance stories are set for the non-continuous performance, and one performance story is selected from the plurality of types of performance stories in the lottery process for the non-continuous performance.

After executing the lottery process (step S3507) of the non-continuous effect, the setting process of the non-continuous effect is executed (step S3508). In the non-continuous performance setting process, the non-continuous performance table corresponding to the performance story selected in the non-continuous performance lottery process is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94.例文帳に追加Whether or not new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are generated after the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the current execution time are completed depends on whether or not the final game is started in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 of the current execution time. will be determined in due time. Then, as already explained, when the main MPU 72 determines to generate new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the main MPU 72 transmits a continuation decision command at the start of the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13. If it is determined not to generate new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, no continuation determination command is transmitted at the start of the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13. If the effect-side MPU 92 does not receive a continuation determination command from the main side MPU 72 at the start of the final game in the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the effect-side MPU 92 performs step S3508 when starting the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13. By controlling the execution of the production according to the discontinuous production table stored in the production side RAM 94, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 perform the discontinuous production corresponding to the production story of the discontinuous production table. to run. The content of the non-continuing effect is arbitrary, but for example, when the image display device 63 executes a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the enemy character may perform a normal attack or a special move. A configuration is conceivable in which an effect of winning over a teammate character by an attack is executed as a non-continuous effect.

In the effect control process for ART, it is determined whether or not a continuation confirmation command is received from the main side MPU 72 (step S3509). As already described, the continuation decision command is transmitted at the start of the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when it is determined that new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur.

If a continuation confirmation command has been received (step S3509: YES), it is determined whether or not the numerical information of the addition counter 74h set in the continuation confirmation command is equal to or greater than 20, which is the reference number (step S3510). . Numerical information set in the addition counter 74h of the main side RAM 74 is set in the continuation decision command as already explained. Numerical information corresponding to the number of additional games to be added to the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 when the next unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started is set in the addition counter 74h, as already described. be. In other words, when the information on the number of additional games set in the received continuation determination command is 20 or more, it means that in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the number of continuation games is set to the initial number of games. This means that the number of games to which 20 or more additional games are added is set. As already explained, the additional game number is generated in the first unit execution time ST12, but not in the second unit execution time ST13. The situation described above can occur in the first unit execution time ST12, but does not occur in the second unit execution time ST13.

When a negative determination is made in step S3510, setting processing of normal continuous effect is executed (step S3511). In the normal continuous effect setting process, the normal continuous effect table is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94 . Execution control of the effect is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal continuous effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 perform the normal continuous effect in the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13. executed. The content of the normal continuous effect is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 will occur. When a battle effect between a character and an enemy character is executed, a configuration is conceivable in which a production in which the ally character wins over the enemy character by a normal attack is executed as a normal continuous effect.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S3510, setting processing of special continuation effect is executed (step S3512). In the special continuation performance setting process, the special continuation performance table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94 . Execution control of the effect is performed by the effect-side MPU 92 according to the special continuous effect table, so that the special continuous effect is performed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 in the final game of the current unit execution times ST12 and ST13. executed. The content of the special continuation performance is arbitrary as long as the player can recognize that the content of the special continuation performance is different from the content of the normal continuation performance and that new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are generated. In the case where the image display device 63 executes a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character, it is conceivable to execute the effect that the ally character wins the enemy character with a special attack as a special continuous effect.

In the effect control process for ART, when the advantageous end command is received from the main side MPU 72 in the ART state ST6 (step S3513: YES), the end effect setting process is executed (step S3514). In the end effect setting process, a table for executing the effect indicating that the current ART state ST6 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1 is read out from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. . As a result, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 perform an effect indicating that the current ART state ST6 is terminated and the state shifts to the normal game state ST1. This effect is continued until the end preparation state ST7 is ended and the state shifts to the normal game state ST1.

Other processes are executed in the effect control process for ART (step S3515). In the other processing, processing for executing effects other than the various effects described above is executed. In addition, in the other processing, processing for displaying information on the number of remaining continuous games in the start period ST11 and unit execution times ST12 and ST13 on the image display device 63 may be executed. . As a result, during the start period ST11, the number of remaining continuous games during the start period ST11 is displayed on the image display device 63, and during the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the remaining continuous games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are displayed. The number is displayed on the image display device 63 .

Next, the progress of various effects in the first unit execution time ST12 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 70(a) shows the period during which one execution of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed, and FIG. 70(b) shows the addition lottery processing (step S3302) in the next set of addition processing (FIG. 67). 70(c) shows the timing at which the continuation lottery process (step S3017) in the ART process (FIG. 63) at the start of the game is executed, and FIG. 70(d) shows the execution of the common effect. FIG. 70(e) shows the period during which the non-continuous effect is executed, FIG. 70(f) shows the period during which the normal continuous effect is executed, and FIG. 70(g) shows the execution of the special continuous effect. period.

First, the case where a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 does not occur will be described.

At the timing of t1, the first unit execution time ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b) at the timing t1, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs after the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is completed, Whether or not to add the number of games to be added in the new run is determined, and if the number of games to be added is to be added, an addition lottery process (step S3302) for determining the number of games to be added is executed. Further, at the timing of t1, as shown in FIG. 70(d), the common effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 is started.

After that, at the timing of t2, the final game of the current execution time in the current first unit execution time ST12 is started. In this case, the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 is "0". Therefore, at the timing t2, as shown in FIG. 70(c), a continuation lottery process (step S3017) is executed for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12. In this case, the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is not continuation winning. Therefore, at the timing of t2, the common effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 70(d), and the non-continuous effect is started as shown in FIG. 70(e). As a result, the player can understand that the first unit execution time ST12 will not be newly executed. After that, at the timing of t3, the first unit execution time ST12 ends as shown in FIG. 70(a), and the non-continuous effect ends as shown in FIG. 70(e).

Next, a case where a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is generated will be described.

At the timing of t4, the first unit execution time ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70(a). In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b) at the timing t4, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs after the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is completed, Whether or not to add the number of games to be added in the new run is determined, and if the number of games to be added is to be added, an addition lottery process (step S3302) for determining the number of games to be added is executed. Also, at the timing of t4, the common effect in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63 is started as shown in FIG. 70(d).

After that, at the timing of t5, the final game of the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started. In this case, the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 is "0". Therefore, at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the continuation lottery process (step S3017) for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed. In this case, the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is continuation winning. However, in the additional lottery process (step S3302) executed at the timing of t4, the additional game number of 20 games or more, which is the reference number, is not selected. In other words, it is not a situation in which the additional number of games of 20 games or more is given in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the common effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 70(d), and the normal continuous effect is started as shown in FIG. 70(f). As a result, the player can grasp that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur. After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is ended, and as shown in FIG. 70(f), the normal continuous effect is ended.

After that, at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 70(a), a new execution cycle of the first unit execution cycle ST12 is started. In this case, as shown in FIG. 70(b) at the timing t7, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 occurs after the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is completed, Whether or not to add the number of games to be added in the new run is determined, and if the number of games to be added is to be added, an addition lottery process (step S3302) for determining the number of games to be added is executed. Further, at the timing of t7, the common effect in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 is started as shown in FIG. 70(d).

After that, at the timing of t8, the final game of the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started. In this case, the stock number of the first unit execution times ST12 is "0". Therefore, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 70(c), the continuation lottery process (step S3017) for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is executed. In this case, the result of the continuation lottery process (step S3017) is continuation winning. Also, in the addition lottery process (step S3302) executed at the timing of t7, the addition of 20 games or more, which is the reference number, is selected. In other words, in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, an additional number of games of 20 games or more is given. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the common effect is terminated as shown in FIG. 70(d), and the special continuous effect is started as shown in FIG. 70(g). As a result, the player can understand that a new execution round of the first unit execution round ST12 will occur, and that an additional number of games of 20 games or more will be given in the new execution round. It becomes possible to After that, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the current execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is ended, and as shown in FIG. 70(g), the continuation continuous effect is ended. Then, at the timing of t10, a new execution cycle of the first unit execution cycle ST12 is started as shown in FIG. 70(a).

According to this embodiment detailed above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

In a configuration in which the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3 are set as game states disadvantageous to the player, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2", a winning state of the second CB combination is established and the second CB. By executing a game in which the number of bets is "3" after preventing the winning of a prize, the winning order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are determined as a result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in each game. Regardless of the stop operation timing of the buttons 42 to 44, it is possible to play the game while preventing the transition to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. That is, when the second CB role is won by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2", a game in which the number of bets is "3" is subsequently executed to achieve the second CB role. Even in the winning state of , the second CB prize is not established. Also, in the winning state of the second CB role, even if a game with the number of bets of "3" is executed, the first CB role is excluded from the lottery targets in the role lottery process (FIG. 16). will not be elected. Since the winning state of the first CB combination is not established, the first CB prize is not established, and the game state does not shift to the first CB state ST2. As a result, it is possible to execute a game with a bet number of "3" while preventing transitions to the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3. Then, by executing a game in which the number of bets is "3", a transition to the second section SC2 can occur, and a transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 can occur.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is assumed that the processing for clearing all of the main side RAM 74 (step S105) is executed for the purpose of obtaining an illegal profit. For example, in a situation where medals are to be paid out, an illegal jig is used for the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53 to prevent medals from being detected, thereby paying out more medals than should be paid out. It is assumed that there will be fraudulent acts that On the other hand, as already explained, the slot machine 10 is provided with an object detection sensor for detecting the entry of the illegal jig, and the object detection sensor detects the entry of the illegal jig. Intrusion anomaly notification is executed when Therefore, even if the fraudulent jig is inserted in such a way that it is not detected by the object detection sensor, the fraudulent jig is used to repeat the act of illegally paying out a large number of medals. Intrusion of an illegal jig may be detected by an object detection sensor, and intrusion abnormality notification may be executed. In this case, it is assumed that the fraudulent person forcibly terminates the intrusion abnormality notification by illegally executing the all-clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 . Then, there is a possibility that the illegally obtained medals will be used to play a game in the slot machine 10 in which the intrusion abnormality notification is not executed.

However, if such a fraudulent act is performed, the main side RAM 74 is completely cleared (step S105), so that the main side RAM 74 does not store the second CB winning data. In other words, it is not in the winning state of the second CB combination. When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is executed in a state in which the second CB role is not won, the first CB role can be won, and if the first CB award is established, the player will be disadvantaged. It becomes the first CB state ST2, which is a game state. As a result, it becomes possible to give a disadvantage to the person who has committed the above fraudulent act. On the other hand, in a game hall, a game with a bet number of "2" is executed before the opening of business, etc., so that the second CB role is won. On the other hand, it is possible to play a game with a bet number of "3" while preventing the occurrence of the first CB state ST2 and the second CB state ST3.

Not only the first CB state ST2 but also the second CB state ST3 are game states disadvantageous to the player. Therefore, if the cheater uses the illegally obtained medals to play a game in which the number of bets is "2" after performing the process of clearing all of the main side RAM 74 (step S105), the second CB role is played. When the game is won and the second CB prize is established, the state shifts to the second CB state ST3 in which the game medium is reduced.

When a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, the second section SC2 can shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, whereas the bet number is "2". Even if the game is executed, the second section SC2 does not occur. Therefore, the player basically executes the game under the condition that the number of bets is "3". In this case, regardless of whether or not the second CB combination is won, the second section SC2 can be reached by executing a game with the number of bets of "3". As a result, even if the player starts the game with the number of bets of "3" in a situation in which the player has not won the second CB combination, the second section SC2 can be set.

Even after the second section SC2, the gaming state does not shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 unless a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. Therefore, even in the second section SC2, the player basically executes the game in a situation where the number of bets is "3".

Since the second section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games), the second section SC2 continues for an excessively long time. It is possible to prevent it from being lost. Also, in the second section SC2, the number of games executed in the second section SC2 is counted regardless of whether the game is a game in which the number of bets is "3" or a game in which the number of bets is "2". As a result, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, transition to the second section SC2 does not occur, and transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 occur in the second section SC2. However, if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, the remaining upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is reduced accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in which the number of bets is "2".

Since the second section SC2 ends when the total number of net increases with restrictions on the number of game media in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit net increase number (specifically, 2400), the second section SC2 becomes excessively long. It is possible to prevent it from continuing. In addition, in the second section SC2, the limited total net increase number of game media is counted regardless of whether the game is a game with a bet number of "3" or a game with a bet number of "2". As a result, when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, transition to the second section SC2 does not occur, and transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 occur in the second section SC2. However, if a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, there is a possibility that the limited total net increase number of game media will approach the upper limit net increase number. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in which the number of bets is "2".

In the situation where the second CB combination is not won, the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63 . As a result, in a situation where the second CB combination has not been won, it is possible to urge the manager of the gaming hall or the like to win the second CB combination.

The non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63 in a situation where not only the second CB combination but also the first CB combination is not won. As a result, the manager of the gaming hall or the like confirms that the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed, thereby grasping that neither the first CB combination nor the second CB combination has been won. becomes possible.

The number of games executed in the situation where the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed is displayed as a non-internal game number image G22 which is a part of the non-internal notification image G12. As a result, in a situation where the manager of the game hall or the like is trying to win the second CB role, the manager of the game hall or the like is aware of how long the situation in which the second CB role has not been won continues. It is possible to

When a game is started in which the number of bets is "2" in spite of the fact that the second CB combination has already been won, the notification corresponding to 2 bets is executed. As a result, it is possible to encourage avoidance of establishment of the second CB winning.

When a game in which the number of bets is "3" is started under the condition that the second CB combination is not won, the notification corresponding to 3 bets is executed. This makes it possible to encourage the player to win the second CB combination by playing a game in which the number of bets is "2".

The first internal explicit image G13 is displayed on the image display device 63 when the first CB combination is won. This makes it possible for the manager of the gaming hall or the like to recognize that the first CB combination has been won.

In order to execute the setting value updating process (step S106), the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on, and the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on without pressing the reset button 56. is performed, part of the information in the main RAM 74 is erased by executing a partial clear process (step S104). In this case, even if the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the second CB winning data indicating that the second CB winning combination has been won is not erased from the main side RAM74. As a result, even after the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, it is possible to maintain the state of winning the second CB combination.

When the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, the first CB winning data indicating that the first CB winning combination has been won is erased from the main side RAM74. As a result, when the first CB role is won, the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed, thereby resolving the situation of winning the first CB role. becomes possible.

When the power of the slot machine 10 is turned on while the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on, and the reset button 56 is pressed, all clear processing (step S105) is executed. By doing so, all the information in the main RAM 74 is erased. When the all-clearing process (step S105) is executed, the second CB winning data indicating that the second CB winning combination has been won is erased from the main side RAM74. As a result, when an act of illegally executing the clear all process (step S105) is performed, it is possible to create a situation in which the second CB combination is not won.

Since the second section SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing for an excessively long time. Become. Further, by shifting to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section SC2 and the state of the normal game state ST1 reaches the ceiling number of games. , it is possible to give an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Also, the number of ceiling games that is initially set when shifting to the second section SC2 is the number of games that is smaller than the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2. As a result, it is possible to reliably give an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 when the second section SC2 is reached.

A plurality of types of stay modes exist in the second section SC2 so that at least the number of ceiling games for the first time is different. This makes it possible to diversify the game contents in the second section SC2. Further, in any type of stay mode, the number of ceiling games initially set when shifting to the second section SC2 is the number of games smaller than the upper limit number of games of the second section SC2. As a result, regardless of which stay mode is selected, it is possible to reliably provide an opportunity to shift to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 when the second section SC2 is reached.

The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is the same regardless of whether the stay mode of the second section SC2 is A mode to C mode. As a result, even with a configuration in which the game content in the second section SC2 is diversified, it is possible to keep the advantage of the second section SC2 once within a predetermined range of advantages.

When the stay mode of the second section SC2 is the B mode, even if the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs once in the second section SC2, after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends or the pseudo-bonus state When the transition to the ART state ST6 is made after the end of ST5, even if the transition is made to the normal game state ST1 after the end of the ART state ST6, the second section SC2 is continued and the second ceiling is reached in the normal game state ST1. When the number of games is completed, the state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 again. The upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is the number of the first ceiling game, the number of the second ceiling game, the maximum number of continuous games assumed in the preparation state ST4, and the number of continuous games in the pseudo-bonus state ST5. The number of games is set to be greater than the total number of games with As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs twice in one second section SC2.

The second ceiling game number in the B mode is the number of games smaller than the first ceiling game number. As a result, when the second section SC2 continues after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 again.

The second section SC2 includes an A mode in which the pseudo-bonus state ST5 occurs only once in one second section SC2, and a B-mode in which the pseudo-bonus state ST5 can occur multiple times in one second section SC2. exists. As a result, it is possible to generate a relatively advantageous second section SC2 and a relatively disadvantageous second section SC2, and it is possible to diversify game contents.

The total number of games of the first ceiling game number and the second ceiling game number in the B mode is less than or equal to the first ceiling game number in the A mode. As a result, it is possible to set the B mode as a mode in which the transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 can occur multiple times in one second section SC2 and which can easily transition to the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

By providing the interval display section 67 which is lit up in an advantageous game state which is one of the preparation state ST4, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6, it is possible to confirm whether or not the advantageous game state exists. easier to do. In this case, when the second section SC2 ends due to the end of the advantageous gaming state, the section display section 67 is turned off when the second section SC2 ends. If the second section SC2 continues even after the game ends, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighted state even after the advantageous game state ends. This makes it possible for the player playing the slot machine 10 to recognize that the second section SC2 continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

When the second section SC2 is entered, the section display section 67 may be switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, even if a player other than the player who has been playing the game at the slot machine 10 confirms that the section display section 67 is in the lighting state, the second section is displayed even after the advantageous gaming state ends. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp which of the situation in which SC2 is continued and the situation in which the second section SC2 has newly occurred.

Even if the second section SC2 is reached, the section display section 67 is maintained in the off state, and when the advantageous game state is entered after that, the section display section 67 may be switched from the off state to the on state. As a result, while the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighted state in the advantageous game state, the section display section 67 is maintained in the off state in the second section SC2 and not in the advantageous game state. It is possible to create a situation where Therefore, even if the section display part 67 is turned off, there is a possibility that it is the second section SC2. becomes possible.

In the B mode of the second section SC2, even if the pseudo bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6, or even if the ART state ST6 ends, the second section SC2 continues thereafter. Then, when the second section SC2 continues in this manner, the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighting state. This makes it possible for the player playing the slot machine 10 to recognize that the second section SC2 continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

In the first unit execution time ST12 in the ART state ST6, not only the initial number of games but also the additional number of games can be given. This makes it possible for the player to expect that a large number of games will be awarded as the number of continued games for the first unit execution times ST12. In this case, in the ART state ST6, the number of games to be added can be given in a plurality of first unit execution times ST12, and the total number of games to be added to the number of games to be added in one ART state ST6 is the maximum number of games (specifically, is limited to 170 games). As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive number of games from being awarded while making it possible to increase the number of first unit execution times ST12 in which the number of games to be added is awarded.

When the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the ART state ST6 is terminated even if the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 is not 0 games. This makes it possible to prevent the ART state ST6 from continuing excessively. In this case, the total number of additional games in one ART state ST6 is limited to the maximum number of games or less. As a result, in a situation where the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 is limited, it is possible to prevent the number of continuous games in the ART state ST6 from being biased toward the number of additional games.

The number of additional games provided in one execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is the number of games that is smaller than the maximum number of games of the number of additional games. As a result, it is possible to prevent the total number of games of the added game number to be awarded from reaching the maximum number of games by giving the added game number once. Therefore, it is possible to allow a plurality of execution times of the first unit execution times ST12 for which the additional number of games is awarded.

Winning in the continuation lottery process (step S3017) executed when the number of remaining continuation games of the first unit execution times ST12 is 0 games results in a new execution number of the first unit execution times ST12. is started. In this case, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of games is set to the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 by setting the maximum number of games with respect to the total number of games to be added as described above, It is possible to easily generate a situation in which the execution times of the first unit execution times ST12 are repeated.

When the execution times of the first unit execution time ST12 are executed 12 times, the next execution time becomes the second unit execution time ST13. Then, the continuation rate becomes 90% in the continuation lottery process (step S3017) executed when the number of remaining continuation games in the second unit execution times ST13 is 0 games. This continuation rate is higher than 80%, which is the highest continuation rate in the continuation lottery process (step S3017) executed in the first unit execution times ST12. This makes it possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the fact that the execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 have been repeated. In this case, in the configuration in which the upper limit number of games is set to the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 by setting the maximum number of games with respect to the total number of games to be added as described above, It is possible to easily generate a situation in which the execution times of the second unit execution times ST13 are repeated.

The maximum number of games that can be continued in the ART state ST6 is determined until the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are executed 13 times. The number of games is set to be less than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of games from the initial number of games in ST13. As a result, even in a configuration in which the upper limit number of games in the second section SC2 is set and the additional number of games can be given in the first unit execution times ST12, the number of execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is 13 or more. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the continuous lottery process (step S3017) is executed with a higher continuation rate than before.

In the second unit execution time ST13, the additional number of games is not awarded. As a result, by repeating the second unit execution times ST13, it is possible to provide many opportunities for the continuous lottery process (step S3017) to be executed at a high continuation rate.

Even if the number of additional games of 1 or more is selected in the additional lottery process (step S3302), the remaining number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is determined by the additional lottery process (step S3302). In S3302), if the number of games is not greater than the number of added games selected this time, the selected number of added games is invalidated without being added. In other words, the remaining number of add-on games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 is not set as an addition target, and the add-on lottery process (step S3302) does not result in an add-on win. Similarly, the number of additional games becomes 0 games. As a result, not only is it possible to reduce the number of additional games that can be generated in the first unit execution time ST12 in the current ART state ST6 to the maximum number of games or less, but also the first unit execution time ST12 in the subsequent execution time. Even if it is, it is possible to increase the possibility that the additional number of games will be awarded.

Even in a situation where it is not decided to start a new run of the first unit run ST12, the additional number of games to be given to the initial number of games of the new run is determined, and actually a new run is started. When the execution round is started, the determined additional game number is added to the initial game number of the new execution round. As a result, it is possible to determine in advance the number of additional games to be given when a new execution time is started, and when a new execution time is started, the new execution time is determined. Before is started, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of additional games.

Since the number of additional games to be awarded in the event that the next execution time is tentatively started before the final game of the current execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 is started is determined, the number of games currently being executed is determined. It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of additional games given to the execution time that can be executed next to the current execution time in the last game of the current execution time.

In the execution round currently being executed in the first unit execution round ST12, the number of additional games to be given to the execution round that can be executed next to the execution round is determined. As a result, since the number of additional games is determined only for the next possible execution, there is no need to cumulatively store a plurality of numbers of additional games.

When the final game of the current run in the first unit run ST12 is started, it is determined whether or not to start a new run after the end of the current run. As a result, it is possible to shorten the period from when it is decided to start a new execution cycle to when the new execution cycle is started.

When a new execution time is started in the first unit execution time ST12, in a configuration in which a continuous effect is executed in the final game of the current execution time, the content of the effect of the continuous effect is changed to the new execution time. The production content corresponds to the number of additional games given to. As a result, the player who has confirmed the continuous effect can not only know that a new execution round will start, but also can predict or grasp the number of additional games to be given to the new execution round. Become. This makes it possible to increase the attention of the player to the continuous effect.

When the second section SC2 ends based on the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends, the end preparation state ST7 is entered, and in the end preparation state ST7 After a predetermined number of games are played, the second section SC2 ends. As a result, even if the second section SC2 ends when the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends, the period is maintained in the second section SC2 after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends. can be generated.

The second section SC2 ends when one game is executed in the end preparation state ST7. This makes it possible to minimize the period during which the second section SC2 is maintained after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends.

When the second section SC2 ends by ending the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, when the second section SC2 ends by executing a predetermined number of games in the end preparation state ST7, the section display section 67 changes from the lit state to the extinguished state. As a result, even after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends, the lighting state of the section display section 67 can be maintained for a predetermined number of games.

Even if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without confirming the transition to the ART state ST6 in the second section SC2 of the A mode, the one-game end preparation state ST7 is entered after the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends. In the end preparation state ST7, the interval display portion 67 is maintained in the lighting state, so even in the timing after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped in the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the interval is displayed. The portion 67 is turned on. Thus, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in the situation where the effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed, the section is displayed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped. Even if the part 67 is checked, it cannot be specified that the transition to the ART state ST6 will not occur. Therefore, in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 in a situation where the effect indicating that the transition to the ART state ST6 is confirmed is not executed, the resurrection effect is performed at the timing when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely stopped. It is possible to make the player expect that the process will be executed, and it is possible to maintain the feeling of anticipation for the confirmation of the transition to the ART state ST6.

When the second section SC2 ends even in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 by satisfying the ending condition, and the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 accordingly ends, the ending condition is established, the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 ends, and the second section SC2 ends. This makes it possible to immediately end the second section SC2 when the ending condition is satisfied.

"The total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the second section SC2 continues ("0" in the situation where the game medium is not awarded)" to "the second section SC2 continues When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of game media consumed to execute the game in a state where the When the total number of net additions with limitation of the number of game media, which is the increase in the number of sheets of the predetermined difference from the predetermined reference value, exceeds the upper limit of the number of net additions (specifically, 2400). , the second section SC2 ends. This makes it possible to prevent the second section SC2 from continuing for an excessively long time. In this case, even in a game in which a replay prize has been established, it is determined whether or not the limited total net increase number of game media counted by the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400". be done. As a result, although the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d had already exceeded the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game prior to the game in which the replay winning was established, the second Even if the initialization process of the section SC2 has not been executed, it is specified that the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d exceeds the upper limit net increase number of "2400" in the game in which the subsequent replay winning has been established. , and the initialization process of the second section SC2 can be executed.

If any of the replay wins are established, the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 for updating the value of the total winning number counter 74d is not executed. In a game in which a replay winning prize is established, the game media owned by the player at the start of the game is used for setting bets, but as a profit from the replay winning establishment, the same number of bets as in the game in which the replay winning prize was established A new game can be played again with the number of bets. In other words, the number of game media owned by the player does not change in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In this case, the processing of steps S2008 to S2012 is not executed in a game in which a replay win has been established. It is possible to omit the execution of processing for changing , and it is possible to omit the execution of useless processing.

The second section SC2 also ends when the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games). As a result, even if it is determined that the total number of net increases with restrictions on the number of game media has reached the maximum number of net increases in a game in which a replay win has been established, and the second section SC2 ends, the second section SC2 is terminated. is caused by the number of continuous games in the second section SC2 reaching the upper limit number of games, and the second section SC2 ends in the game in which the replay winning has been established. Even if it does, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

When the start game of a new execution time of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is started, the second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76 each time the first waiting period and the second waiting period elapse, and addition lottery is performed. Processing (step S3213) is executed. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the addition lottery process (step S3213) while using the second random number circuit .

Not only is the first standby period secured as a fixed period, but also the second standby period is secured as a variable period from when the second random number is acquired once until the next second random number is acquired. be. The first standby period is set to be longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once. The period is set to 1.49 milliseconds, which is longer than the period required for one round. As a result, the update of the random number in the second random number circuit 76 is performed at least once between the acquisition of the second random number once and the next acquisition of the second random number. Even if the acquisition is repeated, it is possible to acquire any value of the second random number within the numerical range of "0 to 255" at each acquisition timing as the second random number. In addition, since the second waiting period is secured as a fluctuation period, it is possible to prevent the second random number acquisition timing from being biased within the range of one cycle of the second random number in the second random number circuit 76 . It becomes possible.

The second waiting period is varied using the previously acquired second random number. This makes it possible to vary the second standby period while suppressing complication of the configuration.

A variation numerical value is set based on the second random number obtained last time, and "15" is set as the number of repetitions. Then, the magnitude relationship between the variation value and the number of repetitions is determined, and the processing time of the determination process varies depending on whether the determination is positive or negative. Also, when the magnitude relationship is determined, the value of the number of repetitions is subtracted by 1, and when the number of repetitions is not "0", the magnitude relationship between the number of repetitions after the subtraction of 1 and the variation numerical value is again determined. be. On the other hand, when the number of repetitions is "0", the second random number is acquired from the second random number circuit 76, and the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed. This makes it possible to change the second waiting period by using the variation numerical value corresponding to the second random number obtained last time and the number of times the magnitude relationship is determined.

The maximum value of the variation numerical value and the initial value of the number of repetitions are the same. This makes it possible to set the second standby period to be a different period for different numerical values of variation.

<Second embodiment>
In this embodiment, the combination of symbols that establishes the first CB prize is different from that in the first embodiment. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 71(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the combination of symbols for establishing the first CB prize and the combination of symbols for establishing the second CB prize in this embodiment.

As in the first embodiment, the combination of symbols for the 2nd CB winning is that the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L is "White 7" and the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is "White 7" on the main line ML. This is a combination in which the stop symbol of the right reel 32R is the "BAR" symbol. On the left reel 32L, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "WHITE 7" pattern passes over the main line ML until the next "WHITE 7" pattern passes over the main line ML. Further, on the middle reel 32M, five or more symbols must pass the main line ML after the "WHITE 7" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "WHITE 7" symbol passes over the main line ML. Become. Also, on the right reel 32R, five or more symbols pass through the main line ML after the "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "BAR" symbol passes over the main line ML. Therefore, depending on the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the second CB prize may not be established even if the second CB combination is won.

On the other hand, the combination of symbols for the first CB prize is different from the above-described first embodiment. , and the stop symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol. In the left reel 32L, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML after the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 or less. . Further, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML after the "replay" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "replay" symbol passes over the main line ML on the middle reel 32M is 4 symbols or less. is. In the right reel 32R, the number of symbols passing through the main line ML after the "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML until the next "bell" symbol passes over the main line ML is 4 or less. is. Therefore, when the first CB combination is won, the first CB prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44.

FIG. 71(b) is a time chart showing the flow of the game when the first CB or second CB winning combination is won. FIG. 71(b1) shows a period during which a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, FIG. 71(b2) shows a period during which a game with a bet number of "2" is executed, and FIG. ) indicates the period during which the first CB combination is won, FIG. 71(b4) shows the period during which the second CB combination is won, and FIG. 71(b5) shows the first CB state ST2 or the second CB state. It shows the period of ST3.

First, the case where the first CB combination is won will be described.

At the timing of t1 when neither the first CB nor the second CB is won after the main MPU 72 has executed the all-clearing process (step S105), as shown in FIG. 71(b1). A game with a bet number of "3" is started. In this case, the first CB combination is won at the timing t1 as shown in FIG. 71(b3). After that, at the timing of t2, the current game ends as shown in FIG. 71(b1). In this case, the combination of symbols that has won the 1st CB role in the current game and also establishes the 1st CB prize is a combination of symbols that does not cause a so-called dropout. Therefore, when the first CB win is established at the timing of t2, the first CB winning state is canceled as shown in FIG. 71(b3) and the first CB state ST2 starts as shown in FIG. 71(b5). be done.

Next, the case where the second CB combination is won will be described.

At the timing of t3 when neither the first CB nor the second CB is won after the all-clearing process (step S105) is executed by the main MPU 72, as shown in FIG. 71(b2). A game with a bet number of "2" is started. In this case, the second CB combination is won at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 71(b4). After that, the game ends, but the combination of symbols that establishes the second CB prize is a combination of symbols that can cause a so-called dropout, and the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated at the stop operation timing that does not establish the second CB prize. As a result, the 2nd CB prize is not established. After that, at timing t4, a game with a bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 71(b2). The 2nd CB winning will not be established due to the operation.

After that, a game with the number of bets of "3" is started as shown in FIG. 71(b1) at timings t5 and t6 when the second CB combination is won. However, in a game where the number of bets is "3" even if the 2nd CB role is won, the 2nd CB prize is established regardless of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the stop operation timing of the stop buttons 42-44. do not. After that, at timing t7, a game with a bet number of "2" is started as shown in FIG. 71(b2). The 2nd CB winning will not be established due to the operation.

According to the above configuration, the game with the bet number of "2" is executed first to make the second CB combination winning state, and then the game with the bet number of "3" is started. Instead, when the game was played in an unusual game method in which the number of bets was "3" in a situation in which the second CB role was not won, the first CB role was won. The first CB win is surely established in the game, and the game shifts to the first CB state ST2 which is disadvantageous to the player. As a result, even if an attempt is made to obtain an illegal profit by playing a game with a bet number of "3" after illegally executing the all-clearing process (step S105), the transition to the first CB state ST2 occurs. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the fraudulent person to obtain fraudulent profits.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63 when neither the first CB nor the second CB win is won, and the image display device 63 when the first CB win is won. differs from that of the first embodiment in the processing configuration for displaying the first internal explicit image G13 displayed in . The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing internal notification switching control processing executed by the effect side MPU 92 . The switching control process of the internal notification is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, a cycle of 4 milliseconds) by the effect side MPU 92 .

First, it is determined whether or not an internal notification permission operation has occurred (step S3601). In this embodiment, the effect control device 90 mounted on the back surface of the front door 12 is provided with a notification permission switch, and the front door 12 is unlocked from the housing 11 to open the front door 12 in front of the slot machine 10. By opening the switch, the notification permission switch can be operated. Then, when the notification permission switch is operated to the ON position, an affirmative determination is made in step S3601. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, "1" is set to the internal notification permission flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 (step S3602). When the internal notification permission flag is set to "1", the display of the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 on the image display device 63 is enabled.

In the internal notification switching control process, it is determined whether or not an internal notification prohibiting operation has occurred (step S3603). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the notification permission switch provided in the effect control device 90 is operated to the OFF position. Then, when the notification permission switch is operated to the OFF position, an affirmative determination is made in step S3603. When an affirmative determination is made in step S3603, the internal notification permission flag of the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3604). When the value of the internal notification permission flag is "0", the non-internal notification image G12 is displayed on the image display device 63 even if neither the first CB nor the second CB combination is won. The first internal explicit image G13 is never displayed on the image display device 63 even in a situation where the first CB combination is won.

According to the above configuration, the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internal explicit image G13 can be displayed on the image display device 63 according to the winning state of each CB combination, and the non-internal notification image G12 regardless of the winning state of each CB combination. It is possible for the administrator of the gaming hall to switch between the state in which the notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 are not displayed on the image display device 63 . As a result, the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the winning state of each CB combination by displaying the non-internal notification image G12 or the first internal explicit image G13, while the manager of the gaming hall can grasp the winning state of each CB combination, while the cheating person and the player can be notified of each CB combination. It is possible to prevent the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 from being displayed regardless of the winning state.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, when transitioning to the end preparation state ST7, regardless of the game content in the game executed in the end preparation state ST7, after the end preparation state ST7 is completed, the state is shifted to the normal game state ST1. However, in this embodiment, it is possible that the ART state ST6 can be revived in the end preparation state ST7, which is shifted from the ART state ST6, depending on the game contents of the game executed in the end preparation state ST7. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing termination preparation state processing executed by the main MPU 72. FIG. It should be noted that the end preparation state process is executed in the end preparation state ST7 as a corresponding process (FIG. 26) when the game ends.

If any of the index values IV=5 to 10 is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game (step S3701: YES), ART revival lottery process is executed (step S3702). In the ART revival lottery process, it is decided by lottery whether or not to revive from the end preparation state ST7 to the ART state ST6. In this case, the winning index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game has a higher probability of winning an ART revival lottery in the ART revival lottery process.

If the result of the ART resurrection lottery process is ART resurrection winning (step S3703: YES), the continuation setting process for the ART state ST6 is executed (step S3704). In the continuation setting process, if the game state before shifting to the end preparation state ST7 is the first unit execution time ST12 of the ART state ST6, a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is generated. is executed, and if the game state before shifting to the end preparation state ST7 is the second unit execution time ST13 of the ART state ST6, a new execution time of the second unit execution time ST13 is generated. process. It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and regardless of the gaming state before transitioning to the end preparation state ST7, the transition to the start period ST11 may be made when returning to the ART state ST6.

After that, an ART restoration command is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3705). As a result, the effect-side MPU 92 operates the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that the effect corresponding to the destination game state is executed after the effect indicating that the ART state ST6 has been restored is executed. Control.

According to the above configuration, even if the ART state ST6 ends without the ending condition of the second section SC2 being satisfied and the transition to the end preparation state ST7 is made, the game executed in the end preparation state ST7 is executed based on the game content. The ART state ST6 may be revived. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained even in the end preparation state ST7.

<Fifth Embodiment>
This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the execution contents of the loop lottery process. The configuration different from that of the first embodiment will be described below. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is basically omitted.

FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 . In the timer interrupt process, a loop lottery process is executed in step S3806. That is, in the present embodiment, the loop lottery process is executed by the timer interrupt process that is started periodically (specifically, every 1.49 milliseconds). The processing contents of steps S3801 to S3805 and steps S3807 to S3815 are the same as the processing contents of steps S201 to S214 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11) in the first embodiment.

FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the loop lottery process executed in step S3806 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74).

First, it is determined whether or not the loop lottery completion flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3901). As in the first embodiment, the loop lottery process is a process for determining the initial number of games at the start of the game when new execution times of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in ART state ST6 are started. In the first embodiment, the number of initial games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is set to 29 games to 32 games, and the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3213) is executed in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) is Three times at maximum. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the initial number of games of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is set to 29 games to 1029 games, the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started. The maximum number of addition lottery processes (step S3911) to be executed is 1000 times. The loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is activated, and the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed for each execution of the loop lottery process (FIG. 75). is executed once.

The loop lottery completion flag specifies whether or not the addition lottery process (step S3911) triggered by the start of new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is completed by the main MPU 72. is a flag for At the timing when the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started, the value of the completion flag of the loop lottery is "0", and the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are started. If the execution of the addition lottery process (step S3911) triggered by is completed, that is, if the addition lottery process (step S3911) does not win the addition lottery, or the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) ends When the reference number is reached, the loop lottery completion flag is set to "1". If the loop lottery completion flag is set to "1" (step S3901: YES), there is no need to execute the addition lottery process (step S3911), so this loop lottery process ends.

If the completion flag of the loop lottery is not set to "1" (step S3901: NO), it is determined whether or not the current game is the starting game of the new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 (step S3902). . If an affirmative determination is made in step S3902, in steps S3903 to S3908, a second waiting period is generated before the process (step S3909) of acquiring the second random number used in executing the addition lottery process (step S3910). Execute the process to make it possible.

In the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment, when the second random number is repeatedly obtained, forcibly A first waiting period and a second waiting period are set as the waiting period. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is activated, and the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once. On the other hand, the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed once. Since the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 74) is started at a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, at least the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 74) is executed after the second random number is obtained once and before the second random number is obtained next time. A waiting period equivalent to the activation cycle occurs. This period corresponds to the first standby period in the first embodiment. That is, since the first waiting period is secured by the activation cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74), there is no need to execute processing for securing the first waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75). 1.49 milliseconds, which is the activation period of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74), is longer than the period required for the second random number circuit 76 to update the second random number once.

The processing (steps S3903 to S3908) for generating the second waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is for generating the second waiting period in the loop lottery process (FIG. 65) in the first embodiment. (steps S3205 to S3210). Specifically, "15", which is the number of repetitions, is set in the repetition number counter 74g (see FIG. 9) of the main RAM 74 (step S3903). In the loop lottery process (FIG. 75), acquisition of the second random number from the second random number circuit 76 can be repeated as already described. When the second random number is obtained repeatedly, the first waiting period (timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 74 ) is ensured, and a second standby period is ensured as a period of variation. Even if the second waiting period reaches the maximum value, it is shorter than the first waiting period, more specifically shorter than the first waiting period. However, without being limited to this, the second standby period may be the same as the first standby period, or the second standby period may be longer than the first standby period. The standby period may be configured to always be longer than the first standby period.

After that, the second random number obtained in the previous step S3910 is read out from the second random number obtaining area of the main RAM 74 (step S3904). Note that after the partial clearing process (step S104) or the full clearing process (step S105) of the main RAM 74 is executed, the second random number acquisition area contains a second random number having a decimal value of "0". will be stored. Thereafter, the lower 4-bit numerical value of the 8-bit second random number read in step S3904 is stored in the register of the main MPU 72 as the variation numerical value (step S3905). In this case, since the variation numerical value is 4-bit numerical information, the minimum value is “0” and the maximum value is “15”.

After that, it is determined whether or not the variation value stored in the register of the main MPU 72 is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g of the main RAM 74 (step S3906). If the variation numerical value is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g (step S3906: YES), the process proceeds to step S3907 by a JUMP instruction. : NO), the process proceeds to step S3907 by a NOP command. In step S3907, 1 is subtracted from the value of the repetition number counter 74g. If the value of the repetition number counter 74g after subtracting 1 is 1 or more (step S3908: NO), the process returns to step S3906, and if the value of the repetition number counter 74g after subtracting 1 is "0" ( Step S3908: YES), and proceeds to step S3909.

As described above, the process proceeds to step S3907 regardless of whether the determination in step S3906 is affirmative or the determination in step S3906 is negative. is executed, the processing time required to proceed to the processing of step S3907 is longer by about 10 microseconds. Then, depending on whether or not the variation numerical value determined as the lower four bits of the second random number obtained last time is smaller than the value of the repetition number counter 74g as described above, the JUMP instruction is executed and the NOP instruction is executed. There are cases where it is executed. Further, the value of the repetition number counter 74g is decremented by 1 each time the process of step S3907 is executed, and the processes of steps S3906 and S3907 are repeated until the value of the repetition number counter 74g after the decrement of 1 becomes "0". . As a result, the ratio between the number of times the JUMP instruction is executed in step S3906 and the number of times the NOP instruction is executed in step S3906 out of the 15 repetition times is calculated as the value of the lower 4 bits of the second random number obtained last time. As a result, the second standby period can be varied.

In step S3909, 1 is added to the value of the lottery execution counter provided in the main side RAM74. The lottery execution counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the number of times the addition lottery process (step S3911) has been executed in the current start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

After that, the second random number at that time is obtained from the second random number circuit 76 and stored in the second random number obtaining area of the main RAM 74 (step S3910). After that, addition lottery processing is executed (step S3911). In the addition lottery process, an addition lottery table stored in advance in the main ROM 73 is read, and a second random number is collated against the read addition lottery table, so that the second random number is set in the addition lottery table. It is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information. Only one addition lottery table is provided, and the winning numerical value information is set so that the probability of winning an addition lottery in the addition lottery process is 60%. Here, the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game does not affect the addition lottery process. ), the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) in the current game may affect the addition lottery process.

If addition lottery processing (step S3911) does not result in addition winning (step S3912: NO), after setting the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 to "1" (step S3915), this loop lottery processing is executed. finish. As a result, the loop lottery process for the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 ends. Note that the completion flag of the loop lottery is cleared to "0" when the final game of the execution times to be started this time in the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 ends.

If addition lottery processing (step S3911) results in addition winning (step S3912: YES), 1 is added to the value of the initial addition counter of main side RAM 74 (step S3913). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter of the main RAM 74 is "1000", which is the end reference number (step S3914). As already explained, the initial number of games for unit execution times ST12 and ST13 in this embodiment is 29 games to 1029 games, so the maximum number of games that can be added as the initial number of games in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is 1000. In addition to being a game, the maximum number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) is 1000 times. When the value of the lottery execution counter is "1000" (step S3914: YES), the number of addition lottery processes (step S3911) executed in the current start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is Since it means that the maximum number of 1000 times has been reached, the loop lottery completion flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3915), and then this loop lottery process is terminated.

If the value of the lottery execution counter has not reached "1000" (step S3914: NO), it is determined whether or not the value of the lottery execution counter has reached "500", which is the midway start reference number (step S3916). . If the value of the lottery execution counter has reached "500", which is the halfway start reference number (step S3916: YES), the loop lottery continuation flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3917). .

In this embodiment, as already explained, the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed once each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is started. The addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed once. Since the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 74) is started at a cycle of 1.49 milliseconds, at least the timer interrupt processing (Fig. 74) is executed after the second random number is obtained once and before the second random number is obtained next time. A waiting period equivalent to the activation cycle occurs. Then, at least 1.49 seconds are required until the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 1000, which is the end reference number. In this case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated until the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 1000 times, which is the end reference number, in the start game in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. If the configuration is such that the start of the game is awaited, the time required until the end of the start game becomes longer.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500, which is the halfway start reference number, the loop lottery continuation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". By making it possible to advance to the process of starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is not completed. Rotation of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R is started even if the As a result, it is possible to prevent the waiting time for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from becoming excessively long.

Even after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to rotate as described above, the result of the addition lottery process (step S3911) is a negative result, or the value of the lottery execution counter is the end reference number of "1000". , the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) is activated and the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) is executed. Then, after the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have started to rotate, the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are newly executed, including the number of games awarded by winning in the addition lottery process (step S3911). , the initial number of games is set. As a result, it is possible to provide a large number of games as the initial number of games while preventing the waiting time for the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from becoming excessively long.

The difference between the halfway start reference number "500" and the end reference number "1000" is "500". The longest time assumed to be required for the addition lottery process (step S3911) to be executed 500 times is about 1.8 seconds based on the activation cycle of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74) and the second waiting period. becomes. On the other hand, the shortest time required from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to the completion of stopping of all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is 2 seconds. Therefore, even if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can start rotating in a situation where the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is not completed, the unit execution times ST12 , and ST13, the addition lottery processing (step S3911) in the new unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is surely completed by the time the start game of the new execution time ST13 ends.

FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing processing for starting the current set in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72 . In the above-described first embodiment, the processing for starting the current set (FIG. 68) is configured to be executed in the starting game of a new execution round in the first unit execution round ST12 or the second unit execution round ST13. However, in the present embodiment, the current set start processing (FIG. 76) is executed in the starting game of a new execution time in the first unit execution time ST12 or the second unit execution time ST13 and the next game. be.

If the current game is the start game of a new run in the unit runs ST12 and ST13 (step S4001: YES), it is determined whether or not the loop lottery continuation flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1" ( step S4002). If the loop lottery continuation flag is not set to "1" (step S4002: NO), it is determined whether or not the loop lottery completion flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4003). If negative determinations are made in both steps S4002 and S4003, the result of the addition lottery process (step S3911) for this execution time has not yet resulted in a loss, and the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed. It means that the number of times has not yet reached the halfway start reference number. In this case, the processing of steps S4002 and S4003 is repeated.

If the result of the addition lottery process (step S3911) for the current execution time is a negative result, the completion flag of the loop lottery in the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", thereby making an affirmative determination in step S4003. Then, the process proceeds to step S4004. In step S4004, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "29", which is the minimum number of initial games.

Thereafter, the value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4005). In the initial addition counter, the number of games to be added to the initial number of games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) executed when the current game is started is set. Note that the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0" after executing the process of step S4005.

After that, it is determined whether or not the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is 11 or less (step S4006). If the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4006: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4007). Thereafter, the value of the addition counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S4008).

The add-on counter 74h is set with the number of add-on games selected in the next set of add-on processing (FIG. 67) executed in the game in which the previous run in the first unit run ST12 is started. Therefore, when the first unit execution time ST12 is continued and a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, 1 is set at the start of the first unit execution time ST12 in the newly started execution time. On condition that the number of games to be added is one or more, the selected number of games to be added is added to the initial number of games of the newly started first unit execution ST12.

If a negative determination is made in step S4006, or if the process of step S4008 is executed, a command to start unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4008). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the number of continued games (that is, the value set in the ART continuation counter) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this display, the number of games to be added is notified after the number of games to be added is first notified.

On the other hand, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500, which is the halfway start reference number, the loop lottery continuation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1", and the process proceeds to step S4002. affirmative determination is made and the process proceeds to step S4010. In step S4010, the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 is set to "29", which is the minimum number of initial games.

After that, it is determined whether or not the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 by determining whether or not the value of the completion counter of the main RAM 74 is 11 or less (step S4011). If the current state is the first unit execution time ST12 (step S4011: YES), the value of the addition counter 74h of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4012). Thereafter, the value of the addition counter 74h is cleared to "0" (step S4013).

If a negative determination is made in step S4011, or if the process of step S4013 is executed, a command to start unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4014). Thereby, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect corresponding to the start of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the provisional number of continued games (that is, the value set in the ART continuation counter) in the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13.

As described above, even if the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the current execution time is not completed by reaching 500 times, which is the halfway start reference number, When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started, the value of the initial addition counter is not added to the initial number of games. Addition of the value of the initial addition counter is executed in the game next to the start game in the current execution round.

Specifically, if it is the second game in the current execution round (step S4015: YES), on condition that the loop lottery continuation flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4016: YES). ), the value of the initial addition counter of the main RAM 74 is added to the ART continuation counter of the main RAM 74 (step S4017). In the initial addition counter, the number of games to be added to the initial number of games selected in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) executed in the start game of the current execution is set. Note that the value of the initial addition counter is cleared to "0" after executing the process of step S4017.

Thereafter, an addition command in which information on the number of games to be added to the initial number of games is set is transmitted to the effect side MPU 92 (step S4018). As a result, the effect side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62 and the image display device 63 to execute the effect indicating that the number of games to be continued in the current execution time is increased by the amount of the addition. Then, the number of continuous games after the increase is displayed on the image display device 63 .

As described above, even if the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the current execution time is not completed by reaching 500 times, which is the halfway start reference number, When the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started in the start game of the new execution times of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the addition lottery process (step S3911) is performed in the game next to the start game. ) is given as the number of games to be continued for the current execution. As a result, it is possible to diversify the situation in which the number of continuous games is notified in the situation where the number of games corresponding to the addition is given, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process (step S3911) reaches 500 times, which is the reference number for midway start, the number of games for the addition is given in the next game to the start game of the new execution time. to be notified. As a result, when the number of games to be added is given in the next game for the starting game of the new execution, the number of games to be given is as large as 500 games or more. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the notification that the additional number of games will be awarded in the next game to the start game of the round.

In the above embodiment, when the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) has not been periodically executed and the number of executions of the addition lottery process reaches the halfway start reference number, is configured such that after the start game of unit execution times ST12 and ST13 is notified that the initial number of games is 29 games, the number of games to be added to the initial number of games is notified in the next game. However, when the number of executions of the addition lottery process reaches the midway start reference number, the number of initial games including the number of games for addition at that point in the starting game is notified, and the next number of games is notified. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of games for the remaining addition is notified in the game.

Also, the termination reference number is not limited to "1000" and may be a value smaller than "1000" or a value larger than "1000". If the value is greater than "1000", the addition lottery process (step S3911) in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) has not been periodically executed, and the unit execution times ST12 and ST13 are newly executed. The starting game may end. In this case, multiple games may be executed in a situation where the periodical execution of the addition lottery process in the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) has not been completed. In this configuration, the increase in the initial number of games due to the addition lottery process may be notified in a game that is started after the periodical execution of the addition lottery process is completed, as in the above embodiment. . Further, at the start of each game that is started in a situation where the addition lottery process has not been completed periodically, an increase in the number of initial games determined in the game immediately preceding the game may be notified. good.

Further, the loop lottery process (FIG. 75) may be configured so that the processes of steps S3903 to S3908 are not executed. In this case, measurement of the second standby period is not performed. Therefore, the addition lottery process (step S3911) is executed at the interrupt period of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 74).

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the description of each embodiment described above, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, it may be changed as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination. In addition, the configurations of the above embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following other forms may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration in which the configurations of the above embodiments are combined with each other. good.

(1) Although the first predetermined number is "3" and the second predetermined number is "2", the specific values of the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number are arbitrary. Further, the first predetermined number is not limited to a number larger than the second predetermined number, and the first predetermined number may be a number smaller than the second predetermined number.

(2) Although the first CB state ST2 is a game state in which the game media owned by the player is reduced, it may be a game state in which the game media owned by the player are not increased or decreased. The number of game media to be played may be increased, but the number of increased game media may be very small, such as one or two.

In addition, in the game executed in the first CB state ST2, the number of game media provided in the game is larger than the bet number (specifically, "3") set to start the game. However, due to the low probability of winning a combination that allows the awarding of the game media, in the first CB state ST2 as a whole, the game media owned by the player are not increased or decreased, or the game media owned by the player are reduced. It is good also as a structure which will decrease.

(3) The second CB state ST3 is a game state in which the game media owned by the player is reduced, but it may be a game state in which the game media owned by the player are not increased or decreased. The number of game media to be played may be increased, but the number of increased game media may be very small, such as one or two. It is good also as a structure which is.

In addition, in the game executed in the second CB state ST3, the number of game media provided in the game is larger than the bet number (specifically, "2") set to start the game. However, due to the low probability of winning a combination that allows the provision of the game media, the second CB state ST3 as a whole does not increase or decrease the game media owned by the player, or increases or decreases the game media owned by the player. It is good also as a structure which will decrease.

(4) When the CB states ST2 and ST3 are entered in the middle of the ART state ST6, the ART state ST6 is temporarily interrupted, and the number of games executed in the CB states ST2 and ST3 is counted from the remaining number of continuous games in the ART state ST6. Although it is configured not to be decremented, it is not limited to this, and when the CB states ST2 and ST3 occur in the middle of the ART state ST6, the number of games executed in the CB states ST2 and ST3 is the number of games executed in the ART state ST6. It may be configured such that it is subtracted from the remaining number of continuous games. This makes it possible to reduce the disadvantage of shifting to the CB states ST2 and ST3 in the middle of the ART state ST6. Further, this configuration may also be applied to the case where the CB states ST2 and ST3 occur in the middle of the pseudo-bonus state ST5.

(5) In the third embodiment, when the front door 12 is opened, the permission flag for internal notification in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1", and when the front door 12 is closed, the effect side RAM 94 , the internal notification permission flag may be cleared to "0". In this case, the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 can be displayed on the image display device 63 simply by opening the front door 12 .

(6) In the third embodiment, when a predetermined effect button provided on the front surface of the front door 12 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds), internal notification in the effect side RAM 94 The permission flag may be set to "1", and the internal notification permission flag in the effect-side RAM 94 may be cleared to "0" by operating an operation unit other than the predetermined effect button. In this case, the non-internal notification image G12 and the first internal explicit image G13 are displayed on the image display device 63 only by continuously pressing the predetermined effect button without requiring the opening operation of the front door 12. It is possible to switch between a state in which the images G12 and G13 are not displayed.

(7) A configuration may be adopted in which the winning state of at least one of the first CB and second CB hands is notified while the set value update process (step S106) is being performed. For example, when the set value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation where the second CB winning data is not stored in the main RAM 74, the image display device 63 notifies that the second CB winning combination has not been won. It may be configured to be executed. By configuring the notification to end when the set value update process (step S106) ends, the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed is limited to the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed. It becomes possible to Further, for example, when the set value update process (step S106) is executed in a situation where the first CB winning data is stored in the main RAM 74, the image display device 63 indicates that the first CB winning has been won. It is good also as a structure by which alerting|reporting is performed. By configuring the notification to end when the set value update process (step S106) ends, the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed is limited to the period during which the set value update process (step S106) is executed. It becomes possible to

(8) In a situation where the second CB combination is not won, the image display device 63 may display a procedure for making the second CB combination won. In this case, if neither the first CB role nor the second CB role is won, the second CB role is won by executing a game in which the number of bets is "2", and the second CB role is won in the winning game. It is notified that a game with a bet number of "3" should be executed after that without establishing a prize. In addition, when the first CB role is won, the first CB prize is established by executing the game with the number of bets of "3", and the state is shifted to the first CB state ST2, and the first CB state ST2 is extinguished. You will be notified of what to do. Then, when the first CB state ST2 is completed, a game with the number of bets of "2" is executed to win the second CB role, and the second CB prize is not established in the winning game. Furthermore, after that, it is notified that a game with a bet number of "3" should be executed. As a result, it is possible to prompt a situation in which the second CB combination is won. In addition, by applying the configuration to the configuration of the third embodiment or the configuration of (5) to (7) above, the target to be encouraged to be in a situation where the second CB role is won is managed by the game hall. It is possible to limit

(9) In a situation where the 2nd CB role is not won, if the 2nd CB role is won and the 2nd CB prize is not established, a notification indicating that the 2nd CB role has been won is executed. may be As the notification, for example, a notification sound such as “Complete” may be output from the speaker 62 .

(10) When a game with a bet number of “2” is executed in a situation where the second CB combination is won, the image display device 63 may be configured to notify the player accordingly. For example, as the notification, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before. Further, when a game with the number of bets of “2” is executed in a situation where the first CB combination is won, the image display device 63 may execute a notification corresponding to the game. For example, as the notification, the display image of the image display device 63 may be displayed darker than before.

(11) In a situation where the second CB combination is won, if the number of bets becomes "2", then the operation of the start lever 41 may be invalidated. The invalid period is arbitrary, but may be 10 seconds, for example. In this case, it is possible to reduce the possibility that a game in which the number of bets is “2” is executed even though the second CB combination has already been won. In addition, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the speaker 62 or the image display device 63 announces that the second CB combination has already been won during the invalid period, and the announcement is made when the start lever 41 is operated during the invalid period. It may be configured to be executed triggered by the event.

(12) When the game starts in the first section SC1, it is determined to shift to the second section SC2 at the start of the game, and the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the start of the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined to shift to the second section SC2 at the start of the game, and transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. Further, it may be configured such that the transition to the second section SC2 is determined at the end of the game and the transition to the second section SC2 occurs at the end of the game. In this case, it is possible to increase the number of games played in the first section SC1.

(13) In the game executed in the first section SC1, if any winning combination is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the transition to the second section SC2 is ensured. It is not limited to this, and when winning a role with a difference in winning probability depending on the set value of "1" to "6", the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur and "1" to "6" A set value of "6" may be configured such that when a winning combination with no difference in winning probability is won, a transition to the second section SC2 occurs. As a result, it is possible to prevent the frequency of transition to the second section SC2 from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the set value. Also, if a winning combination with no difference in winning probability is won according to the set values of "1" to "6", the transition to the second section SC2 does not occur, and the set values of "1" to "6" are used. A configuration may be adopted in which a transition to the second section SC2 occurs when a winning combination with a difference in winning probability is won. As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the frequency of transition to the second section SC2 to be advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the set value.

(14) If the game is executed in the first section SC1, the transition to the second section SC2 may occur regardless of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). This makes it possible to cause the transition to the second section SC2 to occur early.

(15) When the game is executed in the first section SC1, a transition lottery process to the second section SC2 is executed, and transition to the second section SC2 occurs by winning the transition lottery process in the transition lottery process. may be configured. As a result, it is possible to adjust the easiness of transition to the second section SC2 according to the probability of winning transition. In addition, the probability of winning the transition lottery in the transition lottery process may or may not fluctuate according to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). In the case of a configuration that changes according to the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16), the winning of the index value IV with the low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) shifts to the second section SC2. By increasing the probability of winning, it is possible to increase the advantage of winning an index value IV with a low winning probability in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16). In addition, the transfer lottery process may not be executed when none of the index values IV is won in the winning lottery process (FIG. 16).

(16) When a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, a shift to the second section SC2 may occur. Although the configuration is such that the transition to the interval SC2 does not occur, the present invention is not limited to this, and the transition to the second interval SC2 occurs even when the game with the number of bets of "2" is executed. It is good also as a structure which obtains. In this case, the probability that the transition to the second interval SC2 occurs is the same or substantially the same in the case where the game with the bet number of "3" is executed and the case where the game with the bet number of "2" is executed. It is good also as a structure which is. In addition, the probability of transition to the second interval SC2 is higher in the case where the game with the bet number of "3" is executed than in the case where the game with the bet number of "2" is executed. may be configured. In addition, the probability of transition to the second interval SC2 is higher when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed than when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. may be configured.

(17) When a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, a shift to an advantageous gaming state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, and ART state ST6) may occur. ” is executed, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur. It is also possible to have a configuration in which a transition to an advantageous game state can occur. In this case, the probability of transition to an advantageous gaming state is the same or substantially the same when a game with a bet number of "3" is played and when a game with a bet number of "2" is played. A certain configuration may be used. Further, when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed, the probability of transition to an advantageous gaming state is higher than when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed. may be In addition, the probability of transition to an advantageous gaming state is higher when a game with a bet number of "2" is executed than when a game with a bet number of "3" is executed. may be

(18) It may be configured such that the setting value currently set can be confirmed by executing the setting confirmation process based on the setting confirmation operation performed by the manager of the gaming hall. . For example, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 57 and turned on while the main MPU 72 is being supplied with operating power, the setting confirmation process is executed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the currently set value is displayed on the combined display section 66 . In this configuration, the partial clearing process (step S104) may be performed when the setting confirmation process is performed. When the partial clearing process is executed, the first CB winning data is erased, but the second CB winning data and the information of the set value are not erased. As a result, it is possible to check the set value currently set while preventing the second CB winning data from being erased.

(19) In the partial clearing process (step S104), the data to be excluded from the information to be erased is not limited to the second CB winning data, and the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 may also be excluded. . As a result, even if the power is once turned off after the intrusion abnormality notification is started, and the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed when the power is turned on after that, the intrusion abnormality notification is restarted. Become. In this case, in order to prevent the intrusion abnormality notification from being restarted, it is necessary to perform the all clear processing (step S105). Data will be erased.

(20) If the intrusion abnormality flag of the main side RAM 74 is set to "1", then the progress of the game may be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued even though the intrusion abnormality has occurred.

(21) A configuration in which predetermined information is left and other information is erased when the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed may be applied to a slot machine having a plurality of RT states. For example, if a specific number of games are played without transitioning to a state that is advantageous to the player, the state shifts to the ceiling RT state in which the probability of replay winning and replay winning is higher than before, and the winning lottery process (Fig. 16), when the player wins a predetermined role, the player is shifted to a predetermined RT state in which the probability of winning a replay and winning a replay becomes higher than before, when the partial clearing process (step S104) is executed. The flag indicating the ceiling RT state may not be cleared to "0", but the flag indicating the predetermined RT state may be cleared to "0". In this case, the setting value update process (step S106) is executed, so that the ceiling RT state can be continued even if the partial clear process (step S104) is executed. Also, even with this configuration, when the all clearing process (step S105) is executed, both the flag indicating the ceiling RT state and the flag indicating the predetermined RT state are cleared to "0". It may be configured to be

(22) A configuration may be adopted in which the transition to the second section SC2 may occur under the condition that the second CB role is won, and pseudo conditions that the second CB role is won. A configuration in which transitions to the bonus state ST5 and the ART state ST6 can occur may be employed. In this case, it is possible to increase the importance of winning the second CB combination.

Further, in the situation where the first CB role is won, the transition to the second section SC2 may not occur, and in the situation where the first CB role is won, even the second section SC2 is in a pseudo bonus state. A configuration in which transition to ST5 and ART state ST6 does not occur may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of winning the first CB combination.

(23) As the lottery mode, the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode are set so that the probability of winning a replay is different, but the lottery mode may not be set. In this case, the AT state may exist instead of the ART state ST6 as a game state advantageous to the player. In this configuration, there is no need to shift to the preparation state ST4 before shifting to the pseudo-bonus state ST5, so the normal game state ST1 is directly shifted to the pseudo-bonus state ST5. Also, when the normal game state ST1 is changed to the AT state, the normal game state ST1 may be directly changed to the AT state, and the preparation state ST4 does not need to be intervened. Since the preparation state ST4 does not exist in this configuration, the minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the AT state is 761 games in the A mode of the second section SC2, and the AT state in the B mode of the second section SC2. The minimum value assumed as the maximum number of continuous games in the AT state when the state occurs only once is 842 games. 956 games. In this case, in the AT state, as in the ART state ST6, the start period ST11, the first unit execution time ST12, and the second unit execution time ST13 are executed. Since 170 games are set as the maximum number of games of the total number of games to be added in the number of games to be added in the time ST12, it is possible to leave room for the occurrence of the second unit execution time ST13.

(24) The lottery mode becomes the non-internal medium mode when the 1st CB and 2nd CB roles are not won, and the lottery mode becomes the internal medium mode when the 1st CB role or the 2nd CB role is won. good too. In this case, the internal middle mode is a mode in which the winning probability of the replay combination and the replay winning probability are higher than those in the non-internal middle mode. In addition, in the internal medium mode, when the transition condition is satisfied based on the result of the winning lottery process, the state is shifted from the non-AT state to the AT state, and when the number of games completed in the AT state reaches the predetermined number of games, or the AT state It is configured such that the state is shifted to a non-AT state when a predetermined end-corresponding winning is established in the state.

Further, in the winning state of the first CB combination or the winning state of the second CB combination, the lottery mode may be either the first internal RT mode or the second internal RT mode. In this case, the second internal medium RT mode is configured to have a higher probability of winning a replay combination and a higher replay winning probability than the first internal medium RT mode. In addition, in the first internal RT mode, when the transition condition is satisfied based on the result of the winning lottery process, the mode is shifted to the second internal RT mode, and the number of games completed in the second internal RT mode is a predetermined number of games. It is configured to shift to the first internal medium RT mode when the number is reached. Also, the configuration is such that the AT state does not occur in the first internal RT mode, while the AT state occurs in the second internal RT mode.

(25) Although there are three types of stay modes, A mode, B mode, and C mode, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which is more than a kind.

(26) In the B mode of the stay mode, the first ceiling game number and the second ceiling game number are set, but the third ceiling game number may be further set. , and the number of ceiling games for the fourth time may be further set. Further, the number of ceiling games for the second and subsequent times may be set regardless of the type of stay mode.

(27) In the case of the B mode, when the first advantageous game state (pseudo-bonus state ST5 or ART state ST6) is completed, the second ceiling game number is surely set. There is no limitation, and when the first advantageous gaming state ends, the set lottery process is executed, and the set lottery process wins (for example, a probability of 50%), thereby setting the number of ceiling games for the second time. It may be configured to be

(28) Although it is configured that a period in which the section display unit 67 is in the off state can occur even in the second section SC2, the present invention is not limited to this. The section display section 67 may be configured to be in a lighting state.

(29) An advantageous display section is provided separately from the section display section 67, and the section display section 67 is always lit when the second section SC2, and the section display section 67 is always lit when the first section SC1. is turned off, the advantageous display portion is always lit when the advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5 and ART state ST6) is established, and the advantageous display portion is always illuminated when the advantageous game state is not established. It is good also as composition which will be in a light-extinguishing state.

(30) In the B mode, when the first advantageous game state is completed and the normal game state is entered, the interval display unit 67 is once turned off. It may be configured to be in a lighting state again.

(31) Although the maximum number of games is set to the total number of games that can be added to the number of games that can occur in the first unit execution time ST12, a plurality of groups are set as the number of execution times of the first unit execution time ST12. , the maximum number of games may be set for each group. For example, the 1st to 4th times of the first unit execution times ST12 are set to the first group, the 5th to 8th times of the first unit execution times ST12 are set to the second group, and the 9th to 12th times of the first unit execution times ST12. is the third group, and the maximum number of games for each of the first, second, and third groups is set to 60 games. As a result, it is possible to easily award the additional number of games even in the execution times after the first unit execution times ST12. Further, in this configuration, if the total number of games added to the number of games in the first group does not reach the maximum number of games, the remaining maximum number of games may be added to the maximum number of games in the second group. Alternatively, if the total number of additional games in the second group does not reach the maximum number of games, the remaining maximum number of games is added to the maximum number of games in the third group.

(32) The timing at which the number of additional games to be added to the number of initial games is determined in the first unit execution time ST12 is not limited to the start of the start game of the immediately preceding execution time, but the end of the start game. , or it may be a game after the start game of the immediately preceding run. However, by determining the number of additional games that can occur next to the current execution time at a timing before the last game of the immediately preceding execution time, It is possible to execute the continuous effect with the effect contents corresponding to the number of games added to the above.

Further, when a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 is started, the number of games to be added to the execution time that can be executed after the new execution time is not limited to the configuration in which the number of games to be executed is determined. When a new execution round of the execution round ST12 is started, the configuration may be such that the initial number of games to be executed after the new execution round is determined.

(33) Regardless of whether or not a new execution of the first unit executions ST12 occurs, the number of additional games to be awarded when the new execution occurs is before the new execution. In the configuration in which it is determined by the number of execution times, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, in a situation where it is not determined whether or not a new execution time will occur, an effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed in the previous execution time. The effect may be an effect that clearly indicates the number of games to be added, or an effect that suggests the number of games to be added. In this case, it is possible to indicate or indicate the number of additional games to be given in the event that a new execution is to occur in the current execution. Further, the timing of executing this effect is arbitrary, and for example, it may be executed in the start game of the currently executed execution time, or may be executed in the middle of the game.

(34) The number of additional games to be awarded in each run of the first unit run ST12 is determined before the start of the first run of the first unit run ST12, such as when the start period ST11 ends. It may be configured to be In this case, each time a new execution round of the first unit execution round ST12 is started, a previously determined additional number of games is awarded.

(35) In the final game of each of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the continuation lottery process for determining whether or not to generate a new execution time is executed. It is good also as a structure which can perform a continuation lottery process also in. Further, if the result of the winning lottery process (FIG. 16) is a predetermined result in each game in each of the unit execution times ST12 and ST13, the continuous lottery process may be executed.

(36) When a resurrection effect indicating transition to ART state ST6 is generated in the pseudo-bonus state ST5, the resurrection effect starts after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating in the final game of the pseudo-bonus state ST5. However, after the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is over, the resurrection effect may be started when the bet setting of the game medium is performed in order to start the first game in the ART state ST6. good. Even in this case, if the pseudo-bonus state ST5 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST6, the end-preparing state ST7 is executed over one game after the end of the pseudo-bonus state ST5, and the end-preparing state ST7 is executed. Since the section display section 67 is maintained in the lighted state until the end of ST5, even if it is confirmed whether or not the section display section 67 is in the lighted state after the final game in the pseudo-bonus state ST5 is completed, the resurrection effect is not performed. It is not possible to specify whether it will occur or not.

(37) The number of games in which the end preparation state ST7 continues is not limited to one game, and may be two games, three games, or four games or more. Further, there may be a plurality of types of numbers of continuous games in the ready-to-end state ST7, and the ready-to-end state ST7 may be maintained for the number of continuous games selected by lottery from the multiple types of numbers of continuous games.

(38) In the second control process of the game section (FIG. 47), when a replay win is established, the updating process (steps S2008 to S2012) of the total winning number counter 74d of the main side RAM 74 is not executed. , the update process may be executed. In this case, when a replay win is established, the number of bets for the current game is subtracted from the total winning number counter 74d in step S2008, and the number of betting for this game is added to the total winning number counter 74d in step S2010. It will be done. Therefore, even if the updating process is executed, the value of the total acquisition number counter 74d remains constant.

(39) In the loop lottery process, the variation numerical value is the lower 4 bits of the previous second random number, but it is not limited to this, and the variation numerical value is the upper 4 bits of the previous second random number. It may be a configuration, or may be a configuration in which the middle order is 4 bits.

(40) In the loop lottery process, the variation numerical value is determined based on the previous second random number, but it is not limited to this, and may be determined based on the second random number before the previous one. Well, it is good also as a structure determined based on the last 2nd random number, and the 2nd random number of the time before last.

(41) In the loop lottery process, a numerical lottery process may be executed to determine the variation numerical value. Even in this case, it is possible to change the variation numerical value.

(42) In the loop lottery process, when executing the process for generating the second waiting period, after first setting the repetition number counter 74g of the main side RAM 74 to "15", the variation numerical value and the repetition number counter 74g The value of the repetition number counter 74g is decremented by 1 each time the judgment is made, and when the value of the repetition number counter 74g becomes "0", it is judged that the second waiting period has passed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, the repetition number counter 74g is set to "0", and thereafter each time the magnitude relationship is determined, the value of the repetition number counter 74g is incremented by 1 and the repetition is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that the second standby period has elapsed when the value of the number counter 74g becomes "15".

(43) In the case of shifting to the second section SC2, the second section SC2 is not terminated without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the second section SC2 may end without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state ST5 or the ART state ST6 even if the second section SC2 is entered.

(44) In the second section SC2, the section display section 67 is in a lighting state (that is, in a display state). That is, it may be configured to be in a non-display state). Further, in this case, the combined display unit 66 may be configured to display information corresponding to the type of abnormal state. In such a configuration in which the shared display section 66 and the section display section 67 are collectively provided in the common display area 68, the section display section 67 is extinguished when a predetermined abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10. By performing display corresponding to the type of abnormal state on the dual-use display unit 66 after setting the state, even when the same abnormal state occurs, common display is performed depending on whether it is the second section SC2 or not. Since the phenomenon that the display mode of the area 68 changes does not occur, it becomes easier to identify the type of abnormal state.

(45) When it is determined that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur, if the number of additional games to be given in the new execution time is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of games, the special Although the configuration is such that the continuous production is executed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when it is determined that a new execution time of the first unit execution time ST12 will occur, the lottery process for the continuous performance is executed, and in the lottery process for the continuous performance, the new execution time is given. The higher the number of games with a higher number of additional games, the higher the probability that the special continuous effect will be selected, and the smaller the number of games that are given in the new execution, the higher the probability that the normal continuous effect will be selected. You may make it

(46) As a condition for starting the ending effect of the second section SC2, in addition to the conditions in the first embodiment, the number of games continuously played in the second section SC2 is equal to or greater than the ending start reference number of games. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a condition of what has happened is set.

(47) A configuration that stores the total number of games played and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the second section SC2, as history information, and calculates the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times a predetermined combination has been won and the total number of games to be drawn in the combination lottery process are stored as history information, and the probability of winning the predetermined combination is calculated. may be In this case, there are a first predetermined combination and a second predetermined combination as target predetermined combinations, and the number of wins for each of the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination is individually stored as history information, and the first predetermined combination is stored as history information. The winning probability may be calculated for each of the predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination. Further, the number of wins for each combination may be individually stored as history information, and the probability of winning may be calculated for each combination. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the winning probability of the combination to be managed.

Further, the total number of awarded game media and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the number of awarded game media per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of game media provided per unit number of games. Also, the combination of the total number of awarded game media and the total number of games is stored as history information for each game state and the second section SC2 individually, and the number of awarded game media per unit number of games is stored for each game state. The game state and the second section SC2 may be individually calculated.

(48) In the advantageous game state, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, so that it is not limited to a configuration that is more advantageous than the game state that is not in the advantageous game state. A configuration may be adopted in which the advantageous game state becomes advantageous by increasing the number of given game media in the case where the game is played.

(49) The notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which the combination display section 66 and the section display section 67 are used. , the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66 may be used. Further, when there are a plurality of types of calculation results to be notified, the configuration may be such that each type of event to be notified is sequentially switched and displayed. When the display is sequentially switched in this way, for example, the type of event to be notified is displayed on the credit display section 65, and the calculation result of the event to be notified or the content of the calculation result is displayed on the combined display section 66. A configuration in which corresponding information is displayed may be adopted. As a result, even when there are a plurality of types of events to be notified, it is possible to notify the plurality of types of events to be notified using a small number of display units.

(50) A configuration may be adopted in which the upper limit of the number of continuous games is set for the first section SC1 as well. In this case, when the number of games continuously executed in the first section SC1 reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section SC2 is set. As a result, it is possible to compensate for the fact that the first section SC1 has continued until the upper limit number of games is reached. In addition, by setting the upper limit number of games in the first section SC1 to be the same among the set values of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6", it is possible to prevent the upper limit number of games from being advantageous or disadvantageous depending on the set value. becomes possible.

(51) The configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the effective line is only one main line ML, and the configuration may be such that the effective line is two, three, or four or more. In this case, the number of activated lines may increase as the number of betted game media increases, or the maximum number of activated lines may be set regardless of the number of betted game media.

(52) The type of information transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. Information on the number of game media played may be transmitted from the main side MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the information on the number of game media to be provided by winning can be notified on the image display device 63 or the like. Further, even if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, if the rotation of some of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped or stopped, the information corresponding to that is sent to the main side. It may be configured to be transmitted from the MPU 72 to the effect side MPU 92 . In this case, the image display device 63 or the like can perform an effect corresponding to the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

(53) In each of the above embodiments, the configuration is such that medals are paid out when a small winning combination is won. If it is For example, it may be configured such that prizes other than medals are paid out when a minor win is established. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have actual medal insertion and medal payout functions and that manages the medals owned by the player as credits, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the granting of benefits.

(54) The present invention may be applied to a so-called B-type slot machine, a C-type, a combination of A and C types, a combination of B and C types, as well as RT games, CT games or AT machines. The present invention may be applied to any slot machine, such as a type equipped with games. Also, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a bonus state that is advantageous to the player.

(55) The symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., and may be geometric lines, figures, and the like. Also, it is possible to compose a pattern with light, color, etc., and a pattern can be configured with a three-dimensional shape, etc., or a composite of these can compose a pattern. In other words, the pattern may be anything as long as it functions as identifiable information.

(56) In each of the above-described embodiments, a specific example of the slot machine 10 was shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as game media. You may apply it to the game machine of the form which fused with the machine.

<Invention group extracted from the above embodiment>
Hereinafter, the features of the group of inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet; ,
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main side MPU 72);
In a game machine equipped with
When the game is executed in a situation where a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet, a predetermined profit (transition to pseudo-bonus state ST5, transition to ART state ST6 ) can be awarded, the predetermined profit is not awarded when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet, and the case where the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media is bet set is higher than the case where the game is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media is bet set. Any of the configurations in which a predetermined profit is likely to be granted,
The winning response control means is
A first predetermined game state (first CB state ST2) based on establishment of a first predetermined winning (first CB winning) in a state in which the first predetermined winning combination (first CB winning combination) is won in the winning lottery process. A first transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S1003 in the main side MPU 72) that shifts the game state to
A second predetermined game state (second CB state ST3) based on establishment of a second predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a state where the second predetermined winning combination (second CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination. A second transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S1007 in the main side MPU 72) that shifts the game state to
with
The first predetermined combination is a combination that can be won when the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won when the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet. ,
The first predetermined prize is established by executing the game in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined winning combination is won. Even if a role is won, if the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the game is not established,
The second predetermined combination is a combination that can be won when the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won when the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet. ,
The second predetermined prize is established by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the second predetermined winning combination is won. Even if a role is won, if the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the game is not established,
Even if the second predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the second predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the second predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the second predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet. can be,
A game machine, wherein the first predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the amount of game media owned by the player.

According to the feature A1, the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, so that a predetermined profit is awarded or is likely to be awarded. Basically, the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

In this configuration, a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet and a second predetermined number of game media are set to bet as a winning combination in the lottery process of the combination. A second predetermined combination that can be won under certain circumstances is set. A first predetermined prize can be established by executing a game in a state where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning prize is established, the state shifts to the first predetermined game state. In addition, the second predetermined winning can be established by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined combination is won and the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet. Then, when the second predetermined winning prize is established, the game state shifts to the second predetermined game state. In this case, when the second predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet. In addition, the first predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media owned by the player.

Therefore, in the gaming hall, by playing the game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet before the start of business and winning the second predetermined combination, the first predetermined number of games can be played after the start of business. It is possible to prevent a player who repeatedly plays a game in a state where a medium is set to bet from shifting to the first predetermined game state. On the other hand, for example, after illegally obtaining game media, information is initialized illegally, and a first predetermined number of game media are bet set using the illegally acquired game media. is repeated, the game will be repeated in a situation where the first prescribed number of game media are set to bet while the second prescribed combination has not been won. In this case, the first predetermined game state, which is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media owned by the player, is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the fraudulent person to increase the number of game media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act that attempts to obtain an unfair advantage by causing information to be initialized unfairly.

Feature A2. The gaming machine according to feature A1, wherein the second predetermined number is a number smaller than the first predetermined number.

According to feature A2, since the second predetermined number is a number smaller than the first predetermined number, it is possible to reduce the number of game media required to create a situation in which the second predetermined combination is won. Become.

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which game media owned by the player are reduced.

According to feature A3, since a disadvantage occurs when the first predetermined game state occurs, the game media possessed by the cheater is reduced when the above-described cheating is committed. It is possible to

Feature A4. The second predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the amount of game media owned by the player or a game state that reduces the amount of game media owned by the player. The gaming machine according to any one of A3.

According to feature A4, a situation in which a second predetermined number of game media are bet-set using the illegally obtained game media after the fraudulent person has fraudulently initialized the information as already described. When the game is played, the second predetermined combination is won and the second predetermined prize is established, so that the state shifts to the second predetermined game state that does not contribute to an increase in the game media or decreases the owned game media. It is possible to make

Feature A5. The first predetermined winning is established in the game regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means when the first predetermined combination is won in a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet. (Configuration of Second Embodiment) The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4.

According to the feature A5, when the first predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined prize is surely established in the game, which contributes to an increase in the amount of game media when the above-described cheating is committed. It is possible to facilitate the transition to the first predetermined game state in which the game is not played.

Feature A6. Even if the first predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the first predetermined combination is won, the second predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that

According to feature A6, even if the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet in a situation in which the first predetermined combination is won, the second predetermined combination can be won. Can not. As a result, after the cheating party initializes the information as described above, the game is played in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet, and the first predetermined combination is won. After that, even if the game is played in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the second predetermined combination cannot be won.

Feature A7. Advantageous transition means (main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5, ART state ST6) advantageous to the player in the case of the advantageous transition possible state (second section SC2) A function to execute the processing of steps S2403 to S2405, steps S2413 and S2414 in
The predetermined profit is transition to the advantageous gaming state,
When the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the advantageous transition possible state can occur, whereas a situation in which the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein even if the game is executed at , the advantageous transition possible situation does not occur.

According to feature A7, when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, an advantageous transition possible state can occur in which transition to an advantageous gaming state is possible. Even if the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the advantageous transition is not possible. Therefore, the player basically executes the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature A8. The gaming machine according to feature A7, wherein the advantageous transition possible state can occur regardless of whether the second predetermined combination is won.

According to the feature A8, regardless of whether or not the second predetermined hand is won, the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, thereby making it possible to shift to an advantageous state. can be. Thus, even if the player starts a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the player has not won the second predetermined combination, the situation can be changed to an advantageous transition. becomes possible.

Feature A9. The advantageous transition means shifts the game state to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the game is executed in a state in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state. On the other hand, the game state is not shifted to the advantageous game state even if the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state. The gaming machine according to feature A7 or A8.

According to the characteristic A9, even after the advantageous transition possible state, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur unless the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet. . Therefore, even in an advantageous transition possible state, the player basically executes the game in a state in which the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature A10. Ending means for the number of games that terminates the advantageous transition possible situation based on the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaching the upper limit number of games (if the main MPU 72 makes an affirmative determination in step S function to execute the process of step S2014),
The end means corresponding to the number of games is a game executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state and the second predetermined number of game media in the advantageous transition possible state. The gaming machine according to feature A9, wherein the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible state is counted regardless of the number of games executed in the state where a bet is set.

According to feature A10, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the maximum number of games, so the advantageous transition possible situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. Also, the game may be either a game executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media is bet set in an advantageous shift possible state or a game executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media is bet set. However, the number of games played in an advantageous transition possible situation is counted. As a result, when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the game state does not transition to the advantageous game state even if the advantageous transition is possible. If the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the remaining upper limit number of games in the advantageous shift possible state is reduced accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature A11. From the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the advantageous shift possible situation continues, the amount of game media consumed for executing the game while the advantageous shift possible situation continues When the value obtained by subtracting the total number is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as a predetermined reference value, and the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches the upper limit difference number. Ending means corresponding to the difference number that ends the advantageous transition possible situation based on
The ending means corresponding to the difference is a game executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state and the second predetermined number of game media in the advantageous transition possible state. The gaming machine according to feature A9 or A10, characterized in that any game executed in a situation where a bet is set is subject to measurement of the predetermined difference number.

According to feature A11, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the fact that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so the advantageous transition possible situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time. Also, the game may be either a game executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media is bet set in an advantageous shift possible state or a game executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media is bet set. However, it is subject to measurement of a predetermined number of differences. As a result, when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the game state does not transition to the advantageous game state even if the advantageous transition is possible. , when the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, there is a possibility that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value approaches the upper limit difference number. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature A12. First predetermined notification means (step S1117, step S1202, step S1205 and step S1117, step S1202, step S1205 and step A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, characterized by comprising a function of executing the processing of S1211.

According to feature A12, since the first predetermined notification is executed in a situation in which the second predetermined combination has not been won, in a situation in which the second predetermined combination has not been won, the administrator of the gaming hall or the like informs the second predetermined It is possible to encourage the player to be elected to the role.

Feature A13. The gaming machine according to feature A12, wherein the first predetermined notification means notifies the number of games executed while the first predetermined notification is being performed.

According to feature A13, the number of games played is reported in a situation where the first predetermined notification is executed because the player has not won the second predetermined combination, and thus the second predetermined combination has not been won. It is possible to make the manager of the game hall or the like recognize how long the is continued.

Feature A14. Even if the first predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the first predetermined combination is won, the second predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet. can be,
The first predetermined notification means is characterized in that the first predetermined notification is executed in a situation where the first predetermined combination has not been won and the second predetermined combination has not been won. The gaming machine according to feature A12 or A13.

According to feature A14, the manager of the gaming hall or the like confirms that the first predetermined notification is being executed, so that neither the first predetermined combination nor the second predetermined combination has been won. can be grasped.

Feature A15. The first predetermined notification means executes the first predetermined notification when a notification enabling condition is satisfied based on a specific operation being performed in a situation in which the second predetermined combination is not won. , means for preventing the execution of the first predetermined notification when the notification enable condition is not satisfied even in a situation where the second predetermined combination is not won (the effect side MPU 92 in the third embodiment). A gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A14, characterized in that it has a function of executing switching control processing of internal notification.

According to the feature A15, even if the second predetermined combination is not won, the first predetermined notification is not executed if the notification enable condition is not established based on the specific operation being performed. As a result, only the manager of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the second predetermined combination has been won through the execution of the first predetermined notification.

Feature A16. When the second predetermined combination is won and the game is started in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the second predetermined notification (2-bet corresponding notification) is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, further comprising second predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S1503 in the effect-side MPU 92).

According to feature A16, when the game is started in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet even though the second predetermined combination has already been won, the second predetermined notification is given. is executed, it is possible to encourage avoidance of establishment of the second predetermined prize.

Feature A17. When the game is started in a state where the second predetermined combination is not won and the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the third predetermined notification (3-bet corresponding notification) is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, characterized by comprising a third predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1305 in the effect-side MPU 92).

According to the feature A17, when the game is started in a state where the second predetermined combination is not won and the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the third predetermined notification is executed. By playing the game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, it is possible to prompt the player to win the second predetermined combination.

Feature A18. Even if the first predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the first predetermined combination is won, the second predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet. can be,
This game machine is provided with a fourth predetermined notification means (the process of step S1107 in the production side MPU 92) for executing the fourth predetermined notification (the first internal clear image G13) in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won. A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to feature A18, since the fourth predetermined notification is executed when the first predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined notification is sent to the manager of the gaming hall or the like when the first predetermined combination is won. It is possible to make the player recognize that he/she has won the role.

Feature A19. When the first predetermined combination is won in the lottery process for the combination, the first predetermined winning information (first CB winning data) is stored, and when the second predetermined combination is won in the lottery process for the combination, the second predetermined combination is stored. 2 Information storage means (main side RAM 74) for storing predetermined winning information (second CB winning data);
predetermined erasing means (a function of executing a partial clearing process in the main MPU 72) for executing a predetermined erasing process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of a predetermined erasing condition; ,
with
Any one of features A1 to A18, wherein the predetermined erasing means excludes the second predetermined winning information from objects to be erased when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to the feature A19, even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased based on the establishment of the predetermined erasing condition, the second predetermined winning information indicating that the second predetermined winning combination has been won is displayed. Excluded from deletion. As a result, it is possible to maintain the state of winning the second predetermined combination even after the predetermined elimination condition is established and the predetermined elimination process is executed.

Feature A20. The winning lottery means executes lottery processing for the winning combination in a mode corresponding to a setting value set as a target to be used from among a plurality of stages of setting values corresponding to the degree of advantage of the player,
The game machine includes setting-related execution means (function for executing the processing of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for executing predetermined setting-related processing related to the setting value,
The gaming machine according to feature A19, wherein the predetermined deletion condition is satisfied when the setting-related process is executed.

According to the feature A20, since the setting value to be used is selected from among the setting values of a plurality of stages, it is possible to change the advantage of the gaming machine by selecting the setting value to be used. Become. Further, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the predetermined erasing condition is met and the predetermined erasing processing is executed. Therefore, when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the information in the information storage means is erased. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, even if the predetermined erasing process is executed, the second predetermined winning information is excluded from the objects to be erased. As a result, even if the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, the state of winning the second predetermined combination can be maintained.

Feature A21. Characteristic feature A19 or A20, wherein the predetermined erasing means erases the first predetermined winning information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process. game machine.

According to feature A21, when the predetermined erasing process is executed, the second predetermined winning information is not deleted, but the first predetermined winning information can be deleted. As a result, when the player wins the first predetermined combination, it is possible to make the situation not win the first predetermined combination by establishing the predetermined elimination condition.

Feature A22. Characteristic features A19 through A19, characterized in that the predetermined erasing condition is established based on a predetermined operation (an ON operation of the setting key in the setting key insertion hole 57) being performed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to any one of A21.

According to feature A22, it is possible to execute the predetermined erasing process when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature A23. When the first predetermined combination is won in the lottery process for the combination, the first predetermined winning information (first CB winning data) is stored, and when the second predetermined combination is won in the lottery process for the combination, the second predetermined combination is stored. 2 Information storage means (main side RAM 74) for storing predetermined winning information (second CB winning data);
specific erasing means for executing a specific erasing process for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of a specific erasing condition (a function of executing an all-clearing process in the main MPU 72);
with
Any one of characteristics A1 to A22, wherein the specific erasing means erases the second predetermined winning information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the specific erasing process. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to feature A23, when the specific erasing condition is established, the information stored in the information storage means including the second predetermined winning information is erased by executing the specific erasing process. In this case, if the specific elimination process is executed by illegally establishing the specific elimination condition, it is possible to create a situation in which the second predetermined combination is not won.

For the configuration of features A1 to A23, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the invention according to the features of feature group A, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is assumed that there will be an act of trying to obtain an unfair advantage by having the information initialized unfairly, and it is necessary to suppress the occurrence of such an unfair act. .

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet; ,
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main side MPU 72);
In a game machine equipped with
An advantageous shift possible state (second section SC2) can be set based on the game being executed in a state where a first predetermined number (“3”) of game media out of the predetermined number is set to bet, Even if the game is executed in a situation in which a second predetermined number ("2") of the predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the situation setting means (step S1805 in the main MPU 72) does not set the advantageous transition possible situation. function to execute the processing of
Advantageous transition means (step S2403 to step a function of executing the processes of S2405, steps S2413 and S2414;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature B1, when the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, an advantageous transition possible state can occur in which transition to an advantageous gaming state is possible. Even if the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the advantageous transition is not possible. Therefore, the player basically executes the game in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet. Therefore, the game can be played in a suitable manner.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the first predetermined number is greater than the second predetermined number.

According to the characteristic B2, since the first predetermined number is larger than the second predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the number of game media required for making the advantageous shift possible state from becoming excessively small. It becomes possible.

Feature B3. The advantageous transition means shifts the game state to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the game is executed in a state in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state. On the other hand, the game state is not shifted to the advantageous game state even if the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2.

According to the feature B3, even after the advantageous transition possible state, the transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur unless the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet. . Therefore, even in an advantageous transition possible state, the player basically executes the game in a state in which the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature B4. Ending means for the number of games that terminates the advantageous transition possible situation based on the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaching the upper limit number of games (if the main MPU 72 makes an affirmative determination in step S function to execute the process of step S2014),
The end means corresponding to the number of games is a game executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state and the second predetermined number of game media in the advantageous transition possible state. The gaming machine according to feature B3, wherein the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible state is counted regardless of the number of games executed in the state where a bet is set.

According to feature B4, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the maximum number of games, so the advantageous transition possible situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. Also, the game may be either a game executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media is bet set in an advantageous shift possible state or a game executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media is bet set. However, the number of games played in an advantageous transition possible situation is counted. As a result, when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the game state does not transition to the advantageous game state even if the advantageous transition is possible. If the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the remaining upper limit number of games in the advantageous shift possible state is reduced accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature B5. The winning response control means performs a second predetermined game based on the establishment of a second predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a situation where a second predetermined winning combination (second CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination. Equipped with a second transition means (a function of executing the process of step S1007 in the main side MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to the state (second CB state ST3),
The second predetermined combination is a combination that can be won when the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won when the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet. ,
The second predetermined prize is established by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the second predetermined winning combination is won. Even if a role is won, if the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the game is not established,
The second predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in game media owned by the player,
Characteristic feature B4, characterized in that the end means corresponding to the number of games counts the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible state even if the game is executed in the second predetermined gaming state. game machine.

According to the feature B5, the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, thereby winning the second predetermined combination and establishing the second predetermined winning prize, thereby entering the second predetermined game state. transition to The second predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media owned by the player, and even if the game is executed in the second predetermined game state, it is executed in an advantageous transition possible state. The number of games will be counted. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature B6. The gaming machine according to feature B5, wherein the advantageous transition possible state can occur regardless of whether or not the second predetermined combination is won.

According to the feature B6, regardless of whether or not the second predetermined combination is won, the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, and the advantageous transition possible state can be. Thus, even if the player starts a game in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the player has not won the second predetermined combination, the situation can be changed to an advantageous transition. becomes possible.

Feature B7. The gaming machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the second predetermined gaming state is a gaming state in which game media owned by the player are reduced.

According to the feature B7, when the second predetermined gaming state occurs, a disadvantage occurs, and even if the game is executed in the second predetermined gaming state, the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible state is counted. becomes. This makes it possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

Feature B8. From the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the advantageous shift possible situation continues, the amount of game media consumed for executing the game while the advantageous shift possible situation continues When the value obtained by subtracting the total number is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as a predetermined reference value, and the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches the upper limit difference number. Ending means corresponding to the difference number that ends the advantageous transition possible situation based on
The ending means corresponding to the difference is a game executed in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in the advantageous transition possible state and the second predetermined number of game media in the advantageous transition possible state. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B7, wherein any of the games executed in a situation where a bet is set is subject to measurement of the predetermined difference number.

According to feature B8, the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the fact that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so the advantageous transition possible situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time. Also, the game may be either a game executed in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media is bet set in an advantageous shift possible state or a game executed in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media is bet set. However, it is subject to measurement of a predetermined number of differences. As a result, when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the game state does not transition to the advantageous game state even if the advantageous transition is possible. , when the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, there is a possibility that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value approaches the upper limit difference number. Therefore, it is possible to increase the disadvantage of playing a game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

For the configuration of features B1 to B8, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet; ,
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main side MPU 72);
In a game machine equipped with
The winning response control means controls a predetermined game state (second CB state ST3) based on establishment of a predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a situation where a predetermined winning (second CB winning) is won in the winning lottery process. ) to shift the game state (the function of executing the processing of step S1007 in the main MPU 72),
Even if the predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
In a situation where the predetermined combination is won, the predetermined combination is won when a game is executed in which a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet. is more advantageous to the player than when a game is executed in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet in a situation where the game media are not set to bet;
This gaming machine provides first predetermined notification means (step S1117, step S1202, step a function of executing the processing of S1205 and step S1211).

According to feature C1, in a configuration in which it is more advantageous to run the game in a situation where the predetermined combination has been won, the first predetermined notification is executed in a situation where the predetermined combination has not been won. As a result, it is possible to prompt the player to win the predetermined combination in a situation where the predetermined combination has not been won. Therefore, the game can be played in a suitable manner.

Feature C2. The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein the first predetermined notification means notifies the number of games executed while the first predetermined notification is being performed.

According to feature C2, the number of games that have been played in a situation where the first predetermined notification is executed because the predetermined combination has not been won is reported, thereby determining how long the situation in which the predetermined combination has not been won continues. It is possible to recognize whether the

Feature C3. The first predetermined notification means executes the first predetermined notification when a notification enable condition is satisfied based on a specific operation being performed in a situation in which the predetermined combination is not won, and Means for preventing the first predetermined notification from being executed when the notification enabling condition is not satisfied even in a situation where the predetermined combination is not won (the internal notification of the effect side MPU 92 in the third embodiment). A gaming machine according to feature C1 or C2, characterized by comprising a function of executing a switching control process.

According to the feature C3, even if the predetermined combination is not won, the first predetermined notification is not executed when the notification enable condition is not established based on the specific operation being performed. As a result, only the manager of the gaming hall can confirm whether or not the predetermined combination has been won through the execution of the first predetermined notification.

Feature C4. The predetermined combination can be won in a situation in which a second predetermined number ("2") of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet, while in a situation in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet. It is a role that cannot be elected in
The predetermined winning is realized by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the predetermined winning combination is won, while the predetermined winning combination is won. Even in such a situation, if the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the game is not established;
The gaming machine executes a second predetermined notification (2-bet corresponding notification) when the game is started in a state in which the predetermined combination is won and the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, further comprising second predetermined notification means (a function of executing the process of step S1503 in the effect-side MPU 92).

According to feature C4, when the game is started in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet even though the predetermined combination has already been won, the second predetermined notification is executed. Therefore, it is possible to encourage avoidance of establishment of the second predetermined prize.

Feature C5. The predetermined combination can be won in a situation in which a second predetermined number ("2") of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet, while in a situation in which the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet. It is a role that cannot be elected in
The gaming machine executes a third predetermined notification (3-bet corresponding notification) when the game is started in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the predetermined combination is not won. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, further comprising third predetermined notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S1305 in the effect-side MPU 92).

According to the feature C5, when the game is started in a state where the predetermined combination is not won and the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet, the third predetermined notification is executed. By playing a game in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet, it is possible to encourage the player to win a predetermined combination.

Feature C6. When the game is executed in a state where the first predetermined number (“3”) of game media is set to bet, a predetermined profit (transition to pseudo-bonus state ST5, transition to ART state ST6) is awarded. a configuration in which the predetermined profit is not awarded when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media are set to bet, whereas the predetermined profit is not awarded; A predetermined profit is awarded when the game is executed in a state where a predetermined number of game media is bet set, rather than when the game is executed in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set as a bet. is one of the configurations that are likely to be
The winning response control means performs a first predetermined game based on the establishment of a first predetermined winning (first CB winning) in a situation where a first predetermined winning combination (first CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination. Equipped with a first transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S1003 in the main side MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to the state (first CB state ST2),
The first predetermined combination is a combination that can be won when the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won when the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet. ,
The first predetermined prize is established by executing the game in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined winning combination is won. Even if a role is won, if the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the game is not established,
The predetermined combination is a combination that can be won in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet,
The predetermined winning is realized by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the predetermined winning combination is won, while the predetermined winning combination is won. Even in such a situation, if the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the game is not established;
When the predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the first predetermined gaming state is a gaming state that does not contribute to an increase in the amount of game media owned by the player.

According to the feature C6, the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, so that the predetermined profit is awarded or is likely to be awarded. Basically, the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

In this configuration, a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet and a second predetermined number of game media are set to bet as a winning combination in the lottery process of the combination. Predetermined combinations that can be won in certain situations are set. A first predetermined prize can be established by executing a game in a state where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning prize is established, the state shifts to the first predetermined game state. Further, a predetermined winning can be established in which a game is executed in a state where a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while a predetermined combination is won. Then, when a predetermined prize is established, the game state shifts to a predetermined game state. In this case, when the predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet. , the first predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media owned by the player.

Therefore, in a gaming hall, by playing a game in a situation where a second predetermined number of game media is set to bet before the start of business and winning a predetermined combination, the first predetermined number of game media can be obtained after the start of business. It is possible to prevent a player who repeatedly plays a game in a bet-set situation from transitioning to the first predetermined game state. On the other hand, for example, after illegally obtaining game media, information is initialized illegally, and a first predetermined number of game media are bet set using the illegally acquired game media. is repeated, the game is repeated in a state where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet while the predetermined combination is not won. In this case, the first predetermined game state, which is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media owned by the player, is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the fraudulent person to further increase the number of game media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act that attempts to obtain an unfair advantage by causing information to be initialized unfairly.

Feature C7. Even if the first predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the first predetermined combination is won, the predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet,
The first predetermined notification means is characterized in that the first predetermined notification is executed in a situation where the first predetermined combination has not been won and the predetermined combination has not been won. The gaming machine described in C6.

According to the feature C7, the manager of the gaming hall or the like confirms that the first predetermined notification is being executed, and thus grasps the situation in which neither the first predetermined combination nor the predetermined combination has been won. It becomes possible to

Feature C8. Even if the first predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the first predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the first predetermined combination is won, the predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet,
This game machine is provided with a fourth predetermined notification means (the process of step S1107 in the production side MPU 92) for executing the fourth predetermined notification (the first internal clear image G13) in the situation where the first predetermined combination is won. A gaming machine according to feature C6 or C7, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to the feature C8, since the fourth predetermined notification is executed in the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined notification is sent to the manager of the gaming hall in the situation in which the first predetermined combination is won. It is possible to make the player recognize that he/she has won the role.

For the configuration of features C1 to C8, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. Predetermined storage execution means (function for executing the processing of step S706 in the main side MPU 72) for storing predetermined game information (second CB winning data) in the information storage means (main side RAM 74),
When the predetermined game information is stored in the information storage means, the game situation is a predetermined game situation (the game situation in which the first CB combination is not won),
This game machine is
Profit giving process execution means for executing the profit giving process in a manner corresponding to the set value set as the object to be used from among the set values of multiple stages corresponding to the player's advantage (lottery for the winning combination in the main side MPU 72) function to perform processing) and
setting-related execution means (function for executing the process of step S106 in the main MPU 72) for executing a predetermined setting-related process related to the setting value;
predetermined erasing means for executing a predetermined erasing process for erasing the information stored in the information storage means when the setting-related processing is executed (a function of executing a partial clearing process in the main MPU 72); ,
with
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined erasing means excludes the predetermined game information from objects to be erased when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.

According to feature D1, since the setting value to be used is selected from a plurality of stages of setting values, it is possible to change the advantage of the gaming machine by selecting the setting value to be used. Become. Further, since the predetermined deletion processing is executed when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, it is possible to erase the information in the information storage means when the predetermined setting-related processing is executed. Become. In this case, even if the predetermined erasing process is executed, the predetermined game information is excluded from the objects to be erased. As a result, even if the predetermined setting-related processing is executed, it is possible to maintain the predetermined game state.

Feature D2. Information storage means (main side RAM 74) to store specific game information (first CB winning data) Specific storage execution means (function to execute the process of step S706 in main side MPU 72),
When the specific game information is stored in the information storage means, the game situation is a specific game situation (the game situation in which the second CB role is not won),
The gaming machine according to feature D1, wherein the predetermined erasing means erases the specific game information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the predetermined erasing process.

According to the feature D2, when the predetermined erasing process is executed, the predetermined game information is not erased, but the specific game information is erased. As a result, when the game situation becomes a specific game situation, it is possible to change the game situation to a game situation other than the specific game situation by establishing the predetermined elimination condition.

Feature D3. The setting-related execution means executes the predetermined setting-related processing based on a predetermined operation (an ON operation of the setting key in the setting key insertion hole 57) being performed when the supply of operating power is started. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, characterized by:

According to feature D3, it is possible to execute the predetermined erasing process when the supply of operating power is started.

Feature D4. specific erasing means for executing specific erasing processing for erasing information stored in the information storage means (function for executing all clearing processing in the main MPU 72) on the basis of establishment of a specific erasing condition; ,
Any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the specific erasing means erases the predetermined game information when erasing the information stored in the information storage means in the specific erasing process. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature D4, when the specific erasing condition is established, the information stored in the information storage means including the predetermined game information is erased by executing the specific erasing process.

Feature D5. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet; ,
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main side MPU 72);
with
When the game is executed in a situation where a first predetermined number (“3”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet, a predetermined profit (transition to pseudo-bonus state ST5, transition to ART state ST6 ) can be awarded, the predetermined profit is not awarded when the game is executed in a situation where a second predetermined number (“2”) of the predetermined number of game media is set to bet, and the case where the game is executed in the situation where the first predetermined number of game media is bet set is higher than the case where the game is executed in the situation where the second predetermined number of game media is bet set. Any of the configurations in which a predetermined profit is likely to be granted,
The winning response control means is
A first predetermined game state (first CB state ST2) based on establishment of a first predetermined winning (first CB winning) in a state in which the first predetermined winning combination (first CB winning combination) is won in the winning lottery process. A first transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S1003 in the main side MPU 72) that shifts the game state to
A second predetermined game state (second CB state ST3) based on establishment of a second predetermined winning (second CB winning) in a state where the second predetermined winning combination (second CB winning combination) is won in the lottery process for the winning combination. A second transition means (a function of executing the processing of step S1007 in the main side MPU 72) that shifts the game state to
with
The first predetermined combination is a combination that can be won when the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won when the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet. ,
The first predetermined prize is established by executing the game in a state where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined winning combination is won. Even if a role is won, if the game is executed in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the game is not established,
The second predetermined combination is a combination that can be won when the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet, but cannot be won when the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet. ,
The second predetermined prize is established by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the second predetermined winning combination is won. Even if a role is won, if the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media is set to bet, the game is not established,
Even if the second predetermined prize is not established in the game in which the second predetermined combination is won, the situation in which the second predetermined combination is won is maintained in the next game,
When the second predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet. can be,
The first predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in game media owned by the player,
The predetermined storage execution means stores second predetermined winning information as the predetermined game information in the information storage means when the second predetermined winning combination is won in the lottery process for the winning combination,
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein the predetermined game situation is a situation in which the second predetermined combination is won.

According to the feature D5, the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are bet set, and the predetermined profit is awarded or is likely to be awarded. Basically, the game is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet.

In this configuration, a first predetermined combination that can be won in a situation where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet and a second predetermined number of game media are set to bet as a winning combination in the lottery process of the combination. A second predetermined combination that can be won under certain circumstances is set. A first predetermined prize can be established by executing a game in a state where a first predetermined number of game media is set to bet while the first predetermined combination is won. Then, when the first predetermined winning prize is established, the state shifts to the first predetermined game state. In addition, the second predetermined winning can be established by executing the game in a state where the second predetermined combination is won and the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet. Then, when the second predetermined winning prize is established, the game state shifts to the second predetermined game state. In this case, when the second predetermined combination is won, the first predetermined combination is not won even if the lottery process for the combination is executed in a situation where the first predetermined number of game media are set to bet. In addition, the first predetermined game state is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media owned by the player.

Therefore, in the gaming hall, by playing the game in a situation where the second predetermined number of game media are set to bet before the start of business and winning the second predetermined combination, the first predetermined number of games can be played after the start of business. It is possible to prevent a player who repeatedly plays a game in a state where a medium is set to bet from shifting to the first predetermined game state. On the other hand, for example, after illegally obtaining game media, information is initialized illegally, and a first predetermined number of game media are bet set using the illegally acquired game media. is repeated, the game will be repeated in a situation where the first prescribed number of game media are set to bet while the second prescribed combination has not been won. In this case, the first predetermined game state, which is a game state that does not contribute to an increase in the number of game media owned by the player, is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the fraudulent person to further increase the number of game media. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an act that attempts to obtain an unfair advantage by causing information to be initialized unfairly.

For the configuration of features D1 to D5, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group E>
Features E1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S1805 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (step S2403 to step a function of executing the processes of S2405, steps S2413 and S2414;
Ending means for the number of games that terminates the advantageous transition possible situation based on the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaching the upper limit number of games (if the main MPU 72 makes an affirmative determination in step S a function to execute the process of step S2014);
with
The advantageous transition means performs the advantageous game based on the fact that the number of games executed when the advantageous transition is possible and the specific game state has reached a first release game number (first ceiling game number). A first release transition means (function for executing the processing of steps S1903, S1906, S1909 and steps S2411 to S2414 in the main side MPU 72) that shifts the game state to the state,
The gaming machine, wherein the number of games to be unlocked is the number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games.

According to feature E1, since the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the maximum number of games, the advantageous transition possible situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. Further, by shifting to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible state reaches the first number of unlocked games, it is possible to provide an opportunity to shift to the advantageous game state. In addition, since the number of first unlocked games is less than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible state, it is possible to reliably provide an opportunity to transition to the advantageous gaming state when the advantageous transition possible state occurs. becomes.

Feature E2. A plurality of types of stay modes (A mode, B mode, C mode) are present in the advantageous transition possible state so that the number of first unlocked games is different,
The gaming machine according to feature E1, wherein the number of games to be unlocked is smaller than the upper limit number of games in any type of stay mode.

According to the feature E2, it is possible to diversify the game content in the advantageous shift possible state by having a plurality of types of stay modes with different numbers of first unlocked games. In addition, regardless of the type of stay mode, the number of first unlocked games is the number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation, so that even if any stay mode is selected, the advantageous transition possible situation When it becomes, it becomes possible to surely give an opportunity to shift to an advantageous game state.

Feature E3. The gaming machine according to feature E2, wherein the upper limit number of games is the same in any of the plurality of types of stay modes.

According to the feature E3, the upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible situation is the same regardless of the type of stay mode, so that even if the configuration diversifies the game content in the advantageous transition possible situation, one game is played. can be set within a predetermined range of advantages.

Feature E4. The advantageous transition means is the advantageous transition possible situation when the advantageous transition possible situation is maintained when the advantageous gaming state ends in the advantageous transition possible situation and transitions to the specific game state. Second release transition means ( a function to execute the processing of steps S2411 to S2414 and step S2805 in the main MPU 72),
The upper limit number of games is a number of games larger than the total number of games of the first unlocked game number, the second unlocked game number, and the minimum continuous game number in the advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of E3.

According to the feature E4, even if the transition to the advantageous game state occurs once in the advantageous transition possible state, the advantageous transition possible situation continues after the advantageous game state ends and the second in the specific game state The advantageous game state can be entered again by executing the game for the number of unlocked games. The upper limit number of games in the advantageous transition possible state is set to a number of games larger than the total number of games of the first unlocked game number, the second unlocked game number, and the minimum continuous game number in the advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to create a situation in which the transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs twice in one advantageous transition possible situation.

Feature E5. The advantageous game state includes a first advantageous game state (preparation state ST4, pseudo-bonus state ST5) and a second advantageous game state (ART state ST6) that can be shifted to when the first advantageous game state ends. ,
The upper limit number of games is a number of games that is greater than the total number of games of the number of games to be unlocked, the number of games to be unlocked, and the number of games that is twice the number of games to be continued in the first advantageous gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature E4, characterized by:

According to the characteristic E5, although the first advantageous game state is completed by the first release game number being consumed in the advantageous transition possible state, the transition to the first advantageous gaming state occurs, but after the first advantageous gaming state ends, the second advantageous gaming state is entered. Even if the transition does not occur, it is possible to shift to the first advantageous game state again by further digesting the second unlocked game number in this advantageous transition possible situation, and the first advantageous game It is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous gaming state can continue after the state. As a result, even if the transition from the first advantageous game state to the second advantageous game state that occurs in the advantageous transition possible situation does not occur, the second advantageous game state will be reached in the subsequent advantageous transition possible situation. It is possible to make the player expect to make the transition.

Feature E6. The gaming machine according to feature E4 or E5, wherein the second number of unlocked games is a number of games smaller than the first number of unlocked games set before the second number of unlocked games is set.

According to feature E6, since the number of games in which the number of games to be unlocked is smaller than the number of games to be unlocked by the first game, when the advantageous transition possible state continues after the advantageous gaming state ends, the advantageous gaming state It is possible to heighten the player's expectation for the shift to .

Feature E7. In the advantageous transition possible situation,
a first stay mode (A mode) in which the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the advantageous gaming state ends in the advantageous transition possible situation;
a second stay mode (B mode) in which the advantageous transition possible situation can continue even after the advantageous gaming state ends in the advantageous transition possible situation;
is set and
The second release transition means, when the advantageous transition possible state is maintained when the advantageous gaming state ends in the second stay mode and transitions to the specific gaming state, the advantageous transition possible state is maintained. characterized in that the game state is shifted to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the number of games executed in the specific game state reaches the second unlocked game number. The gaming machine according to any one of E6.

According to feature E7, it is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous game state occurs only once in one advantageous transition possible situation, and a situation in which an advantageous game state occurs multiple times in one advantageous transition possible situation. becomes. As a result, it is possible to create a relatively advantageous transitionable situation and a relatively disadvantageous transitionable situation, thereby diversifying game contents.

Feature E8. Characteristic feature E7, wherein the total number of games for the first unlocked game number and the second unlocked game number for the second stay mode is equal to or less than the first unlocked game number for the first stay mode. game machine.

According to the feature E8, the second stay mode is performed once because the total number of games of the number of first unlocked games and the number of second unlocked games in the second stay mode is equal to or less than the first number of unlocked games in the first stay mode. It is possible to make a mode in which the transition to the advantageous game state can occur multiple times in the advantageous transition possible situation, and to be a mode in which the transition to the advantageous game state can be easily made.

Feature E9. Advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) that maintains the notification state in the advantageous gaming state;
When the advantageous transition possible situation ends due to the termination of the advantageous game state, the advantageous notification means is set to a non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation ends, and the advantageous even if the advantageous game state ends. If the shiftable state continues, the advantageous notification control means (step S1809, step S1814, step S2015, step S2408, step S1809, step S1814, step S2015, step S2408, step A function of executing the processing of S2417 and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2802);
The gaming machine according to any one of features E4 to E8, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature E9, by providing the advantage informing means for maintaining the informing state in the advantageous gaming state, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the advantageous gaming state exists. In this case, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends due to the termination of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous notification means becomes the non-notification state when the advantageous transition possible situation ends, whereas the advantageous gaming state ends. If the advantageous shift possible situation continues even after the game ends, the advantageous informing means is maintained in the informing state even after the advantageous game state ends. As a result, it becomes possible for a player playing a game in the gaming machine to recognize that the advantageous transition possible state continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature E10. The advantageous notification control means is means for changing the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous shift possible situation occurs (function for executing the processing of steps S1809 and S1814 in the main MPU 72). The gaming machine of feature E9, comprising:

According to the feature E10, the advantage notification means can change from the non-reporting state to the notification state when the advantageous shift possible state occurs, so that the player other than the player who has continued to play the game in the gaming machine can receive the advantage. Even if it is confirmed that the informing means is in the informing state, it is not possible to determine whether the advantageous shift possible situation continues even after the advantageous game state ends or the advantageous shift possible situation has newly occurred. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp.

Feature E11. The advantageous notification control means maintains the advantageous notification means in the non-notification state when the advantageous shift possible situation occurs, and maintains the advantageous notification means in the non-notification state when the advantageous gaming state is subsequently entered. The gaming machine according to feature E10, characterized in that it has a means for changing from to the notification state (a function of executing the processing of steps S1815, S2408 and S2417 in the main side MPU 72).

According to the feature E11, even if an advantageous shift possible situation occurs, the advantageous notification means may be maintained in the non-notification state, and when the advantageous game state is subsequently entered, the advantageous notification means may be in the notification state. As a result, it is possible to diversify the triggers for switching the advantageous notification means to the notification state.

Feature E12. From the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the advantageous shift possible situation continues, the amount of game media consumed for executing the game while the advantageous shift possible situation continues When the value obtained by subtracting the total number is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as a predetermined reference value, and the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value reaches the upper limit difference number. (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014) for ending the advantageous transition possible situation based on The game machine according to any one of E1 to E11.

According to the feature E12, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so the advantageous transition possible situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time.

For the configuration of features E1 to E12, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Feature group F>
Feature F1. Predetermined advantageous transition means (a function of executing the processing of steps S906 and S2704 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to a predetermined advantageous state (ART state ST6) advantageous to the player;
First determining means (function of executing loop lottery processing in the main MPU 72, step S3401 in the main MPU 72) for determining the number of games to be continued in the predetermined advantageous state based on the occurrence of the first decision trigger in the predetermined advantageous state and a function to execute the processing of step S3402);
A second determination means for determining a predetermined number of additional games to be added to the number of games to be continued in the predetermined advantageous state based on the occurrence of the second decision trigger in the predetermined advantageous state. functions to perform) and
with
A configuration in which the second decision opportunity can occur multiple times in the predetermined advantageous state,
The gaming machine, wherein the second determining means sets the total number of games of the predetermined additional number of games in one predetermined advantageous state to be equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number of games (170 games).

According to feature F1, in the predetermined advantageous state, the number of continuous games is determined based on the occurrence of the first decision opportunity, and the predetermined additional number of games is determined based on the occurrence of the second decision opportunity. This makes it possible for the player to expect that a large number of games will be awarded as the number of games to be continued in the predetermined advantageous state. In this case, the predetermined additional number of games may be awarded a plurality of times in the predetermined advantageous state, and the total number of games of the predetermined additional number of games in one predetermined advantageous state is limited to the predetermined upper limit number of games or less. As a result, it is possible to prevent the predetermined additional number of games from being excessively awarded while making it possible to increase the timing at which the predetermined additional number of games is awarded.

Feature F2. Updating means for updating information on the number of games stored in the game number storage means (continued game number counter 74c) when the game is executed in the predetermined advantageous state )and,
Termination means for terminating the predetermined advantageous state based on the fact that the number of games information stored in the number of games storage means has become information corresponding to the maximum number of games and executing the process of step S2014);
The gaming machine according to feature F1, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F2, the predetermined advantageous state is terminated when the number of games measured by the number-of-games storage means reaches the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible to prevent the predetermined advantageous state from excessively continuing. In this case, the configuration of feature F1 is provided, and the total number of games of the predetermined additional number of games in one predetermined advantageous state is limited to a predetermined upper limit number of games or less. As a result, in a situation where the number of continuous games with a predetermined advantageous state is limited, it is possible to prevent the award of the number of continuous games with a predetermined advantageous state from being biased toward the award of the predetermined additional number of games.

Feature F3. Characteristic F1 or F2, wherein the second determining means sets the predetermined number of additional games to be generated in response to one occurrence of the second determining trigger to be a number of games smaller than the predetermined upper limit number of games. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature F3, it is possible to prevent the given additional game number from reaching the given upper limit number of games when the given additional game number is given once. Therefore, it is possible to generate a plurality of timings at which the predetermined additional number of games is awarded.

Feature F4. A plurality of unit execution times (first unit execution time ST12, second unit execution time ST13) can be executed in the predetermined advantageous state,
The first decision trigger occurs based on the decision to start a new execution time of the unit execution time,
According to any one of features F1 to F3, wherein the first determination means determines the number of games to be continued in the unit execution times to be newly started based on occurrence of the first determination trigger. The game machine described.

According to the feature F4, the predetermined game state is continued by repeating the new execution times of the unit execution times. As a result, the player plays the game expecting that the number of unit executions will increase.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to feature F4, wherein when the unit execution times are executed a plurality of times, the second decision opportunity can occur in each of the plurality of unit execution times.

According to the feature F5, when the unit execution times are executed a plurality of times, not only the number of continuous games is determined in each of the plurality of unit execution times, but also a predetermined additional number of games can be awarded. As a result, it is possible for the player to expect a predetermined additional number of games to be awarded in each unit execution.

Feature F6. A start determination means (a function of executing the processing of step S3017 in the main MPU 72) for executing a start determination lottery process for determining whether or not to start a new execution time of the unit execution time is provided. A gaming machine according to characterizing feature F4 or F5.

According to the feature F6, a new execution time of the unit execution time is started by winning in the start determination lottery process. This makes it possible for the player to expect that a new execution of the unit execution will be started even if the remaining number of continuous games in one execution of the unit execution is reduced.

Feature F7. The start determination means sets the winning probability of the start determination lottery process to be executed after the number of unit execution times is equal to or greater than a predetermined reference number of times to the predetermined reference number of times or more. The gaming machine according to feature F6, wherein the winning probability of the start determination lottery process executed until the winning probability is set is higher.

According to feature F7, when the number of unit execution times is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number of times, the probability of winning in the start determination lottery process is higher than before. That is, when the unit execution times are repeated and the number of executions reaches or exceeds the predetermined reference number of times, new execution times of the unit execution times are more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction with the start of a new execution round of the unit execution rounds.

Feature F8. The predetermined upper limit number of games is determined by the first determining means from the minimum number of games assumed as the upper limit number of games of the predetermined advantageous state to the start of the unit execution times of the predetermined reference times. The gaming machine according to feature F7, wherein the number of games is set to be smaller than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of games of the number of continuous games.

According to the feature F8, the predetermined upper limit number of games for the predetermined additional number of games is determined from the minimum number of games assumed as the upper limit number of games for the predetermined advantageous state to the start of the unit execution times of the predetermined reference times. The number of games is set to be less than the number of games obtained by subtracting the maximum number of games assumed as the total number of games of the number of continuous games. As a result, even when the upper limit number of games for a predetermined advantageous state is set and the predetermined upper limit number of games is provided as the predetermined additional number of games, the number of unit execution times becomes equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number of times. It is possible to create a situation in which the start determination lottery process is executed with a higher probability of winning.

Feature F9. The gaming machine according to feature F7 or F8, wherein the second determining means does not generate the predetermined additional game number in the unit execution times in a situation where the number of times the game is started is equal to or greater than the predetermined reference number of times. .

According to feature F9, in a configuration in which an upper limit number of games for a predetermined advantageous state is set, a unit execution is performed by not generating a predetermined additional number of games in a situation in which the number of times the game is started exceeds a predetermined reference number of times. After the number of times the game is started reaches a predetermined reference number or more, it is possible to provide many opportunities for executing the start determination lottery process with a high probability of winning.

Feature F10. The second determining means is
lottery determination means (function for executing the processing of step S3302 in the main MPU 72) for determining the predetermined number of additional games by lottery based on the occurrence of the second determination trigger;
The number of games remaining until reaching the predetermined upper limit number of games is greater than the predetermined additional number of games determined by the lottery determining means, or is equal to or greater than the predetermined additional number of games determined by the lottery determining means. In this case, the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means is awarded, and the remaining number of games until reaching the predetermined upper limit number of games is equal to or less than the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means. If there is, or if it is less than the predetermined number of additional games determined by the lottery determining means, means for not giving the predetermined number of additional games to the current occurrence of the second determination trigger (steps S3304 and a function to execute the processing of step S3305);
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, characterized by comprising:

According to feature F10, it is possible to delay the timing at which the total number of games of the given predetermined additional number of games reaches the predetermined upper limit number of games. As a result, even in a configuration in which a predetermined upper limit number of games is set, it is possible to maintain a feeling of anticipation that a predetermined additional number of games will be awarded.

For the configuration of features F1 to F10, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group G>
Feature G1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S1805 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (step S2403 to step a function of executing the processes of S2405, steps S2413 and S2414;
Situation termination means for terminating the advantageous transition possible state based on the termination of the advantageous gaming state (function for executing the processing of steps S2002 to S2004, step S2014, step S2803 and step S2804 in the main side MPU 72);
with
The game machine is characterized in that the situation ending means ends the advantageous shift possible situation after a predetermined number of games (one game) have been executed after the advantageous gaming state ends.

According to the feature G1, since the game state transitions to the advantageous game state when the advantageous transition is possible, it is possible to limit the situation in which the transition to the advantageous game state occurs. In this case, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends based on the end of the advantageous game state, the advantageous transition possible situation ends after a predetermined number of games are executed after the advantageous game state ends. As a result, even when the advantageous transition possible state is terminated by the termination of the advantageous game state, it is possible to generate a period during which the advantageous transition possible state is maintained after the advantageous game state is terminated.

Feature G2. The gaming machine according to feature G1, wherein the predetermined number of games is one game.

According to the feature G2, it is possible to shorten the period during which the advantageous transition possible state is maintained after the advantageous gaming state ends as much as possible.

Feature G3. Advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) that maintains the notification state in the advantageous gaming state;
If the advantageous transition possible situation ends due to the end of the advantageous gaming state, the advantageous notification control means (step S1809 in the main MPU 72) that sets the advantageous notification means to the non-notification state , a function of executing the processes of steps S1814, S2015, S2408 and S2417);
The gaming machine according to feature G1 or G2, characterized by comprising:

According to the feature G3, by providing the advantageous notification means for maintaining the notification state in the advantageous game state, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the advantageous game state is achieved. In this case, when the advantageous transition possible situation ends by the end of the advantageous game state, the advantageous notification is given when the advantageous transition possible situation ends after a predetermined number of games are executed after the advantageous game state ends. The means becomes non-notification state. As a result, even after the advantageous game state ends, the notification state of the advantageous notification means can be maintained over the predetermined number of games.

Feature G4. Continuation determination means for determining whether or not to continue the advantageous gaming state after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games (executing the processing of steps S2704 and steps S3016 to S3020 in the main side MPU 72 function) and
When the continuation determination means determines to continue, the number of games to be continued in the advantageous gaming state is newly set, and the continuous execution means for continuing the advantageous gaming state (steps S3110 to S3112 and steps in the main MPU 72 A function to execute the processing of S3401 to step S3404);
The gaming machine according to feature G3, comprising:

According to the feature G4, the advantageous gaming state may continue after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the advantageous gaming state will continue even if the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games. In addition, when the advantage game state ends with the configuration of the feature G3, the advantageous notification means does not notify when the advantageous shift possible situation ends after a predetermined number of games are executed after the advantageous game state ends. state. Thus, even if the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous game state becomes 0 and the advantageous game state ends without continuation, the advantageous informing means remains in the informing state until the predetermined number of games are executed. , it is possible to prevent the player from specifying whether or not the advantageous game state actually ends even if the player confirms the advantageous notification means.

Feature G5. Effect control means (performance-side MPU 92) for executing an effect that allows a player to recognize whether or not to continue the advantageous game state after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous game state becomes 0 games. A function to execute the production control process for the pseudo bonus in),
When the advantageous gaming state is continued after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games, the effect control means controls the game in which the remaining number of continuous games in the advantageous gaming state becomes 0 games. Means for executing a continuous effect indicating that the advantageous game state continues after the effect indicating that the advantageous game state does not continue The gaming machine according to feature G4, characterized in that it has a function of

According to the feature G5, after the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous game state becomes 0, an effect is executed that allows the player to recognize whether or not to continue the advantageous game state. It is possible to heighten expectations for the continuation of the game state. In this case, when the advantage game state is terminated with the configuration of the feature G3, the advantageous notification means is provided when the advantageous shift possible situation is terminated after a predetermined number of games are executed after the advantageous game state is terminated. It becomes a non-notification state. As a result, even if the effect indicating that the advantageous game state does not continue is executed when the advantageous game state ends without continuing because the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous game state becomes 0 games. Since the advantageous informing means is maintained in the informing state until a predetermined number of games are executed, even if the player confirms the advantageous informing means, it is not possible to specify whether or not the advantageous game state actually ends. becomes possible. Therefore, even in this situation, it is possible to make the player expect the continuous performance to be executed.

Feature G6. When the predetermined end condition of the advantageous transition possible situation is satisfied, another ending means for ending both the advantageous transition possible situation and the advantageous gaming state in the same game (the main MPU 72 makes an affirmative determination in step S2006 a function of executing the process of step S2014 in step S2013 in the main MPU 72, and a function of making an affirmative determination in step S2013 in the main MPU 72 and executing the process of step S2014); The game machine described.

According to feature G6, when the predetermined termination condition of the advantageous transition possible situation is satisfied, both the advantageous transition possible situation and the advantageous gaming state are terminated in the same game. Therefore, when the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, It is possible to immediately terminate the advantageous shift possible situation.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to feature G6, wherein the predetermined termination condition is satisfied when the number of games executed in the advantageous shift possible situation reaches an upper limit number of games.

According to feature G7, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the maximum number of games, so the advantageous transition possible situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so.

Feature G8. The predetermined end condition is determined from the total number of game media awarded by the game executed while the advantageous transition possible situation continues, in order to execute the game when the advantageous transition possible situation continues. When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of consumed game media is used as the predetermined difference number, the minimum value of the predetermined difference number is set as a predetermined reference value, and the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value is the upper limit. The gaming machine according to feature G6 or G7, characterized in that it is established when the number of differences is reached.

According to the characteristic G8, the advantageous transition possible situation ends when the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value in the advantageous transition possible situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so the advantageous transition possible situation becomes excessive. It is possible to prevent it from continuing for a long time.

Feature G9. The advantageous transition means is means for transitioning to the advantageous gaming state when a resurrection condition is satisfied before the predetermined number of games are executed in the advantageous transition possible state after the advantageous gaming state is terminated. (a function of executing the termination preparation state process of the main side MPU 72 in the fourth embodiment).

According to the feature G9, even after the advantageous game state ends, when the advantageous transition possible situation continues, the resurrection condition is established, thereby shifting to the advantageous game state again. This makes it possible for the player to expect the transition to the advantageous game state again even after the advantageous game state ends.

For the configuration of features G1 to G9, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group H>
Feature H1. Game media consumed for executing the game when the special situation continues from the total number of game media given by the game executed when the special situation (second section SC2) continues When the value obtained by subtracting the total number of is set as the predetermined difference number, the difference for storing the information of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value as the predetermined difference number information in the difference number storage means (total acquired number counter 74d) difference number update execution means for executing number update processing (function for executing the processing of steps S2008 to S2010 in the main MPU 72);
whether or not the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means is information corresponding to the fact that the increment of the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value has reached the upper limit difference number; Arrival determination means (function for executing the process of step S2013 in the main MPU 72) for performing the arrival determination process for determining
In the attainment determination process, the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means is information corresponding to the fact that the increase in the predetermined difference number from the predetermined reference value has reached the upper limit difference number. Ending means for the difference number that ends the special situation based on the fact that it is determined that the
with
When a replay win (replay win) is established, a new game can be started with the same number of game media bet set as the number of game media bet set in the game in which the replay win was established. It is a configuration that becomes
The gaming machine, wherein the reach determination means executes the reach determination process even in a game in which the replay winning is established in the special situation.

According to feature H1, the special situation ends when the increment of the specified difference number from the specified reference value in the special situation reaches the upper limit difference number, so the special situation does not continue for an excessively long time. It becomes possible to do so. In this case, if the replay win is established in the special situation, the predetermined difference number information stored in the difference number storage means does not change from the predetermined reference value to the predetermined difference number even though the predetermined difference number does not change. Reach determination processing is executed to determine whether or not the information indicates that the increment of the difference number has reached the upper limit difference number. As a result, even if the upper limit difference has already been reached in the game prior to the game in which the replay winning was established, even if it has been overlooked due to noise or the like, It is possible to specify that the upper limit difference number has been reached in the game in which the replay winning prize is established, and it is possible to prevent the continuation of the special situation that should normally end.

Feature H2. The gaming machine according to feature H1, wherein the difference number update executing means does not execute the difference number update process in a game in which the replay winning is established in the special situation.

According to the feature H2, the processing load of the game in which the replay winning is established can be reduced by not executing the difference updating process in the game in which the replay winning has been established. In addition, in a game in which a replay win is established in this way, even if the difference number update process is not executed, as described above, the reach determination process for determining whether or not the upper limit difference number has been reached is executed. be. As a result, even with the configuration that reduces the processing load as described above, it is possible to prevent the continuation of the special situation that should have been terminated.

Feature H3. Ending means for the number of games that ends the special situation based on the fact that the number of games executed in the special situation has reached the upper limit number of games A gaming machine according to feature H1 or H2, characterized by comprising a function of executing

According to feature H3, the special situation ends when the number of games executed in the special situation reaches the maximum number of games, so it is possible to prevent the special situation from continuing for an excessively long time. becomes. In addition, since the special situation is ended based on reaching the upper limit number of games in this way, the special situation is ended when it is determined that the upper limit difference number has been reached in the game in which the replay winning has been established. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling a sense of incompatibility.

Feature H4. Advantageous transition means (steps S2403 to S2405 in the main MPU 72, A function to execute the processing of steps S2413 and S2414),
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3, wherein the advantageous game state is terminated when the special situation is terminated by the termination means corresponding to the differential number.

According to the feature H4, since the advantageous game state is executed in the special situation, it is possible to limit the situation in which the advantageous game state is executed. In this case, it is possible to obtain the excellent effects already described.

For the configuration of features H1 to H4, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group I>
Features I1. Game number updating means (function of executing the processing of step S3101 in the main MPU 72) for updating the number of remaining games to be played in the unit execution time (first unit execution time ST12) by executing the game in the unit execution time (first unit execution time ST12) and,
Start determination means for determining whether or not to start a new execution of the unit execution after the unit execution of the currently executed execution is finished (function for executing the process of step S3017 in the main MPU 72 )and,
Given game number determining means (mainly a function of executing the processing for adding the next set in the side MPU 72;
When a new execution round of the unit execution round is started based on the determination by the start determination means to start a new execution round of the unit execution round, the given game number determined by the given game number determination section. as the number of games to be continued for the new execution (function for executing the process of step S3404 in the main MPU 72);
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature I1, even in a situation where it is not decided to start a new execution round, the number of games to be given as the number of games to be continued for the new execution round is determined, and the new execution round is actually started. When started, the determined given number of games is given as the number of continued games for the new execution. As a result, it is possible to determine in advance the number of games to be given when a new execution time is started, and when a new execution time is started, the new execution time It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the given number of games before is started.

Feature I2. The gaming machine according to feature I1, wherein the given number of games determining means determines the given number of games before a final game currently being executed is started.

According to feature I2, since the number of awarded games is determined before the start of the final game of the current run, the last game of the current run is executed next to the current run. It is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of games provided for the number of execution times obtained.

Feature I3. The gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, wherein the number-of-given-games determination means determines the number of games to be offered for a next run in a current run.

According to feature I3, since the number of games to be given is determined only for the next execution, there is no need to cumulatively store a plurality of numbers of games to be given.

Feature I4. The number-of-given-games determination means is characterized in that, when a new execution of the unit executions is started, the number of executions to be executed next to the new execution is determined. The gaming machine according to any one of I1 to I3.

According to feature I4, when a new unit execution time is started, the number of games to be given for the execution time that can be executed next to the new execution time is determined. It is possible to early determine the number of games to be given.

Feature I5. Characteristic features I1 to 1, characterized in that the start determination means determines whether or not to start a new execution round after the end of the current execution round when the final game of the execution round currently being executed is started. The gaming machine according to any one of I4.

According to the feature I5, when the final game of the current execution cycle is started, it is determined whether or not to start a new execution cycle after the end of the current execution cycle. It is possible to shorten the period from when it is decided to start until when a new execution cycle is started.

Feature I6. In the currently executed execution time, an effect (normal continuous effect, special continuous effect) corresponding to the given game number given to the execution time that can be executed next to the current execution time is executed. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5, characterized in that it has a means for making (a function of executing the processing of steps S3510 to S3512 in the effect side MPU 92).

According to the feature I6, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the number of games to be given for the execution time that can be executed next to the execution time that is currently being executed. It is possible to draw the player's attention not only to whether or not will occur, but also to the number of games to be given for the next execution.

Feature I7. When the start determination means determines to start a new execution time of the unit execution time, a start corresponding production (normal continuation) corresponding to the start of a new execution time in the current execution time Effect, special continuation effect) is provided with a start corresponding effect control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3510 to S3512 in the effect side MPU 92),
Any of the features I1 to I6, wherein the start-corresponding effect control means determines the effect content of the start-corresponding effect in a manner corresponding to the given game number determined by the given game-number determining means. 1. The gaming machine according to 1.

According to feature I7, the effect content of the start-corresponding effect corresponding to the start of a new execution round is determined in a manner corresponding to the number of games to be provided, so that the player who has confirmed the start-corresponding effect can play a new game. It is possible not only to grasp that a new execution round will be started, but also to predict or grasp the number of games to be given for the new execution round. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the start corresponding effect.

Feature I8. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I7, wherein the given game number determination means decides the given game number by lottery.

According to feature I8, it is possible to diversify the number of given games.

Feature I9. The number-of-games granting means adds the number of given games determined by the number-of-given-games determining means to the initial number of games of the new number of executions when a new run of the unit number of runs is started. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I8, characterized by adding.

According to feature I9, the number of given games is given as an additional number of games to the number of continued games in the execution times of the unit execution time. As a result, it is possible to increase the attention of the player to the number of games to be given.

For the configuration of features I1 to I9, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group J>
Feature J1. Situation setting means (function for executing the process of step S1805 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous shift possible situation (second section SC2);
Advantageous transition means (step S2403 to step a function of executing the processes of S2405, steps S2413 and S2414;
Advantageous notification means (section display unit 67) for maintaining the notification state in the advantageous gaming state;
Advantageous notification control means for controlling the advantageous notification means (function for executing the processes of steps S1809, S1814, S2015, S2408 and S2417 in the main MPU 72);
with
The advantageous notification control means is
Means ( a function of executing the processes of steps S1815, S2408 and S2417 in the main MPU 72;
If the advantageous transition possible situation continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends, means for maintaining the advantageous reporting means in the reporting state even after the advantageous gaming state ends (Yes in step S2802 in the main MPU 72 judgment function) and
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the characteristic J1, since the transition to the advantageous game state occurs in the advantageous transition possible state, it is possible to limit the situation in which the advantageous game state is shifted. Further, by providing the advantage notification means which is maintained in the notification state in the advantageous game state, it becomes easy to confirm whether or not the advantageous game state exists.

In this case, even if an advantageous transition possible situation occurs, the advantageous notification means may be maintained in the non-notification state, and when the advantageous game state is subsequently entered, the advantageous notification means may be in the notification state. Thus, while the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state in the advantageous game state, the advantageous notification means is maintained in the non-notification state in the case of the game state in which the advantageous transition is possible and the game state is not the advantageous game state. It is possible to create a situation where Therefore, even if the advantageous notification means is in the non-reporting state, there is a possibility that the advantageous transition is possible, and the player expects that the advantageous transition is possible even if the advantageous notification means is in the non-reporting state. becomes possible.

Further, even after the advantageous game state ends, if the advantageous shift possible situation continues, the advantageous notification means is maintained in the notification state even after the advantageous game state ends. As a result, it becomes possible for a player playing a game in the gaming machine to recognize that the advantageous transition possible state continues even after the advantageous gaming state ends.

Feature J2. The advantageous notification control means is characterized by having a means (function of executing the processing of step S2015 in the main side MPU 72) for setting the advantageous notification means to a non-notification state when the advantageous shift possible situation ends. The gaming machine according to feature J1.

According to the feature J2, when the advantageous transition possible state ends, the advantageous notification means is in the non-reporting state. is completed.

Feature J3. The advantageous notification control means changes the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state when the advantageous transition possible state occurs. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or J2, characterized in that it has a function to

According to the characteristic J3, the advantage notification means can change from the non-reporting state to the notification state when the advantageous shift possible state occurs, so that the player other than the player who has continued playing the game in the gaming machine can be given an advantage. Even if it is confirmed that the notification means is in the notification state, it is not possible to determine whether the advantageous transition possible situation continues even after the advantageous transition means ends, or whether the advantageous transition possible situation has newly occurred. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp.

Feature J4. Characteristic J3 characterized in that the start correspondence control means changes the advantageous notification means from the non-notification state to the notification state even if the advantageous game state has not been reached when the advantageous shift possible state occurs. The gaming machine described in .

According to the feature J4, when the advantageous transition possible state occurs, the advantage notification means changes from the non-notification state to the notification state even if the transition to the advantageous transition state has not occurred. As a result, the situation in which the advantageous notification means is in the notification state in the state in which the advantageous transition is possible but not in the advantageous game state is changed to the state other than the case where the advantageous transition possible state is maintained even after the advantageous game state is terminated. can also occur.

For the configuration of features J1 to J4, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the features of the feature group B to the feature group J, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in a game machine such as the one exemplified above, it is necessary to make game contents suitable, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Characteristic group K>
Features K1. Numerical updating means (second random number circuit 76) for updating numeric information;
Acquisition means for acquiring the numerical information updated by the numerical value update means when an acquisition opportunity occurs (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3212 in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, the main a function of executing the process of step S3910 in the side MPU 72);
Predetermined determination means for executing predetermined determination processing for determining whether or not the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to predetermined correspondence information (in the first embodiment, the process of step S3213 in the main MPU 72 (a function of executing the process of step S3911 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
Correspondence processing executing means (in the first embodiment, the main side MPU 72 in step S3215 in the first embodiment a function of executing the process (a function of executing the process of step S3913 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
with
In a predetermined situation (start game of unit execution times ST12 and ST13), a predetermined waiting period (first and second waiting periods in the first embodiment, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74) in the fifth embodiment). The numerical information is acquired by the acquisition means every time the cycle and the second waiting period) elapses, and the predetermined determination process is performed by the predetermined determination means on the acquired numerical information. Amusement machine.

According to feature K1, in a predetermined situation, every time a predetermined waiting period elapses, acquisition of numerical information from the same numerical value update means and execution of predetermined determination processing on the acquired numerical information are performed. This makes it possible to repeatedly execute the predetermined determination process while using the same numerical updating means.

Feature K2. The gaming machine according to feature K1, wherein the predetermined waiting period is set to be longer than a period required for updating the numerical value information in the numerical value updating means once.

According to feature K2, since the predetermined waiting period is set to be longer than the period required for updating the numerical information in the numerical value update means once, after the numerical information is acquired once, the next numerical information Numerical information is updated at least once by the numerical value update means until is acquired, and even if the acquisition of numerical information is repeated in a short period of time, all numerical ranges are acquired at each acquisition timing. It is possible to make it

Feature K3. Specific processing execution means (timer interrupt processing in the fifth embodiment) for executing specific processing (timer interrupt processing in the fifth embodiment) each time a specific period (interrupt cycle of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74)) elapses. function to execute),
A process of acquiring the numerical information by the acquisition means in the specific process is executed,
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or K2, wherein the predetermined waiting period is longer than or equal to the specific period, or the predetermined waiting period is the specific period.

According to the characteristic K3, it is possible to secure a predetermined standby period or at least part of the predetermined standby period by using the specific period during which execution of the specific process is to be waited.

Feature K4. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K3, wherein the predetermined standby period is a variable period.

According to the feature K4, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant because the predetermined standby period is a variable period.

Feature K5. The predetermined standby period includes a first predetermined standby period (first standby period in the first embodiment, an interrupt cycle of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 74) in the fifth embodiment) and a second predetermined standby period (second waiting period),
The first predetermined waiting period is set to a period longer than a period required for updating the numerical value information by the numerical value updating means one cycle,
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, wherein the second predetermined waiting period is a variable period.

According to the feature K5, the first predetermined waiting period is set to be longer than the period required for updating the numerical information in the numerical value update means to perform one cycle. By the time the numerical information is acquired, the numerical information is updated by the numerical updating means at least once, and even if the acquisition of the numerical information is repeated in a short period of time, the entire numerical range is maintained at each acquisition timing. It is possible to make it an acquisition target. Further, since the second predetermined waiting period is a variable period, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant. In particular, since the second predetermined waiting period set separately from the first predetermined waiting period is a variable period, the numerical value updating means It is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant while ensuring that the numerical information is updated at least once.

Feature K6. The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K5, wherein the predetermined situation ends when it is determined in the predetermined determination process that the numerical information does not correspond to the predetermined correspondence information. .

According to feature K6, it is possible to prevent the predetermined situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature K7. Features K1 to K6, characterized in that the predetermined situation ends when the number of times the predetermined determination process is performed on the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means at different timings reaches an upper limit number of times. The gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to feature K7, it is possible to prevent the predetermined situation from continuing for an excessively long time.

Feature K8. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet; ,
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main side MPU 72);
means for starting the predetermined situation when the game is executed (in the first embodiment, a function of making an affirmative determination in step S3201 in the main MPU 72);
with
Any one of features K1 to K7, characterized in that a termination condition of the predetermined situation is set so that the predetermined situation ends before the variable display of the pattern is started after the game is executed. 1. The game machine according to 1.

According to the feature K8, the predetermined situation ends before the variable display of the pattern starts. It is possible to have a person do it.

Feature K9. pattern display means (reel unit 31) for variably displaying patterns;
a start operation means (start lever 41) operated to start the variable display of patterns in the pattern display means;
a game start means (a function of making an affirmative determination in step S304 in the main MPU 72) that sets a game execution state based on the operation of the start operation means in a situation where a predetermined number of game media are set to bet; ,
a winning lottery means (a function of executing a winning lottery process in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning lottery process when the game is executed;
stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) operated to stop the variable display of the pattern in the pattern display means;
A pattern display for controlling the pattern display means such that the variable display of the pattern is started when the game is executed, and the variable display of the pattern is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means. Control means (function for executing reel control processing in the main MPU 72);
When the stop result corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in the lottery process of the winning combination after the variation display of the symbols under the control of the symbol display control means, the winning combination is regarded as establishment of the winning combination corresponding to the winning combination. Winning response control means for executing corresponding control (function for executing the processes of steps S310 and S311 in the main side MPU 72);
Means for starting the predetermined situation when the game is executed (function for making an affirmative determination in step S3902 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
with
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K7, wherein the predetermined situation can continue even after the pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

According to the characteristic K9, since the predetermined situation can continue even after the pattern is displayed in a variable manner, it is possible to secure a long period during which the predetermined determination process is repeatedly executed.

Feature K10. Period variation means for varying the predetermined standby period set thereafter according to the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means (in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of steps S3205 to S3210 in the main MPU 72 , a function of executing the processing of steps S3903 to S3908 in the main side MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment).

According to the feature K10, it is possible to prevent the acquisition interval of the numerical information from becoming constant because the predetermined standby period is a variable period. Further, since the configuration is such that the predetermined standby period is varied using the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means, it is possible to vary the predetermined standby period while suppressing complication of the configuration.

Feature K11. The period varying means is
Means for setting a reference numerical value (variation numerical value) corresponding to the numerical information acquired by the acquisition means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the processing of step S3207 in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, the main a function of executing the process of step S3905 in the side MPU 72);
The magnitude determination means (in the first embodiment, the process of step S3208 in the main MPU 72 is function to be executed (in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3906 in the main MPU 72);
By executing an information updating process for updating the information stored in the frequency information storage means when the magnitude relationship is determined by the magnitude determination means, the information stored in the frequency information storage means number of times update means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3209 in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, Then, the function of executing the processing of step S3907 in the main MPU 72);
If the information in the number storage means updated by the number update means is not the end information, the means (in the first embodiment, the main side A function of making a negative determination in step S3210 in the MPU 72, a function of making a negative determination in step S3908 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
with
The acquisition means acquires the numerical information after the information in the number storage means updated by the number update means becomes the end information,
The gaming machine according to feature K10, characterized in that a period from the start of the determination of the magnitude relation to the start of the information update process varies according to the determination result of the magnitude relation.

According to the feature K11, it is possible to change the predetermined standby period by using the reference numerical value corresponding to the numerical information obtained by the obtaining means and the number of times the magnitude relationship is determined.

Feature K12. The gaming machine according to feature K11, wherein the maximum value of the reference numerical value matches the end count corresponding to the end information.

According to the characteristic K12, since the maximum value of the reference numerical value and the number of times of completion are the same, it is possible to make the predetermined waiting period different if the reference numerical value is different.

For the configuration of features K1 to K12, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

<Characteristic group L>
Feature L1. Numerical value setting means for setting a reference numerical value (variation numerical value) (a function of executing the processing of step S3207 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, a function of executing the processing of step S3905 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment) )and,
The magnitude determination means (in the first embodiment, the process of step S3208 in the main MPU 72 is function to be executed (in the fifth embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3906 in the main MPU 72);
By executing an information updating process for updating the information stored in the frequency information storage means when the magnitude relationship is determined by the magnitude determination means, the information stored in the frequency information storage means number of times update means (in the first embodiment, the function of executing the process of step S3209 in the main MPU 72; in the fifth embodiment, Then, the function of executing the processing of step S3907 in the main MPU 72);
Means (in the first embodiment, the main A function of making a negative determination in step S3210 in the side MPU 72, a function of making a negative determination in step S3908 in the main side MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
After the information in the number information storage means updated by the number update means becomes the end information, a special process execution means (in the first embodiment, the main side MPU 72 executes the process of step S3212). a function to execute the processing of step S3910 in the main MPU 72 in the fifth embodiment);
with
A gaming machine characterized in that a period from the start of the determination of the magnitude relation to the start of the information update process varies according to the result of the determination of the magnitude relation.

According to feature L1, the period from when the magnitude relationship determination is started until the information update process is started varies depending on the magnitude relationship determination result. It is possible to change the period required for As a result, it is possible to prevent the cycle in which special processing is executed from becoming constant.

Feature L2. The gaming machine according to feature L1, wherein the reference numerical value fluctuates according to the result of the special processing executed prior to the current setting of the reference numerical value by the numerical value setting means.

According to feature L2, it is possible to use the result of a previously executed special process so that the period of execution of the special process does not become constant.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L1 or L2, wherein the maximum value of the reference numerical value coincides with the end count corresponding to the end information.

According to feature L3, since the maximum value of the reference numerical value and the number of times of completion are the same, it is possible to set the predetermined waiting period to be different if the reference numerical value is different.

For the configuration of features L1 to L3, features A1 to A23, features B1 to B8, features C1 to C8, features D1 to D5, features E1 to E12, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to Any one or a plurality of configurations among H4, features I1 to I9, features J1 to J4, features K1 to K12, and features L1 to L3 may be applied. As a result, it is possible to obtain a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

According to the inventions according to the features of the feature group K and the feature group L, the following problems can be solved.

Pachinko game machines and slot machines are known as game machines. For example, a pachinko game machine is provided with a plate storage portion for storing game balls given to a player in the front portion of the game machine, and the game balls stored in the plate storage portion are guided to a game ball launching device. , are shot toward the game area in accordance with the player's shooting operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, for example, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from the payout device to the plate storage portion. Further, in a pachinko game machine, there is also known a configuration in which an upper plate storage portion and a lower plate storage portion are provided as the plate storage portion. Surplus game balls in the upper tray storage section guided by the device are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

Further, in the slot machine, when the start lever is operated to start a new game while medals are bet, the control means executes the lottery process. Further, when the lottery process is executed, the rotation start control is executed by the control means to start the rotation of the reel, and when the stop button is operated during the rotation of the reel, the control means Rotation of the reel is stopped by execution of rotation stop control. Then, when the stop result after the rotation of the reels is stopped corresponds to the winning combination in the lottery process, a privilege corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, it is necessary to perform processing favorably in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each of the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operation means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting game balls based on the operation of the operation means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game balls to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: The rotation of the rotating body is started based on the operation of the start operation means, the rotation of the rotating body is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means, and the player responds to the pattern after the stop. A game machine that gives benefits to

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine 31... Reel unit 41... Start lever 42-44... Stop button 57... Setting key insertion hole 67... Section display part 72... Main side MPU 74... Main side RAM 74c... Continuation Game number counter 74d...Total number counter 74g...Repetition number counter 76...Second random number circuit 92...Direction side MPU G12...Non-internal notification image G13...First internal explicit image SC2...Second section , ST2 .

Claims (1)

a situation setting means for setting a predetermined situation;
Advantageous transition means for shifting the game state to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player when the predetermined situation exists;
game-number-corresponding termination means for terminating the predetermined situation when the number of games executed in the predetermined situation reaches the upper limit number of games;
with
In the predetermined situation,
a first stay mode in which the predetermined situation ends when the advantageous gaming state ends in the predetermined situation;
a second stay mode in which the predetermined situation can continue even after the advantageous gaming state ends in the predetermined situation;
is set and
The advantageous transition means are
a first release transition means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state based on the number of games executed in the predetermined situation and the specific game state reaching a first release game number ;
If the predetermined situation is maintained in the case where the advantageous game state ends in the second stay mode and the transition to the specific game state is performed, if the predetermined situation is the specific game state a second release transition means for shifting the game state to the advantageous game state based on the fact that the number of games played has reached the second release game number;
with
The upper limit number of games is a number of games greater than the total number of games of the first unlocked game number, the second unlocked game number, and the minimum continuous game number of the advantageous gaming state,
A plurality of the number of first release games exist,
The gaming machine, wherein the number of games to be unlocked is all less than the upper limit number of games .

Images